三藏之路 Tipitaka Path
巴利三藏 · 巴利语翻译标准中译
首页义注经藏义注长部义注3. 阿摩德经义注

3. Ambaṭṭhasuttaṃ · 3. 阿摩德经义注

363 段 · CSCD 巴利原典
2. Sāmaññaphalasuttavaṇṇanā2. 《沙门果经》注释
Rājāmaccakathāvaṇṇanā王与大臣对话之注释
§150
150.Evaṃme sutaṃ…pe… rājagaheti sāmaññaphalasuttaṃ. Tatrāyaṃ apubbapadavaṇṇanā – rājagaheti evaṃnāmake nagare. Tañhi mandhātumahāgovindādīhi pariggahitattā rājagahanti vuccati. Aññepi ettha pakāre vaṇṇayanti, kiṃ tehi? Nāmamattametaṃ tassa nagarassa. Taṃ panetaṃ buddhakāle ca cakkavattikāle ca nagaraṃ hoti, sesakāle suññaṃ hoti yakkhapariggahitaṃ, tesaṃ vasanavanaṃ hutvā tiṭṭhati. Viharatīti avisesena iriyāpathadibbabrahmaariyavihāresu aññataravihārasamaṅgiparidīpanametaṃ. Idha pana ṭhānagamananisajjasayanappabhedesu iriyāpathesu aññatarairiyāpathasamāyogaparidīpanaṃ. Tena ṭhitopi gacchantopi nisinnopi sayānopi bhagavā viharati ceva veditabbo. So hi ekaṃ iriyāpathabādhanaṃ aññena iriyāpathena vicchinditvā aparipatantaṃ attabhāvaṃ harati pavatteti, tasmā viharatīti vuccati.
150.如是我闻……如是于王舍城者,是名出家果经。在此依前言略释——所谓王舍城,即此名之城。因由曼陀头、大劫维耆多等执持,此城乃称为王舍城。亦有人如此别加叙述者,为何?此乃单指该城名称而已。且在佛陀时及四方世主时代,此城乃有人烟之地,而后时代则空无人,犹如亚卡所占据,居于其间,占据如林。所谓“住”,乃特指行路、住宿、卧具等诸行住坐卧之法中之某种庄严。此中行路及坐卧有别,住即是指行路时交通畅通、卧具无碍。在此诸行住之中,佛陀于行走时、站立时、坐卧时都当知是为“住”。彼实为断绝一种行路之障碍,于无碍之行路中维持自性不断流转,此故名为“住”。
Jīvakassa komārabhaccassa ambavaneti idamassa yaṃ gocaragāmaṃ upanissāya viharati, tassa samīpanivāsanaṭṭhānaparidīpanaṃ. Tasmā – rājagahe viharati jīvakassa komārabhaccassa ambavaneti rājagahasamīpe jīvakassa komārabhaccassa ambavane viharatīti evamettha attho veditabbo. Samīpatthe hetaṃ bhummavacanaṃ. Tattha jīvatīti jīvako, kumārena bhatoti komārabhacco. Yathāha – ‘‘kiṃ bhaṇe, etaṃ kākehi samparikiṇṇanti? Dārako devāti. Jīvati bhaṇeti? Jīvati, devāti. Tena hi, bhaṇe taṃ dārakaṃ amhākaṃ antepuraṃ netvā dhātīnaṃ detha posetunti. Tassa jīvatīti jīvakoti nāmaṃ akaṃsu. Kumārena posāpitoti komārabhaccoti nāmaṃ akaṃsū’’ti (mahāva. 328) ayaṃ panettha saṅkhepo. Vitthārena pana jīvakavatthukhandhake āgatameva. Vinicchayakathāpissa samantapāsādikāya vinayaṭṭhakathāyaṃ vuttā.
基瓦迦那之小孩所在果园者,依其所依止之聚落而居,其周围住所及所在之处悉加庄严。故此意谓“于王舍城中,基瓦迦那小孩所在果园附近,住于基瓦迦那小孩所在果园”,因言其邻近如此,此义当知也。所谓邻近即此地之所在名。此处基瓦者意为生者,迦那为子,故谓子也。正如言:“谓何?此何鸟类聚集?曰:儿童之天也。问子曰:生者乎?曰:生者也。故我语曰,当为儿童守护乡邑,养育其属。”因此名曰基瓦,意即生者也。迦那与幼童相类,即名小孩。此释略而详者,载于详细基瓦经卷内。此释当在《相应部》及《增支部》等律藏注释之中述及。
Ayaṃ pana jīvako ekasmiṃ samaye bhagavato dosābhisannaṃ kāyaṃ virecetvā siveyyakaṃ dussayugaṃ datvā vatthānumodanāpariyosāne sotāpattiphale patiṭṭhāya cintesi – ‘‘mayā divasassa dvattikkhattuṃ buddhupaṭṭhānaṃ gantabbaṃ, idañca veḷuvanaṃ atidūre, mayhaṃ pana ambavanaṃ uyyānaṃ āsannataraṃ, yaṃnūnāhaṃ ettha bhagavato vihāraṃ kāreyya’’nti. So tasmiṃ ambavane rattiṭṭhānadivāṭhānaleṇakuṭimaṇḍapādīni sampādetvā bhagavato anucchavikaṃ gandhakuṭiṃ kārāpetvā ambavanaṃ aṭṭhārasahatthubbedhena tambapaṭṭavaṇṇena pākārena parikkhipāpetvā buddhappamukhaṃ bhikkhusaṅghaṃ sacīvarabhattena santappetvā dakkhiṇodakaṃ pātetvā vihāraṃ niyyātesi. Taṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ – ‘‘jīvakassa komārabhaccassa ambavane’’ti.
此基瓦于一时,心念断除对佛陀之忿怒,布施上品薜荔被褥,供养天竺甘露筵席,庆赞佛法末期授得初果。彼心生思惟:“吾应于二十三日成佛所念所至之地往至,又此竹林过远,吾果园桃源较近,若能于此处为佛造室。”于是彼于果园夜宿,日间伐木修建拱廊、凉亭、草庐等。又为佛弟子僧团营造香亭,为佛面前遍撒十八拳头宽之红土绯红花瓣,招待诸比库及其持钵僧众,并洒清凉水。乃建造林中清净精舍。斯事虽已毕,却名“基瓦迦那小孩所在果园”也。
Aḍḍhateḷasehi bhikkhusatehīti aḍḍhasatena ūnehi terasahi bhikkhusatehi. Rājātiādīsu rājati attano issariyasampattiyā catūhi saṅgahavatthūhi mahājanaṃ rañjeti vaḍḍhetīti rājā. Magadhānaṃ issaroti māgadho. Ajātoyeva rañño sattu bhavissatīti nemittakehi niddiṭṭhoti ajātasattu.
八十三比库伽集,即八十三比库稍减十三,比库合共七十三之略称。关于王者,王者者,以其主宰财宝与四种护卫等庞大群民而威震,故谓王。摩揭陀之主称为摩揭陀王。所谓“未生怨者”是以象征性指示,即未出世时已为王者诸敌之意,故称未生怨也。
Tasmiṃ kira kucchigate deviyā evarūpo dohaḷo uppajji – ‘‘aho vatāhaṃ rañño dakkhiṇabāhulohitaṃ piveyya’’nti, sā ‘‘bhāriye ṭhāne dohaḷo uppanno, na sakkā kassaci ārocetu’’nti taṃ kathetuṃ asakkontī kisā dubbaṇṇā ahosi. Taṃ rājā pucchi – ‘‘bhadde, tuyhaṃ attabhāvo na pakativaṇṇo, kiṃ kāraṇa’’nti? ‘‘Mā puccha, mahārājāti’’. ‘‘Bhadde, tvaṃ attano ajjhāsayaṃ mayhaṃ akathentī kassa kathessasī’’ti tathā tathā nibandhitvā kathāpesi. Sutvā ca – ‘‘bāle, kiṃ ettha tuyhaṃ bhāriyasaññā ahosī’’ti vejjaṃ pakkosāpetvā suvaṇṇasatthakena bāhuṃ phālāpetvā suvaṇṇasarakena lohitaṃ gahetvā udakena sambhinditvā pāyesi. Nemittakā taṃ sutvā – ‘‘esa gabbho rañño sattu bhavissati, iminā rājā haññissatī’’ti byākariṃsu. Devī sutvā – ‘‘mayhaṃ kira kucchito nikkhanto rājānaṃ māressatī’’ti gabbhaṃ pātetukāmā uyyānaṃ gantvā kucchiṃ maddāpesi, gabbho na patati. Sā punappunaṃ gantvā tatheva kāresi. Rājā kimatthaṃ ayaṃ abhiṇhaṃ uyyānaṃ gacchatīti parivīmaṃsanto taṃ kāraṇaṃ sutvā – ‘‘bhadde, tava kucchiyaṃ puttoti vā dhītāti vā na paññāyati, attano nibbattadārakaṃ evamakāsīti mahā aguṇarāsipi no jambudīpatale āvibhavissati, mā tvaṃ evaṃ karohī’’ti nivāretvā ārakkhaṃ adāsi. Sā gabbhavuṭṭhānakāle ‘‘māressāmī’’ti cintesi. Tadāpi ārakkhamanussā dārakaṃ apanayiṃsu. Athāparena samayena vuḍḍhippattaṃ kumāraṃ deviyā dassesuṃ. Sā taṃ disvāva puttasinehaṃ uppādesi, tena naṃ māretuṃ nāsakkhi. Rājāpi anukkamena puttassa oparajjamadāsi.
当时库甲城有一皇后生有胎芽,称呼为多毛色之酒浆,曰:“安哉,我愿王能饮此南方诃叉红酒。”其后皇后说:“尊夫所处之地诃叉生酒,本不可告他人。”因而羞怯黯然。王问曰:“贤女,汝心之所想甚么?”曰:“勿问,伟大王者。”王曰:“贤女,汝不可以内心所念而隐瞒于我;何人令汝不言?”依此原则彼述说。闻此,王怒责问曰:“愚人!何故于汝处生夫人之念?”随手挥以金杖,扬掷金箔色布,取红色粗布,浇水搅和后泼洒。占卜者闻此谓:“此胎必为王之敌,必当被王所杀。”皇后闻言,意念欲生杀王之心,往园中抚摩腹部,然胎不坠落。反复三次亦如是。王经过调查斯事因由,闻言告诫曰:“贤女,汝腹中胎儿或为子嗣,或为女儿,不可汝如此行事。”防止而立措施遂施。及胎儿发育成熟,众见皇后,母爱萌生,因之不敢杀之。王亦以宽仁放弃废除继承权。
Athekasmiṃ samaye devadatto rahogato cintesi – ‘‘sāriputtassa parisā mahāmoggallānassa parisā mahākassapassa parisāti, evamime visuṃ visuṃ dhurā, ahampi ekaṃ dhuraṃ nīharāmī’’ti. So ‘‘na sakkā vinā lābhena parisaṃ uppādetuṃ, handāhaṃ lābhaṃ nibbattemī’’ti cintetvā khandhake āgatanayena ajātasattuṃ kumāraṃ iddhipāṭihāriyena pasādetvā sāyaṃ pātaṃ pañcahi rathasatehi upaṭṭhānaṃ āgacchantaṃ ativissatthaṃ ñatvā ekadivasaṃ upasaṅkamitvā etadavoca – ‘‘pubbe kho, kumāra, manussā dīghāyukā, etarahi appāyukā, tena hi tvaṃ kumāra, pitaraṃ hantvā rājā hohi, ahaṃ bhagavantaṃ hantvā buddho bhavissāmī’’ti kumāraṃ pituvadhe uyyojeti.
有一时,迭瓦达特出家,思惟曰:“沙利众大集、摩嘎剌那众大集、大咖萨巴众大集聚处,如此纷乱,我今欲遏止一乱。”彼思:“无所得即不宜生众。”依此心念,以神通力安慰未生怨王子。晚间恭候,知晓五百战车侍从。翌日一早进至未生怨王宫,入宫后告说:“往昔诸人寿命久,今已短促,故汝王若杀父即成王,吾若杀王即成佛。”以杀父而成王之言激发王子之杀父意念。
So – ‘‘ayyo devadatto mahānubhāvo, etassa aviditaṃ nāma natthī’’ti ūruyā potthaniyaṃ bandhitvā divā divassa bhīto ubbiggo ussaṅkī utrasto antepuraṃ pavisitvā vuttappakāraṃ vippakāraṃ akāsi. Atha naṃ amaccā gahetvā anuyuñjitvā – ‘‘kumāro ca hantabbo, devadatto ca, sabbe ca bhikkhū hantabbā’’ti sammantayitvā rañño āṇāvasena karissāmāti rañño ārocesuṃ.
彼时,尊敬的天子德瓦达多大德者,心中无疑无惑,认为“此处没有不知之名”,于是紧紧握住长袍,白天黑夜心怀恐惧,忧心忡忡,惶惶不安,最终进入王宫,开始了各样的言行,有利有弊。然后,他被侍者抓住,带引他,商议说:“这少年应当被杀,德瓦达多也应被杀,所有比库都应被杀”,遂向国王提议发动政变。
Rājā ye amaccā māretukāmā ahesuṃ, tesaṃ ṭhānantarāni acchinditvā, ye na māretukāmā, te uccesu ṭhānesu ṭhapetvā kumāraṃ pucchi – ‘‘kissa pana tvaṃ, kumāra, maṃ māretukāmosī’’ti? ‘‘Rajjenamhi, deva, atthiko’’ti. Rājā tassa rajjaṃ adāsi.
国王问那些侍从愿意杀人的人,便将他们所在的位置砍断;不愿杀人的,则将他们安置在高处,然后询问少年:“王子啊,为何你想要杀我?”他回答说:“这乃于王位利益所为,天子啊。”于是国王便将国政交给他。
So mayhaṃ manoratho nipphannoti devadattassa ārocesi. Tato naṃ so āha – ‘‘tvaṃ siṅgālaṃ antokatvā bheripariyonaddhapuriso viya sukiccakārimhīti maññasi, katipāheneva te pitā tayā kataṃ avamānaṃ cintetvā sayameva rājā bhavissatī’’ti. Atha, bhante, kiṃ karomīti? Mūlaghaccaṃ ghātehīti. Nanu, bhante, mayhaṃ pitā na satthavajjhoti? Āhārupacchedena naṃ mārehīti. So pitaraṃ tāpanagehe pakkhipāpesi, tāpanagehaṃ nāma kammakaraṇatthāya kataṃ dhūmagharaṃ. ‘‘Mama mātaraṃ ṭhapetvā aññassa daṭṭhuṃ mā dethā’’ti āha. Devī suvaṇṇasarake bhattaṃ pakkhipitvā ucchaṅgenādāya pavisati. Rājā taṃ bhuñjitvā yāpeti. So – ‘‘mayhaṃ pitā kathaṃ yāpetī’’ti pucchitvā taṃ pavattiṃ sutvā – ‘‘mayhaṃ mātu ucchaṅgaṃ katvā pavisituṃ mā dethā’’ti āha. Tato paṭṭhāya devī moḷiyaṃ pakkhipitvā pavisati. Tampi sutvā ‘‘moḷiṃ bandhitvā pavisituṃ mā dethā’’ti. Tato suvaṇṇapādukāsu bhattaṃ ṭhapetvā pidahitvā pādukā āruyha pavisati. Rājā tena yāpeti. Puna ‘‘kathaṃ yāpetī’’ti pucchitvā tamatthaṃ sutvā ‘‘pādukā āruyha pavisitumpi mā dethā’’ti āha. Tato paṭṭhāya devī gandhodakena nhāyitvā sarīraṃ catumadhurena makkhetvā pārupitvā pavisati. Rājā tassā sarīraṃ lehitvā yāpeti. Puna pucchitvā taṃ pavattiṃ sutvā ‘‘ito paṭṭhāya mayhaṃ mātu pavesanaṃ nivārethā’’ti āha. Devī dvāramūle ṭhatvā ‘‘sāmi, bimbisāra, etaṃ daharakāle māretuṃ na adāsi, attano sattuṃ attanāva posesi, idaṃ pana dāni te pacchimadassanaṃ, nāhaṃ ito paṭṭhāya tumhe passituṃ labhāmi, sace mayhaṃ doso atthi, khamatha devā’’ti roditvā kanditvā nivatti.
他向德瓦达多诉说:“我心所愿了结。”德瓦达多说:“你认为杀死獅子般猛勇善战的辛格哈拉,做出的事行为恶,是不是?但毋庸置疑,父王想必因你受辱自愧将来你一定成为国王”。于是他说:“尊者,我应当如何为之?”答曰:“根本上的断灭”。他问:“但尊者,我父亲不能随意杀我不是?”。对方回答:“不要因饮食差别将其杀害”。然后,他将父亲扔入熏炉,熏炉乃因业报设作的烟熏室。他说:“我安置母后,不准他人见”。母后携食物至金道,双手奉献后进入。国王食用并生活。他问:“我父如何生活?”听闻经过后说:“我母不可用双手作势进入”。于是,母后托着棕榈叶枝入内。又听说说:“捆束棕榈枝不可进屋”。随后,母后携金鞋置饭上,焚烧后登鞋而入。国王以此供养。再次问及生活之状且经告知说:“不可穿鞋进入”。母后洗浴后用香水涂身体,用胭脂粉后入内。国王抚摩身体供养。再问生活状况获知后母后说:“今后莫阻我入内”。母后站于门邊曰:“贤相宾比萨拉啊,此乃年幼时我未曾杀他,他自养自护生命,此乃现今自西方之视,我自此处不起身观看。若有过失,众天请饶恕。”言毕放声哭泣而回。
Tato paṭṭhāya rañño āhāro natthi. Rājā maggaphalasukhena caṅkamena yāpeti. Ativiya assa attabhāvo virocati. So – ‘‘kathaṃ, me bhaṇe, pitā yāpetī’’ti pucchitvā ‘‘caṅkamena, deva, yāpeti; ativiya cassa attabhāvo virocatī’’ti sutvā ‘caṅkamaṃ dānissa hāressāmī’ti cintetvā – ‘‘mayhaṃ pitu pāde khurena phāletvā loṇatelena makkhetvā khadiraṅgārehi vītaccitehi pacathā’’ti nhāpite pesesi. Rājā te disvā – ‘‘nūna mayhaṃ putto kenaci saññatto bhavissati, ime mama massukaraṇatthāyāgatā’’ti cintesi. Te gantvā vanditvā aṭṭhaṃsu. ‘Kasmā āgatatthā’ti ca puṭṭhā taṃ sāsanaṃ ārocesuṃ. ‘‘Tumhākaṃ rañño manaṃ karothā’’ti ca vuttā ‘nisīda, devā’ti vatvā ca rājānaṃ vanditvā – ‘‘deva, mayaṃ rañño āṇaṃ karoma, mā amhākaṃ kujjhittha, nayidaṃ tumhādisānaṃ dhammarājūnaṃ anucchavika’’nti vatvā vāmahatthena gopphake gahetvā dakkhiṇahatthena khuraṃ gahetvā pādatalāni phāletvā loṇatelena makkhetvā khadiraṅgārehi vītaccitehi paciṃsu. Rājā kira pubbe cetiyaṅgaṇe saupāhano agamāsi, nisajjanatthāya paññattakaṭasārakañca adhotehi pādehi akkami, tassāyaṃ nissandoti vadanti. Rañño balavavedanā uppannā. So – ‘‘aho buddho, aho dhammo, aho saṅgho’’ti anussarantoyeva cetiyaṅgaṇe khittamālā viya milāyitvā cātumahārājikadevaloke vessavaṇassa paricārako janavasabho nāma yakkho hutvā nibbatti.
此后,国王未备食。国王以行走感受道果之乐。真如其色,王体光芒照耀。他问:“告诉我,父王如何生活?”回答是:“天子啊,以行走供养,真如王体光照。”听闻此语,国王思:“我将为父施行供养。”于是说:“我以鞭子鞭打父脚,涂鹽油,用苦楝果叶包裹,以供洗浴。”王侍臣见此,想必我的儿子将有礼贤下士,特来助我行孝。前去跪拜八拜,问其来意,叙述此教法。劝说曰:“愿使王心平静。”说毕,侍臣向国王行礼说:“尊者,我们将侍奉尊王,不敢亏负,愿依此教令。”以左手握鞭,右手执刀,刮除脚板,涂鹽油,包苦楝叶为洗浴。国王时常兴起念想致力此事。国王喜乐无量。遂有力苦之感。复念佛法僧三宝,犹如寺庙中供养绪带,乃至帝释萨咖的侍从夜叉人,名曰珍伽婆,乃新生。
Taṃ divasameva ajātasattussa putto jāto, puttassa jātabhāvañca pitumatabhāvañca nivedetuṃ dve lekhā ekakkhaṇeyeva āgatā. Amaccā – ‘‘paṭhamaṃ puttassa jātabhāvaṃ ārocessāmā’’ti taṃ lekhaṃ rañño hatthe ṭhapesuṃ. Rañño taṅkhaṇeyeva puttasineho uppajjitvā sakalasarīraṃ khobhetvā aṭṭhimiñjaṃ āhacca aṭṭhāsi. Tasmiṃ khaṇe pituguṇamaññāsi – ‘‘mayi jātepi mayhaṃ pitu evameva sineho uppanno’’ti. So – ‘‘gacchatha, bhaṇe, mayhaṃ pitaraṃ vissajjethā’’ti āha. ‘‘Kiṃ vissajjāpetha, devā’’ti itaraṃ lekhaṃ hatthe ṭhapayiṃsu.
次日,阿阇世的儿子诞生。诞生儿子及父子情感两文俱至,瞬时抵达。侍者说:“先展知儿子诞生之状”,递书于国王。国王心生怜爱儿子,驱走全身菌疾,同时发出咳嗽声。彼时识知父德,谨言曰:“即便我诞生,父亲对我亦有如此爱。”遂说:“去,君王,请饶恕我父。”递他另一文书于手。
So taṃ pavattiṃ sutvā rodamāno mātusamīpaṃ gantvā – ‘‘ahosi nu, kho, amma, mayhaṃ pitu mayi jāte sineho’’ti? Sā āha – ‘‘bālaputta, kiṃ vadesi, tava daharakāle aṅguliyā pīḷakā uṭṭhahi. Atha taṃ rodamānaṃ saññāpetuṃ asakkontā taṃ gahetvā vinicchayaṭṭhāne nisinnassa tava pitu santikaṃ agamaṃsu. Pitā te aṅguliṃ mukhe ṭhapesi. Pīḷakā mukheyeva bhijji. Atha kho pitā tava sinehena taṃ lohitamissakaṃ pubbaṃ aniṭṭhubhitvāva ajjhohari. Evarūpo te pitu sineho’’ti. So roditvā paridevitvā pitu sarīrakiccaṃ akāsi.
听闻此事,他泣不成声,往母处说:“母亲,是否因我诞生时父亲疼爱我?”母曰:“孩子,你为何如此说?童年时你手指受创伤。”觉知哭泣难止,拥抱欲安抚。即时父亲来到,置子指于口中,所伤之指生化血液。如此,父爱如是。”他哭泣悲痛,践行尽父事。
Devadattopi ajātasattuṃ upasaṅkamitvā – ‘‘purise, mahārāja, āṇāpehi, ye samaṇaṃ gotamaṃ jīvitā voropessantī’’ti vatvā tena dinne purise pesetvā sayaṃ gijjhakūṭaṃ āruyha yantena silaṃ pavijjhitvā nāḷāgirihatthiṃ muñcāpetvāpi kenaci upāyena bhagavantaṃ māretuṃ asakkonto parihīnalābhasakkāro pañca vatthūni yācitvā tāni alabhamāno tehi janaṃ saññāpessāmīti saṅghabhedaṃ katvā sāriputtamoggallānesu parisaṃ ādāya pakkantesu uṇhalohitaṃ mukhena chaḍḍetvā navamāse gilānamañce nipajjitvā vippaṭisārajāto – ‘‘kuhiṃ etarahi satthā vasatī’’ti pucchitvā ‘‘jetavane’’ti vutte mañcakena maṃ āharitvā satthāraṃ dassethāti vatvā āhariyamāno bhagavato dassanārahassa kammassa akatattā jetavane pokkharaṇīsamīpeyeva dvedhā bhinnaṃ pathaviṃ pavisitvā mahāniraye patiṭṭhitoti. Ayamettha saṅkhepo. Vitthārakathānayo khandhake āgato. Āgatattā pana sabbaṃ na vuttanti. Evaṃ ajātoyeva rañño sattu bhavissatīti nemittakehi niddiṭṭhoti ajātasattu.
迭瓦达德也前往未生怨处,就对那名大臣说:“王者啊,用针象施以讽喻,若有人欲断舍游方者果德玛之命。”说毕,当天便派遣此人,自行攀登蜈蚣峰,依戒而入,放弃了长鼻象,又因无计谋杀佛,不能得手,便乞求五件袈裟。未得这些衣服时,欲用它们指示他人,因而制造了僧团分裂。于是取了沙利子及摩嘎剌那等众的社群,分裂后以炽热血口吐出,进入伤残病床,毫无遮掩之色,向人问道:“今佛师何处安住?”答曰:“居于揭德林。”后来被玛难迦引来,念说要示现佛陀;然而因未得成就佛陀现身的功德,当被判定堕入大地狱界,陷于大苦恼中。以上为简略描述。详细由章节所载,但并非全部皆述。如是,未生怨必成为王之敌,此为预兆所示,谓之未生怨敌。
Vedehiputtoti ayaṃ kosalarañño dhītāya putto, na videharañño. Vedehīti pana paṇḍitādhivacanametaṃ. Yathāha – ‘‘vedehikā gahapatānī (ma. ni. 1.226), ayyo ānando vedehamunī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 2.154). Tatrāyaṃ vacanattho – vidanti etenāti vedo, ñāṇassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Vedena īhati ghaṭati vāyamatīti vedehī. Vedehiyā putto vedehiputto.
所谓维德希子者,即为迦萨罗国王的女儿之子,而非维德希国王之子。维德希意为智者的称谓。例如《中部尼》中的“维德希的居家妇人”和《增壹阿含》中“尊者阿难为维德希苦行者”之类语句。此处用词旨在表明维德希乃智者之意。由智者诞生的子嗣,即称为维德希子。
Tadahūti tasmiṃ ahu, tasmiṃ divaseti attho. Upavasanti etthāti uposatho, upavasantīti sīlena vā anasanena vā upetā hutvā vasantīti attho. Ayaṃ panettha atthuddhāro – ‘‘āyāmāvuso, kappina, uposathaṃ gamissāmā’’tiādīsu pātimokkhuddeso uposatho. ‘‘Evaṃ aṭṭhaṅgasamannāgato kho, visākhe, uposatho upavuttho’’tiādīsu (a. ni. 8.43) sīlaṃ. ‘‘Suddhassa ve sadā phaggu, suddhassuposatho sadā’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.79) upavāso. ‘‘Uposatho nāma nāgarājā’’tiādīsu (dī. ni. 2.246) paññatti . ‘‘Na, bhikkhave, tadahuposathe sabhikkhukā āvāsā’’tiādīsu (mahāva. 181) upavasitabbadivaso. Idhāpi soyeva adhippeto. So panesa aṭṭhamī cātuddasī pannarasībhedena tividho. Tasmā sesadvayanivāraṇatthaṃ pannaraseti vuttaṃ. Teneva vuttaṃ – ‘‘upavasanti etthāti uposatho’’ti.
“Tadahū”意谓“其时、当时”;“tasmiṃ divase”即“那日、当天”。“Upavasanti”意味着“守斋日”,即“守斋日、斋戒日”。守斋实为以持戒或禁食而安住之义。此处言“守斋”,引广大摩顶经含意曰:“朋友咖毕那,我们将前往斋日”及如下一切律文称之为斋日。斋日被视为具足八正道的、与净行相应的守日。又有称谓曰“洁净的斋日必为盛食”,谓守斋日为净行。还有比喻说斋日如诸天之王。依大律篇语,斋日应由全体比库共守,称为“守斋日”。至今仍如此遵行。此守斋日有三种区分,基于八日、十四日、十五日三种分法。因余二种受阻于禁戒而不便捐弃,故称十五日为守斋。故有云:“守斋者,即斋日也。”
Komudiyāti kumudavatiyā. Tadā kira kumudāni supupphitāni honti, tāni ettha santīti komudī. Cātumāsiniyāti cātumāsiyā, sā hi catunnaṃ māsānaṃ pariyosānabhūtāti cātumāsī. Idha pana cātumāsinīti vuccati. Māsapuṇṇatāya utupuṇṇatāya saṃvaccharapuṇṇatāya puṇṇā sampuṇṇāti puṇṇā. Mā iti cando vuccati, so ettha puṇṇoti puṇṇamā. Evaṃ puṇṇāya puṇṇamāyāti imasmiṃ padadvaye ca attho veditabbo.
Komudiyāti意指“由莲花而得名者”,即指莲花般的。在古时,莲花余未凋谢且盛放时,故名曰“Komudī”。“Cātumāsinī”是“由四个月满之时而名”,即“当四月圆满之期而满”的意思。此处专指四个月节气的时段。满月名曰“mā”,此处引为圆满之意。如此,此字指圆满和满盈,在此两语中可知此词的意义。
Rājāmaccaparivutoti evarūpāya rajataghaṭaviniggatāhi khīradhārāhi dhoviyamānadisābhāgāya viya, rajatavimānaviccutehi muttāvaḷisumanakusumadāmasetadukūlakumudavisarehi samparikiṇṇāya viya ca, caturupakkilesavimuttapuṇṇacandappabhāsamudayobhāsitāya rattiyā rājāmaccehi parivutoti attho. Uparipāsādavaragatoti pāsādavarassa uparigato. Mahārahe samussitasetacchatte kañcanāsane nisinno hoti. Kasmā nisinno? Niddāvinodanatthaṃ. Ayañhi rājā pitari upakkantadivasato paṭṭhāya – ‘‘niddaṃ okkamissāmī’’ti nimīlitamattesuyeva akkhīsu sattisataabbhāhato viya kandamānoyeva pabujjhi. Kimetanti ca vutte, na kiñcīti vadati. Tenassa amanāpā niddā, iti niddāvinodanatthaṃ nisinno. Api ca tasmiṃ divase nakkhattaṃ saṅghuṭṭhaṃ hoti. Sabbaṃ nagaraṃ sittasammaṭṭhaṃ vippakiṇṇavālukaṃ pañcavaṇṇakusumalājapuṇṇaghaṭapaṭimaṇḍitagharadvāraṃ samussitadhajapaṭākavicitrasamujjalitadīpamālālaṅkatasabbadisābhāgaṃ vīthisabhāgena racchāsabhāgena nakkhattakīḷaṃ anubhavamānena mahājanena samākiṇṇaṃ hoti. Iti nakkhattadivasatāyapi nisinnoti vadanti. Evaṃ pana vatvāpi – ‘‘rājakulassa nāma sadāpi nakkhattameva, niddāvinodanatthaṃyeva panesa nisinno’’ti sanniṭṭhānaṃ kataṃ.
“Rājāmaccaparivutoti”意为“包覆着像金色水罐般的珠宝点缀物”,如同璎珞串珠点缀的珠宝装饰,此乃比喻光彩夺目的珠宝。意为“用四方珍珠及莲花宝石环绕”。“Uparipāsādavaragatoti”为“位于高级宫殿之上”,即宫殿上层,此人坐于金床之上。为何坐?为驱除困倦之意。此日其父王即将出门睡觉,闭目之际,眼睛明亮如星光闪烁而哭泣。何意?无言。此乃无兴趣的困倦。且当天夜晚聚集市场。全城铺满盐、沙土、五色花瓣、宝瓶环绕门口,遍设灯火,灯光辉煌耀眼,并以街道和广场为场地,聚集大量民众。如此于星宿夜坐,此谓“星宿日安坐”。虽如此,仍言“王室中人终日处于星宿日,实为无兴趣困倦,特为安驱倦而坐”之地。
Udānaṃudānesīti udāhāraṃ udāhari, yathā hi yaṃ telaṃ mānaṃ gahetuṃ na sakkoti, vissanditvā gacchati, taṃ avasekoti vuccati. Yañca jalaṃ taḷākaṃ gahetuṃ na sakkoti, ajjhottharitvā gacchati, taṃ oghoti vuccati; evameva yaṃ pītivacanaṃ hadayaṃ gahetuṃ na sakkoti, adhikaṃ hutvā anto asaṇṭhahitvā bahinikkhamati, taṃ udānanti vuccati. Evarūpaṃ pītimayaṃ vacanaṃ nicchāresīti attho.
“Udānaṃ”取其“举例”之意,就如油脂如果无法盛取,则会溢落,这称作“avaseka”。又如水中无法盛取水,则会溢出,这谓“ogha”。同理,心中喜乐言语若不可盛取,则会产生内心过度膨胀并释放,退出兄弟以外之境界,此谓“udāna”。即言欢乐喜悦之语不宜过度释出之义。
Dosināti dosāpagatā, abbhā, mahikā, dhūmo, rajo, rāhūti imehi pañcahi upakkilesehi virahitāti vuttaṃ hoti. Tasmā ramaṇīyātiādīni pañca thomanavacanāni. Sā hi mahājanassa manaṃ ramayatīti ramaṇīyā. Vuttadosavimuttāya candappabhāya obhāsitattā ativiya surūpāti abhirūpā. Dassituṃ yuttāti dassanīyā. Cittaṃ pasādetīti pāsādikā. Divasamāsādīnaṃ lakkhaṇaṃ bhavituṃ yuttāti lakkhaññā.
烦恼即是不善,灯、泥土、烟、尘埃、黑暗,此五者称为五种污秽障碍,因这些虽被去除则称为除污净障。因此,喜爱、美丽等诸称呼皆属于五种称谓中的赞叹之辞。所谓喜爱者,意指能悦服大众之心;所谓美丽者,谓脱离烦恼而明朗如月光般皎洁,胜貌绝伦;所谓可见者,谓适于观览;所谓悦心者,谓令心安乐;如昼之具足等,谓理应成就其特征。此乃对五种称谓的详尽解说。
Kaṃ nu khvajjāti kaṃ nu kho ajja. Samaṇaṃ vā brāhmaṇaṃ vāti samitapāpatāya samaṇaṃ. Bāhitapāpatāya brāhmaṇaṃ. Yaṃ no payirupāsatoti vacanabyattayo esa, yaṃ amhākaṃ pañhapucchanavasena payirupāsantānaṃ madhuraṃ dhammaṃ sutvā cittaṃ pasīdeyyāti attho. Iti rājā iminā sabbenapi vacanena obhāsanimittakammaṃ akāsi. Kassa akāsīti? Jīvakassa. Kimatthaṃ? Bhagavato dassanatthaṃ. Kiṃ bhagavantaṃ sayaṃ dassanāya upagantuṃ na sakkotīti? Āma, na sakkoti. Kasmā? Mahāparādhatāya.
现在究竟是谁呢?是平常人还是今日来访的沙门或婆罗门呢?谓因善恶有度,若为有序之恶则为沙门,若为外出之恶则为婆罗门。所谓‘我们礼敬谁’者即使之言语,以此表明闻正法能悦心之义。于是国王藉此言说作了引导性缘由。问此引导性缘由之主是谁?是医师基瓦卡。目的为何?为得见世尊。为何不能亲自前往见世尊?确乎不能。何故?由重大犯罪所致。
Tena hi bhagavato upaṭṭhāko ariyasāvako attano pitā mārito, devadatto ca tameva nissāya bhagavato bahuṃ anatthamakāsi, iti mahāparādho esa, tāya mahāparādhatāya sayaṃ gantuṃ na sakkoti. Jīvako pana bhagavato upaṭṭhāko, tassa piṭṭhichāyāya bhagavantaṃ passissāmīti obhāsanimittakammaṃ akāsi. Kiṃ jīvako pana – ‘‘mayhaṃ idaṃ obhāsanimittakamma’’nti jānātīti? Āma jānāti. Atha kasmā tuṇhī ahosīti? Vikkhepapacchedanatthaṃ.
正因如此,世尊的侍者、尊敬的弟子其父已死,天子迦毗罗却依赖于那父亲,作了大量无益行为,此为重罪,因这重大罪过他不能亲自前去。然基瓦卡作为世尊侍者,在其背后策划为世尊示现医治之缘由。他是否知晓‘这是示现医治之缘’?确实知晓。那么为何保持沉默?为切断传播关系之故。
Tassañhi parisati channaṃ satthārānaṃ upaṭṭhākā bahū sannipatitā, te asikkhitānaṃ payirupāsanena sayampi asikkhitāva. Te mayi bhagavato guṇakathaṃ āraddhe antarantarā uṭṭhāyuṭṭhāya attano satthārānaṃ guṇaṃ kathessanti, evaṃ me satthu guṇakathā pariyosānaṃ na gamissati. Rājā pana imesaṃ kulūpake upasaṅkamitvā gahitāsāratāya tesaṃ guṇakathāya anattamano hutvā maṃ paṭipucchissati, athāhaṃ nibbikkhepaṃ satthu guṇaṃ kathetvā rājānaṃ satthu santikaṃ gahetvā gamissāmīti jānantova vikkhepapacchedanatthaṃ tuṇhī ahosīti.
当时众多未受教化之佛弟子之教师侍者聚集于此,他们虽未受教导而奉行礼敬,我亦如未受教者一般随顺。他们心中已生起论述世尊优德之意,于是屡次起立述说佛之美德,如此我讲述佛德之事必不会终止。国王于是亲近这些族子,虽然有深厚执着,但因不乐于讲述佛德而发问我,我告知将消除执着,为了讲述佛德将与国王同往,于是因中断传播关系而保持沉默。
Tepi amaccā evaṃ cintesuṃ – ‘‘ajja rājā pañcahi padehi rattiṃ thometi, addhā kiñci samaṇaṃ vā brāhmaṇaṃ vā upasaṅkamitvā pañhaṃ pucchitvā dhammaṃ sotukāmo, yassa cesa dhammaṃ sutvā pasīdissati, tassa ca mahantaṃ sakkāraṃ karissati, yassa pana kulūpako samaṇo rājakulūpako hoti, bhaddaṃ tassā’’ti.
这三位长辈如此思惟——‘今夜国王将以五个字为夜奏乐,且先去朝见某位沙门或婆罗门询问疑难,希冀听闻法义,听闻后必生欢喜,且必为其造极大礼敬;若此族子是作为沙门,则是皇家子弟,必然吉祥安乐’。
§151-152
151-152. Te evaṃ cintetvā – ‘‘ahaṃ attano kulūpakasamaṇassa vaṇṇaṃ vatvā rājānaṃ gahetvā gamissāmi, ahaṃ gamissāmī’’ti attano attano kulūpakānaṃ vaṇṇaṃ kathetuṃ āraddhā. Tenāha – ‘‘evaṃ vutte aññataro rājāmacco’’tiādi. Tattha pūraṇoti tassa satthupaṭiññassa nāmaṃ. Kassapoti gottaṃ. So kira aññatarassa kulassa ekūnadāsasataṃ pūrayamāno jāto, tenassa pūraṇoti nāmaṃ akaṃsu. Maṅgaladāsattā cassa ‘‘dukkaṭa’’nti vattā natthi, akataṃ vā na katanti. So ‘‘kimahaṃ ettha vasāmī’’ti palāyi. Athassa corā vatthāni acchindiṃsu, so paṇṇena vā tiṇena vā paṭicchādetumpi ajānanto jātarūpeneva ekaṃ gāmaṃ pāvisi. Manussā taṃ disvā ‘‘ayaṃ samaṇo arahā appiccho, natthi iminā sadiso’’ti pūvabhattādīni gahetvā upasaṅkamanti. So – ‘‘mayhaṃ sāṭakaṃ anivatthabhāvena idaṃ uppanna’’nti tato paṭṭhāya sāṭakaṃ labhitvāpi na nivāsesi, tadeva pabbajjaṃ aggahesi, tassa santike aññepi aññepīti pañcasatamanussā pabbajiṃsu. Taṃ sandhāyāha – ‘‘pūraṇo kassapo’’ti.
151-152. 他们如此思忖——‘我将以自己之身份说出族子沙门之相貌,携他往见国王,我将前往’。遂开始描述各自族子的相貌。于是有一国王子姓名为布勒纳称为完成者。此人乃属于某一族之九百零一世代,其名因此得名。有名为‘幸运仆人’者曾被指为恶人,但实无所为。他曾问‘我应居于何处’而逃避,切断关系后破坏盗窃他人财产,虽不自知以树叶或草等遮盖,但仍如地上杂草隐没于乡村。人们见之谓‘此沙门阿拉汉少有其匹’且携前食等诸物前往。此人曰‘我因患病未能安住’,虽得药却不宁居,此即放弃世俗之缘起。遂有五百人先后皈依出家。对此事依凭称‘布勒纳迦萨巴’。
Pabbajitasamūhasaṅkhāto saṅgho assa atthīti saṅghī. Sveva gaṇo assa atthīti gaṇī. Ācārasikkhāpanavasena tassa gaṇassa ācariyoti gaṇācariyo. Ñātoti paññāto pākaṭo. ‘‘Appiccho santuṭṭho. Appicchatāya vatthampi na nivāsetī’’ti evaṃ samuggato yaso assa atthīti yasassī. Titthakaroti laddhikaro. Sādhusammatoti ayaṃ sādhu, sundaro, sappurisoti evaṃ sammato. Bahujanassāti assutavato andhabālaputhujjanassa. Pabbajitato paṭṭhāya atikkantā bahū rattiyo jānātīti rattaññū. Ciraṃ pabbajitassa assāti cirapabbajito, acirapabbajitassa hi kathā okappanīyā na hoti, tenāha ‘‘cirapabbajito’’ti. Addhagatoti addhānaṃ gato, dve tayo rājaparivaṭṭe atītoti adhippāyo. Vayoanuppattoti pacchimavayaṃ anuppatto. Idaṃ ubhayampi – ‘‘daharassa kathā okappanīyā na hotī’’ti etaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ.
「出家者」者,迷惑已断的圣众称为「僧众」。自身团体存在者称为「团体众」。作为行为规范传授者,此团体的师长称为「团体长」。亲族者为已知且明显者。谓其「欲求少、安乐少,且不经营住宅」,如此称誉者为有威望者。乞丐者,为谋利者。谓其「善法所承认,纯美及贤人」,如此认可者。为多数人则指无闻且盲昧的俗人。以出家为根本,远离放逸者多年,谓之「久出家者」。未久出者故事不得速记,故谓「久出家者」。去往定处者,谓之「去往」。经两三王国边界者谓为「统治过去」。未至暮年者谓「未达老年」。此二义皆记为「幼者话不可速记」,是为此义。
Tuṇhīahosīti suvaṇṇavaṇṇaṃ madhurarasaṃ ambapakkaṃ khāditukāmo puriso āharitvā hatthe ṭhapitaṃ kājarapakkaṃ disvā viya jhānābhiññādiguṇayuttaṃ tilakkhaṇabbhāhataṃ madhuraṃ dhammakathaṃ sotukāmo pubbe pūraṇassa dassanenāpi anattamano idāni guṇakathāya suṭṭhutaraṃ anattamano hutvā tuṇhī ahosi. Anattamano samānopi pana ‘‘sacāhaṃ etaṃ tajjetvā gīvāyaṃ gahetvā nīharāpessāmi, ‘yo yo kathesi, taṃ taṃ rājā evaṃ karotī’ti bhīto aññopi koci kiñci na kathessatī’’ti amanāpampi taṃ kathaṃ adhivāsetvā tuṇhī eva ahosi. Athañño – ‘‘ahaṃ attano kulūpakassa vaṇṇaṃ kathessāmī’’ti cintetvā vattuṃ ārabhi. Tena vuttaṃ – aññataropi khotiādi. Taṃ sabbaṃ vuttanayeneva veditabbaṃ.
谓乖隔寂静者,如手执合用以盛载熟透味甘的熟芒果,见其在手,如同具有禅那智慧等功德而被三相覆盖的甜美法说,渴闻者。过去虽不悦闻,但现以美妙法义久闻而悦闻。虽悦闻,仍恐他人不言「世尊即如是言」而不敢明讲,故以寂静待之。又他人心想「我将述说自己族姓事」而起说法,述说被称为呼吁等众说,此一切通过述说而当知。
Ettha pana makkhalīti tassa nāmaṃ. Gosālāya jātattā gosāloti dutiyaṃ nāmaṃ. Taṃ kira sakaddamāya bhūmiyā telaghaṭaṃ gahetvā gacchantaṃ – ‘‘tāta, mā khalī’’ti sāmiko āha. So pamādena khalitvā patitvā sāmikassa bhayena palāyituṃ āraddho. Sāmiko upadhāvitvā dussakaṇṇe aggahesi. So sāṭakaṃ chaḍḍetvā acelako hutvā palāyi. Sesaṃ pūraṇasadisameva.
此名即为马嘎哈王城那位名为「麦卡里」者。其又名为「牛舍」者,为其出生地。传说他曾一度携家地一罐油行走,主人言:「孩子,勿遗失。」他疏忽跌倒,恐主人责备欲逃走,主人追赶怒视。他弃械逃逸,变得孤僻,全然如前所述。
§153
153.Ajitoti tassa nāmaṃ. Kesakambalaṃ dhāretīti kesakambalo. Iti nāmadvayaṃ saṃsanditvā ajito kesakambaloti vuccati . Tattha kesakambalo nāma manussakesehi katakambalo. Tato paṭikiṭṭhataraṃ vatthaṃ nāma natthi. Yathāha – ‘‘seyyathāpi, bhikkhave, yāni kānici tantāvutānaṃ vatthānaṃ, kesakambalo tesaṃ paṭikiṭṭho akkhāyati. Kesakambalo, bhikkhave, sīte sīto, uṇhe uṇho, dubbaṇṇo duggandho dukkhasamphasso’’ti (a. ni. 3.138).
名为「阿吉多」,故名。佩带麦秸袈裟者称为麦秸袈裟。此为名称联合称呼为「阿吉多麦秸袈裟」。此麦秸袈裟是人间所用秸秆所制。无更低贱衣服称呼。譬如世尊言:「比库,凡由麻织物制,麦秸袈裟即称为麻布袈裟,麦秸袈裟夏凉冬暖,且难洗难闻及难穿。」(律藏3.138)
§154
154.Pakudhoti tassa nāmaṃ. Kaccāyanoti gottaṃ. Iti nāmagottaṃ saṃsanditvā pakudho kaccāyanoti vuccati. Sītudakapaṭikkhittako esa, vaccaṃ katvāpi udakakiccaṃ na karoti, uṇhodakaṃ vā kañjiyaṃ vā labhitvā karoti, nadiṃ vā maggodakaṃ vā atikkamma – ‘‘sīlaṃ me bhinna’’nti vālikathūpaṃ katvā sīlaṃ adhiṭṭhāya gacchati. Evarūpo nissirīkaladdhiko esa.
名为「波拘多」。族姓名为「迦腻色迦」。因名称与族姓结合,名「波拘多迦腻色迦」。此人为耐寒水者,言语虽多却不饮水,若有热水煮饭或汤,则饮用;渡河或过水时,言其戒律已断,便修持戒律前行。此人断然孤绝世俗欲求。
§155
155.Sañcayoti tassa nāmaṃ. Belaṭṭhassa puttoti belaṭṭhaputto.
名为「三差耶」。名为「摩罗多之子」,即「摩罗多子的儿子」。
§156
156. Amhākaṃ gaṇṭhanakileso palibandhanakileso natthi, kilesagaṇṭharahitā mayanti evaṃvāditāya laddhanāmavasena nigaṇṭho. Nāṭassa putto nāṭaputto.
156. 我们的烦恼缠结、束缚的烦恼皆不存在,断尽烦恼结的者,称为如是教法中受持名号的尼拘陀。并非乃陀之子,非乃陀子弟。
Komārabhaccajīvakakathāvaṇṇanā王子、屠夫与基瓦咖对话之注释
§157
157.Athakho rājāti rājā kira tesaṃ vacanaṃ sutvā cintesi – ‘‘ahaṃ yassa yassa vacanaṃ na sotukāmo, so so eva kathesi. Yassa panamhi vacanaṃ sotukāmo, esa nāgavasaṃ pivitvā ṭhito supaṇṇo viya tuṇhībhūto, anattho vata me’’ti. Athassa etadahosi – ‘‘jīvako upasantassa buddhassa bhagavato upaṭṭhāko, sayampi upasanto, tasmā vattasampanno bhikkhu viya tuṇhībhūtova nisinno, na esa mayi akathente kathessati, hatthimhi kho pana maddante hatthisseva pādo gahetabbo’’ti tena saddhiṃ sayaṃ mantetumāraddho. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘atha kho rājā’’ti. Tattha kiṃ tuṇhīti kena kāraṇena tuṇhī. Imesaṃ amaccānaṃ attano attano kulūpakasamaṇassa vaṇṇaṃ kathentānaṃ mukhaṃ nappahoti . Kiṃ yathā etesaṃ, evaṃ tava kulūpakasamaṇo natthi, kiṃ tvaṃ daliddo, na te mama pitarā issariyaṃ dinnaṃ, udāhu assaddhoti pucchati.
157. 国王听闻长者们的话语,便思惟道:“我对于谁的话语不喜欢听,他便对谁说话。至于自己喜欢听的话,像龙王隐居饮水,宛如金翅鸟安住无忧,毫无益处。”随后他想:“祇树给孤独园中安静的世尊果德玛的侍者基瓦咖,我自己亦是安静,所以像圆满戒律的比库一般,安住寂静,必不在我面前说过当说的言辞;但若有大象温顺时,应如抬手轻挪的大象一样,须用脚掌加以引导。”说毕,与众人共议并自己开始思维。于是有言:“国王啊。”此时问及“寂静”二字因何而得名?答曰:这些父兄们自述各自家族出家的相貌时,不掩盖其容貌。犹如你无此家族出家人,乃因你愚钝,非我父亲赏赐你权势,此乃无信之问也。
Tato jīvakassa etadahosi – ‘‘ayaṃ rājā maṃ kulūpakasamaṇassa guṇaṃ kathāpeti, na dāni me tuṇhībhāvassa kālo, yathā kho panime rājānaṃ vanditvā nisinnāva attano kulūpakasamaṇānaṃ guṇaṃ kathayiṃsu, na mayhaṃ evaṃ satthuguṇe kathetuṃ yutta’’nti uṭṭhāyāsanā bhagavato vihārābhimukho pañcapatiṭṭhitena vanditvā dasanakhasamodhānasamujjalaṃ añjaliṃ sirasi paggahetvā – ‘‘mahārāja, mā maṃ evaṃ cintayittha, ‘ayaṃ yaṃ vā taṃ vā samaṇaṃ upasaṅkamatī’ti, mama satthuno hi mātukucchiokkamane, mātukucchito nikkhamane, mahābhinikkhamane, sambodhiyaṃ, dhammacakkappavattane ca, dasasahassilokadhātu kampittha, evaṃ yamakapāṭihāriyaṃ akāsi, evaṃ devorohaṇaṃ, ahaṃ satthuno guṇe kathayissāmi, ekaggacitto suṇa, mahārājā’’ti vatvā – ‘‘ayaṃ deva, bhagavā arahaṃ sammāsambuddho’’tiādimāha. Tattha taṃ kho pana bhagavantanti itthambhūtākhyānatthe upayogavacanaṃ, tassa kho pana bhagavatoti attho. Kalyāṇoti kalyāṇaguṇasamannāgato, seṭṭhoti vuttaṃ hoti. Kittisaddoti kittiyeva. Thutighoso vā. Abbhuggatoti sadevakaṃ lokaṃ ajjhottharitvā uggato. Kinti? ‘‘Itipi so bhagavā arahaṃ sammāsambuddho…pe… bhagavā’’ti.
随后基瓦咖思惟道:“这王颂扬我家族出家者的美德,但现在并非我应隐匿的时刻。此前我已向国王及其众臣颂扬过我家族出家者的优良德行,但我不应光谈导师之德。”遂起身,面向世尊住处,五体投地顶礼至心清净,双手合十于头顶,言道:“大王,莫若如此思惟,‘凡遇此或彼出家者,我当谦恭敬礼。我的导师,经历母胎怀孕、母胎出世、殊胜大出世,成等正觉,转动法轮,搅动十万世界,如此双重神迹显现,我当谦敬倾听其德,大王。’”国王闻言说:“这位天尊谓曰世尊、阿拉汉、正自觉者。”是用以说明世尊名号的具足涵义。其中“吉祥”指拥有吉祥功德,“最上”乃被称为第一,“闻名”即闻名遐迩,“赞音”乃赞叹声也;“超胜者”指超越世间一切生灵;以上皆由“世尊,阿拉汉,正自觉者”语中彰显。
Tatrāyaṃ padasambandho – so bhagavā itipi arahaṃ itipi sammāsambuddho…pe… itipi bhagavāti. Iminā ca iminā ca kāraṇenāti vuttaṃ hoti. Tattha ārakattā arīnaṃ, arānañca hatattā, paccayādīnaṃ arahattā, pāpakaraṇe rahābhāvāti, imehi tāva kāraṇehi so bhagavā arahanti veditabbotiādinā nayena mātikaṃ nikkhipitvā sabbāneva cetāni padāni visuddhimagge buddhānussatiniddese vitthāritānīti tato nesaṃ vitthāro gahetabbo.
此处言语关系为:“所谓世尊、阿拉汉、正自觉者者。”并非单独,而因缘而起之意明示。所以诸比库依此因缘、藉由外敌破坏、恶行消除、等诸因缘,得以洞悉阿拉汉果,故列此为目录,以便令众生净化心志,示现佛陀功德。自此应以此为纲,深解内涵,勿粗忽焉。
Jīvako pana ekamekassa padassa atthaṃ niṭṭhāpetvā – ‘‘evaṃ, mahārāja, arahaṃ mayhaṃ satthā, evaṃ sammāsambuddho…pe… evaṃ bhagavā’’ti vatvā – ‘‘taṃ, devo, bhagavantaṃ payirupāsatu, appeva nāma devassa taṃ bhagavantaṃ payirupāsato cittaṃ pasīdeyyā’’ti āha. Ettha ca taṃ devo payirupāsatūti vadanto ‘‘mahārāja, tumhādisānañhi satenapi sahassenapi satasahassenapi puṭṭhassa mayhaṃ satthuno sabbesaṃ cittaṃ gahetvā kathetuṃ thāmo ca balañca atthi, vissattho upasaṅkamitvā puccheyyāsi mahārājā’’ti āha.
基瓦咖为每个词义作彻底诠释,谓曰:“大王,佛即是阿拉汉,我师即是正自觉者……如是尊圣。”云毕,于是天人奉劝王当敬礼世尊,谓:“大王,天人对世尊敬礼后,心必悦乐。”
Raññopi bhagavato guṇakathaṃ suṇantassa sakalasarīraṃ pañcavaṇṇāya pītiyā nirantaraṃ phuṭaṃ ahosi. So taṅkhaṇaññeva gantukāmo hutvā – ‘‘imāya kho pana velāya mayhaṃ dasabalassa santikaṃ gacchato na añño koci khippaṃ yānāni yojetuṃ sakkhissati aññatra jīvakā’’ti cintetvā – ‘‘tena hi, samma jīvaka, hatthiyānāni kappāpehī’’ti āha.
又天人说:“大王,汝等世人即使千百千万众,到我这里来,亦不可替代我尊师听闻赞叹。今当亲近世尊。”国王听闻世尊的美德故事,身心五色充满喜悦,遂起行诸念;彼时念及:“此时我得十力之助,此行必有力量,唯有基瓦咖可迅速召集象车为我乘载。”于是天人语曰:“信使基瓦咖,必将象车具足备齐。”
§158
158. Tattha tena hīti uyyojanatthe nipāto. Gaccha, samma jīvakāti vuttaṃ hoti. Hatthiyānānīti anekesu assarathādīsu yānesu vijjamānesupi hatthiyānaṃ uttamaṃ; uttamassa santikaṃ uttamayāneneva gantabbanti ca, assayānarathayānāni sasaddāni, dūratova tesaṃ saddo suyyati, hatthiyānassa padānupadaṃ gacchantāpi saddaṃ na suṇanti. Nibbutassa pana kho bhagavato santike nibbuteheva yānehi gantabbanti ca cintayitvā hatthiyānānīti āha.
其处借此说:「为适当接引缘故而言。」称曰:「前往,与吉德同行。」众多载具中,象车为最佳,虽亦有双轮车等虽声响远扬,但行于象车前后则不可闻声。然涅槃者乃在世尊近旁,亦当乘涅槃之车,故称象车。
Pañcamattāni hatthinikāsatānīti pañca kareṇusatāni. Kappāpetvāti ārohaṇasajjāni kāretvā. Ārohaṇīyanti ārohaṇayoggaṃ, opaguyhanti attho. Kiṃ panesa raññā vuttaṃ akāsi avuttanti? Avuttaṃ. Kasmā? Paṇḍitatāya. Evaṃ kirassa ahosi – rājā imāya velāya gacchāmīti vadati, rājāno ca nāma bahupaccatthikā. Sace antarāmagge koci antarāyo hoti, mampi garahissanti – ‘‘jīvako rājā me kathaṃ gaṇhātīti akālepi rājānaṃ gahetvā nikkhamatī’’ti. Bhagavantampi garahissanti ‘‘samaṇo gotamo, ‘mayhaṃ kathā vattatī’ti kālaṃ asallakkhetvāva dhammaṃ kathetī’’ti. Tasmā yathā neva mayhaṃ, na bhagavato, garahā uppajjati; rañño ca rakkhā susaṃvihitā hoti, tathā karissāmī’’ti.
五百称为五掌、五指,掌虎为五指中称呼。备作上行之具,上行者谓适于上行之意。何故王命无行,即言无行?盖因智慧故。是故说:国王谓今当往,此时诸王互相监视,若间道有阻,亦必怀疑:「吉德何以接近吾王?」即便伽陀在先,也恐难免国王责难:「沙门果德玛不顾时节,讲说教法。」故吾不为所指责,亦令国王保护有方,如此当为。
Tato itthiyo nissāya purisānaṃ bhayaṃ nāma natthi, ‘sukhaṃ itthiparivuto gamissāmī’ti pañca hatthinikāsatāni kappāpetvā pañca itthisatāni purisavesaṃ gāhāpetvā – ‘‘asitomarahatthā rājānaṃ parivāreyyāthā’’ti vatvā puna cintesi – ‘‘imassa rañño imasmiṃ attabhāve maggaphalānaṃ upanissayo natthi, buddhā ca nāma upanissayaṃ disvāva dhammaṃ kathenti. Handāhaṃ, mahājanaṃ sannipātāpemi, evañhi sati satthā kassacideva upanissayena dhammaṃ desessati, sā mahājanassa upakārāya bhavissatī’’ti. So tattha tattha sāsanaṃ pesesi, bheriṃ carāpesi – ‘‘ajja rājā bhagavato santikaṃ gacchati, sabbe attano vibhavānurūpena rañño ārakkhaṃ gaṇhantū’’ti.
遂使女子无惧,比随男女,言:「随着女子而行,将作幸福。」备制五百象车,五百妇人以身护伴,若以苍白象车服侍王,如此虑谓:「王无此身,法道无依,唯佛现处说法。明日我当聚众,若佛今由何人依止说法,此将为众大益。」如是处处设法,吹鼓驰奏,言:「今日王将至佛所,诸众当护王,令不失败。」
Tato mahājano cintesi – ‘‘rājā kira satthudassanatthaṃ gacchati, kīdisī vata bho dhammadesanā bhavissati, kiṃ no nakkhattakīḷāya, tattheva gamissāmā’’ti. Sabbe gandhamālādīni gahetvā rañño āgamanaṃ ākaṅkhamānā magge aṭṭhaṃsu. Jīvakopi rañño paṭivedesi – ‘‘kappitāni kho te, deva, hatthiyānāni, yassa dāni kālaṃ maññasī’’ti. Tattha yassa dāni kālaṃ maññasīti upacāravacanametaṃ. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – ‘‘yaṃ tayā āṇattaṃ, taṃ mayā kataṃ, idāni tvaṃ yassa gamanassa vā agamanassa vā kālaṃ maññasi, tadeva attano ruciyā karohī’’ti.
众人大思:「王将为佛示现法而来,不知法讲为何?可观星戏,今日即往。」皆携香花等迎王,等候其至。吉德告王:「诸象车均备,是时亦当设期。」所谓时者应接之机也。是言已毕:「汝所获车乃我所作,今日汝视来往时机,应善护此。」
§159
159.Paccekā itthiyoti pāṭiyekkā itthiyo, ekekissā hatthiniyā ekekaṃ itthinti vuttaṃ hoti. Ukkāsu dhāriyamānāsūti daṇḍadīpikāsu dhāriyamānāsu. Mahacca rājānubhāvenāti mahatā rājānubhāvena. Mahaccātipi pāḷi, mahatiyāti attho, liṅgavipariyāyo esa. Rājānubhāvo vuccati rājiddhi. Kā panassa rājiddhi? Tiyojanasatānaṃ dvinnaṃ mahāraṭṭhānaṃ issariyasirī. Tassa hi asukadivasaṃ rājā tathāgataṃ upasaṅkamissatīti paṭhamataraṃ saṃvidahane asatipi taṅkhaṇaññeva pañca itthisatāni purisavesaṃ gahetvā paṭimukkaveṭhanāni aṃse āsattakhaggāni maṇidaṇḍatomare gahetvā nikkhamiṃsu. Yaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ – ‘‘paccekā itthiyo āropetvā’’ti.
此谓单独女子,单独是谓女子。如持杖于乌龟形灯。大王荣光,即大王之义,谓荣光之反义。王荣光者,云百万由旬之大国君王威势。因预测不久王将见如来,遂以五百女子护持,率男女众护卫,执刀矛击打围堵而出。谓曰:「此为单独女子授命。」
Aparāpi soḷasasahassakhattiyanāṭakitthiyo rājānaṃ parivāresuṃ. Tāsaṃ pariyante khujjavāmanakakirātādayo. Tāsaṃ pariyante antepurapālakā vissāsikapurisā. Tesaṃ pariyante vicitravesavilāsino saṭṭhisahassamattā mahāmattā. Tesaṃ pariyante vividhālaṅkārapaṭimaṇḍitā nānappakāraāvudhahatthā vijjādharataruṇā viya navutisahassamattā raṭṭhiyaputtā. Tesaṃ pariyante satagghanikāni nivāsetvā pañcasatagghanikāni ekaṃsaṃ katvā sunhātā suvilittā kañcanamālādinānābharaṇasobhitā dasasahassamattā brāhmaṇā dakkhiṇahatthaṃ ussāpetvā jayasaddaṃ ghosantā gacchanti. Tesaṃ pariyante pañcaṅgikāni tūriyāni. Tesaṃ pariyante dhanupantiparikkhepo. Tassa pariyante hatthighaṭā. Hatthīnaṃ pariyante gīvāya gīvaṃ paharamānā assapanti. Assapariyante aññamaññaṃ saṅghaṭṭanarathā. Rathapariyante bāhāya bāhaṃ paharayamānā yodhā. Tesaṃ pariyante attano attano anurūpāya ābharaṇasampattiyā virocamānā aṭṭhārasa seniyo. Iti yathā pariyante ṭhatvā khitto saro rājānaṃ na pāpuṇāti, evaṃ jīvako komārabhacco rañño parisaṃ saṃvidahitvā attanā rañño avidūreneva gacchati – ‘‘sace koci upaddavo hoti, paṭhamatara rañño jīvitadānaṃ dassāmī’’ti. Ukkānaṃ pana ettakāni satāni vā sahassāni vāti paricchedo natthīti evarūpiṃ rājiddhiṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ – ‘‘mahaccarājānubhāvena yena jīvakassa komārabhaccassa ambavanaṃ, tena pāyāsī’’ti.
后又有十六万持刀杀手围绕王。其中有短身、弯腰、怪力等人。其中有守城官员、信任之人。其中有各种异服华饰之年轻武士,约九万人,皆为国君子。其中有百余军队驻守,整编成五百武队,华服带金珠宝饰品者达万余。祭祀婆罗门举手祈愿,高声呐喊前行。其间配有五组四乘战车,弓箭手皆已备齐。其间护有象兵,象背互击相轻,骑兵互击相斗,战马互相撞击。武士各自身饰各异,耀眼夺目共十八军团。如此围绕,国王被守卫,吉德少年自护队中出发,谓若有事变,即先献王命之命,且无数百千兵力可敌之。此即国君荣光所调度,谓:「以大王荣光护吉德少年,令其安所。」
Ahudeva bhayanti ettha cittutrāsabhayaṃ, ñāṇabhayaṃ, ārammaṇabhayaṃ, ottappabhayanti catubbidhaṃ bhayaṃ, tattha ‘‘jātiṃ paṭicca bhayaṃ bhayānaka’’ntiādinā nayena vuttaṃ cittutrāsabhayaṃ nāma. ‘‘Tepi tathāgatassa dhammadesanaṃ sutvā yebhuyyena bhayaṃ saṃvegaṃ santāsaṃ āpajjantī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 3.78) evamāgataṃ ñāṇabhayaṃ nāma. ‘‘Etaṃ nūna taṃ bhayabheravaṃ āgacchatī’’ti (ma. ni. 1.49) ettha vuttaṃ ārammaṇabhayaṃ nāma.
这里说的害怕有四种,即心所生起的恐惧、智慧产生的恐惧、念头所缘生起的恐惧以及生起忏悔心的恐惧。其中所谓『依生而生之恐怖』,是指心生恐惧。『听闻世尊教法后,由此生起的恐惧、震惊和欢喜』,这就是智慧所生之恐惧。又有『这无疑是恐怖害怕的来临』,这就是念头所生的恐惧。
‘‘Bhīruṃ pasaṃsanti, na hi tattha sūraṃ;
偪惧者人皆赞叹,真勇者无此焉;
Bhayā hi santo, na karonti pāpa’’nti . (saṃ. ni. 1.33);
恐惧之人不为恶事所行,乃此说也。
Idaṃ ottappabhayaṃ nāma. Tesu idha cittutrāsabhayaṃ, ahu ahosīti attho. Chambhitattanti chambhitassa bhāvo. Sakalasarīracalananti attho. Lomahaṃsoti lomahaṃsanaṃ, uddhaṃ ṭhitalomatāti attho. So panāyaṃ lomahaṃso dhammassavanādīsu pītiuppattikāle pītiyāpi hoti . Bhīrukajātikānaṃ sampahārapisācādidassanesu bhayenāpi. Idha bhayalomahaṃsoti veditabbo.
所谓忏悔之恐惧,即此心生恐惧之意。‘胆怯’者,即惧怕之状态。‘全身不安’者,谓全身颤抖。‘寒毛竖立’者,即子鸡毛豎起之状。此时,在闻法闻义等心起欢喜之处,也会生起毛发竖立之感。胆小之人生气之鬼等征象显现时,亦由恐惧而起此发逆现象,此处当知为‘恐惧毛竖立’之义。
Kasmā panesa bhītoti? Andhakārenāti eke vadanti. Rājagahe kira dvattiṃsa mahādvārāni, catusaṭṭhi khuddakadvārāni. Jīvakassa ambavanaṃ pākārassa ca gijjhakūṭassa ca antarā hoti. So pācīnadvārena nikkhamitvā pabbatacchāyāya pāvisi, tattha pabbatakūṭena cando chādito, pabbatacchāyāya ca rukkhacchāyāya ca andhakāraṃ ahosīti, tampi akāraṇaṃ. Tadā hi ukkānaṃ satasahassānampi paricchedo natthi.
何以怖惧?有人说如黑暗般。传言王舍城有二十三个大门,六十四个小门,基瓦之亭廊居于此中如青蛙峰峦间隔。孔雀门出门入于山阴,然后因山峦遮蔽,月光遮碍,树阴环绕,致成黑暗,此亦无缘无故。乃因风向关闭,风无法穿透,致无光明之故。
Ayaṃ pana appasaddataṃ nissāya jīvake āsaṅkāya bhīto. Jīvako kirassa uparipāsādeyeva ārocesi – ‘‘mahārāja appasaddakāmo bhagavā, appasaddeneva upasaṅkamitabbo’’ti. Tasmā rājā tūriyasaddaṃ nivāresi. Tūriyāni kevalaṃ gahitamattāneva honti, vācampi uccaṃ anicchārayamānā accharāsaññāya gacchanti. Ambavanepi kassaci khipitasaddopi na suyyati. Rājāno ca nāma saddābhiratā honti. So taṃ appasaddataṃ nissāya ukkaṇṭhito jīvakepi āsaṅkaṃ uppādesi. ‘‘Ayaṃ jīvako mayhaṃ ambavane aḍḍhateḷasāni bhikkhusatānī’’ti āha. Ettha ca khipitasaddamattampi na suyyati, abhūtaṃ maññe, esa vañcetvā maṃ nagarato nīharitvā purato balakāyaṃ upaṭṭhapetvā maṃ gaṇhitvā attanā chattaṃ ussāpetukāmo. Ayañhi pañcannaṃ hatthīnaṃ balaṃ dhāreti. Mama ca avidūreneva gacchati, santike ca me āvudhahattho ekapurisopi natthi. Aho vata me anattho’’ti. Evaṃ bhāyitvā ca pana abhīto viya sandhāretumpi nāsakkhi. Attano bhītabhāvaṃ tassa āvi akāsi. Tena vuttaṃ. ‘‘Atha kho rājā…pe… na nigghoso’’ti. Tattha sammāti vayassābhilāpo esa, kacci maṃ vayassāti vuttaṃ hoti. Na palambhesīti yaṃ natthi taṃ atthīti vatvā kacci maṃ na vippalambhayasi. Nigghosoti kathāsallāpanigghoso.
此因安静之处,基瓦心生畏惧。基瓦向宫殿高层呈闻曰:‘大王、世尊厌恶喧嚣,唯静音之处方可近促。’因而国王禁绝第三种杂音。此第三音众多均由关闭门窗产生,若开启则声音外泄。宫内房门虽然闭锁,其声音因言语清晰时即升高,宫内尚好,然基瓦宫邑遭细微音声亦不耐受。国王乐闻声响,故基瓦因府中新静音而生怀疑烦恼,忧恐此音或破坏今之平静。曰:‘此基瓦于我园中管理五百多比库。误以为有人用欺骗手段将我自城中诱走,前有武士护卫。此等五百象之强力随我远去,而我近处更无一兵器协助,真是丧失依靠啊。’意虽恐怖,却无已由,因此隐匿不用。此心怀之恐惧现于他前,故言:‘国王某时沉默不语。’其中略含年长之悲哀,或谓我衰老语话稀少,或我不长此说,语罢即止。静默不语,谓言语低声轻语。
Mā bhāyi, mahārājāti jīvako – ‘‘ayaṃ rājā maṃ na jānāti ‘nāyaṃ paraṃ jīvitā voropetī’ti; sace kho pana naṃ na assāsessāmi, vinasseyyā’’ti cintayitvā daḷhaṃ katvā samassāsento ‘‘mā bhāyi mahārājā’’ti vatvā ‘‘na taṃ devā’’tiādimāha. Abhikkamāti abhimukho kama gaccha, pavisāti attho. Sakiṃ vutte pana daḷhaṃ na hotīti taramānova dvikkhattuṃ āha. Ete maṇḍalamāḷe dīpā jhāyantīti mahārāja, corabalaṃ nāma na dīpe jāletvā tiṭṭhati, ete ca maṇḍalamāḷe dīpā jalanti. Etāya dīpasaññāya yāhi mahārājāti vadati.
“不要害怕,伟大的国王啊!”比库基瓦咖思惟道:“这位国王不知道我,说‘这条命不属于我’;若我不施舍生命,我必灭亡。”他下定决心,从容地劝说:“国王莫怕,诸天不会允许你如此。”他转向前方朝禀正行而去,进入殿堂。尽管示弱,他却祈愿:“决不是这样!”仿佛以戏语搭讪般,说道:“这圈中花环般的灯火照耀着,是国王所见,盗贼的力量不会在灯火未熄时站立,这些灯火在圈中燃烧。”因此他教诲以灯火为观念,称之为“国王所言”。
Sāmaññaphalapucchāvaṇṇanā沙门果问之注释
§160
160.Nāgassa bhūmīti yattha sakkā hatthiṃ abhirūḷhena gantuṃ, ayaṃ nāgassa bhūmi nāma. Nāgā paccorohitvāti vihārassa bahidvārakoṭṭhake hatthito orohitvā. Bhūmiyaṃ patiṭṭhitasamakālameva pana bhagavato tejo rañño sarīraṃ phari. Athassa tāvadeva sakalasarīrato sedā mucciṃsu, sāṭakā pīḷetvā apanetabbā viya ahesuṃ. Attano aparādhaṃ saritvā mahābhayaṃ uppajji. So ujukaṃ bhagavato santikaṃ gantuṃ asakkonto jīvakaṃ hatthe gahetvā ārāmacārikaṃ caramāno viya ‘‘idaṃ te samma jīvaka suṭṭhu kāritaṃ idaṃ suṭṭhu kārita’’nti vihārassa vaṇṇaṃ bhaṇamāno anukkamena yena maṇḍalamāḷassa dvāraṃ tenupasaṅkami, sampattoti attho.
160.所谓龙族之地,是萨咖骑象攀缘而上可达之处,称为龙族之地。龙下行,乃是从殿堂的后门靠近象足而下。正当布施者所在之地,世尊的光辉如王者的身躯一般出现。身躯上,众多银色光辉如同被碾压的谷粒一样被分散。比库基瓦察觉自己犯了罪,起了大怖畏,无法正直地面见世尊,遂扶住比库外的庙宇,游相般说道:“这实在是精确无误,比库基瓦做得好。”并以安静轻声走近殿门,意味平安无事。
Kahaṃ pana sammāti kasmā pucchīti. Eke tāva ‘‘ajānanto’’ti vadanti. Iminā kira daharakāle pitarā saddhiṃ āgamma bhagavā diṭṭhapubbo, pacchā pana pāpamittasaṃsaggena pitughātaṃ katvā abhimāre pesetvā dhanapālaṃ muñcāpetvā mahāparādho hutvā bhagavato sammukhībhāvaṃ na upagatapubboti asañjānanto pucchatīti. Taṃ akāraṇaṃ, bhagavā hi ākiṇṇavaralakkhaṇo anubyañjanapaṭimaṇḍito chabbaṇṇāhi rasmīhi sakalaṃ ārāmaṃ obhāsetvā tārāgaṇaparivuto viya puṇṇacando bhikkhugaṇaparivuto maṇḍalamāḷamajjhe nisinno, taṃ ko na jāneyya. Ayaṃ pana attano issariyalīlāya pucchati. Pakati hesā rājakulānaṃ, yaṃ jānantāpi ajānantā viya pucchanti. Jīvako pana taṃ sutvā – ‘ayaṃ rājā pathaviyaṃ ṭhatvā kuhiṃ pathavīti, nabhaṃ ulloketvā kuhiṃ candimasūriyāti, sinerumūle ṭhatvā kuhiṃ sinerūti vadamāno viya dasabalassa purato ṭhatvā kuhiṃ bhagavā’ti pucchati. ‘‘Handassa bhagavantaṃ dassessāmī’’ti cintetvā yena bhagavā tenañjaliṃ paṇāmetvā ‘‘eso mahārājā’’tiādimāha. Purakkhatoti parivāretvā nisinnassa purato nisinno.
国王问:“‘道’在哪儿?为何问此?”有人说:“无知故也。”他们称他青年时,父母曾合掌到世尊处见礼,如今因恶友诱惑,犯杀父罪而愤怒,曾将富商释放,被视为大罪,因此不敢面见世尊,却又未觉察而发问。这实在无故,世尊光明无碍,环绕菩提树下满月般照耀着园林,周围是星辰天女和比库群,谁不知晓呢?他只为自家皇家戏谑而发问。宫中侍从视之为王族,无论知者还是无知者皆如此质问。基瓦傲听闻此言,思惟道:“国王凭土地站立,往何处去?仰观天空,向何处望月日?站于银树之根称‘银树’。立于十万大军之前,国王向何处望世尊?”并思忖“今当迎见世尊”,合掌恭敬地说:“这位伟大的国王……”等语,朝禀前行,道路前有侍从护卫。
§161
161.Yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkamīti yattha bhagavā tattha gato, bhagavato santikaṃ upagatoti attho. Ekamantaṃ aṭṭhāsīti bhagavantaṃ vā bhikkhusaṃghaṃ vā asaṅghaṭṭayamāno attano ṭhātuṃ anucchavike ekasmiṃ padese bhagavantaṃ abhivādetvā ekova aṭṭhāsi. Tuṇhībhūtaṃ tuṇhībhūtanti yato yato anuviloketi, tato tato tuṇhībhūtamevāti attho. Tattha hi ekabhikkhussapi hatthakukkuccaṃ vā pādakukkuccaṃ vā khipitasaddo vā natthi, sabbālaṅkārapaṭimaṇḍitaṃ nāṭakaparivāraṃ bhagavato abhimukhe ṭhitaṃ rājānaṃ vā rājaparisaṃ vā ekabhikkhupi na olokesi. Sabbe bhagavantaṃyeva olokayamānā nisīdiṃsu.
161.世尊所至之处即谓“朝禀世尊”。一方约十八人,未结僧团,独自于某地点,朝禀世尊并敬礼者才十八人。所谓孤寂解脱,乃指一处处察看时,处分毁伤手足或惊吓之声皆无,世尊面前不见装饰繁多的戏剧家眷属,无论是一位比库,还是国王及其朝臣,皆不敢轻视世尊。众人目视世尊时,皆席地坐下。
Rājā tesaṃ upasame pasīditvā vigatapaṅkatāya vippasannarahadamiva upasantindriyaṃ bhikkhusaṅghaṃ punappunaṃ anuviloketvā udānaṃ udānesi. Tattha imināti yena kāyikena ca vācasikena ca mānasikena ca sīlūpasamena bhikkhusaṅgho upasanto, iminā upasamenāti dīpeti. Tattha ‘‘aho vata me putto pabbajitvā ime bhikkhū viya upasanto bhaveyyā’’ti nayidaṃ sandhāya esa evamāha. Ayaṃ pana bhikkhusaṅghaṃ disvā pasanno puttaṃ anussari. Dullabhañhi laddhā acchariyaṃ vā disvā piyānaṃ ñātimittādīnaṃ anussaraṇaṃ nāma lokassa pakatiyeva. Iti bhikkhusaṅghaṃ disvā puttaṃ anussaramāno esa evamāha.
国王因众人安静,心喜意畅,如雨后清凉甘露般观看清净的比库僧团,反复观照,发出赞叹。此意指无论身、语、意三业清净的比库僧团安详平静。国王感叹:“这孩子出家后,亦可成就如是安静僧团。”见僧团如是,称赞儿子。此乃极难得见,非常惊奇,视为爱亲属之大欢喜、欢喜之缘。于是看着僧团,关怀儿子,赞叹说道。
Api ca putte āsaṅkāya tassa upasamaṃ icchamāno pesa evamāha. Evaṃ kirassa ahosi, putto me pucchissati – ‘‘mayhaṃ pitā daharo. Ayyako me kuhi’’nti. So ‘‘pitarā te ghātito’’ti sutvā ‘‘ahampi pitaraṃ ghātetvā rajjaṃ kāressāmī’’ti maññissati. Iti putte āsaṅkāya tassa upasamaṃ icchamāno pesa evamāha. Kiñcāpi hi esa evamāha. Atha kho naṃ putto ghātessatiyeva. Tasmiñhi vaṃse pituvadho pañcaparivaṭṭe gato. Ajātasattu bimbisāraṃ ghātesi, udayo ajātasattuṃ . Tassa putto mahāmuṇḍiko nāma udayaṃ. Tassa putto anuruddho nāma mahāmuṇḍikaṃ. Tassa putto nāgadāso nāma anuruddhaṃ. Nāgadāsaṃ pana – ‘‘vaṃsacchedakarājāno ime, kiṃ imehī’’ti raṭṭhavāsino kupitā ghātesuṃ.
又因对子欲望安静,国王如此递话。于是如是发生,儿子将问:“我父亲年少,你在哪里?”国王听闻曰:“你父亲已被杀。”儿子意欲回应:“我也将杀父夺王位。”儿子虽生出杀父念,却终未杀父。在该家族中,父被杀发生五次轮回。阿阇世杀死宾比萨拉,乌陀耶杀戮阿阇世。其子名“摩诃马哈摩嘎喇那”(大剃发者乌陀耶之子)。其子名“阿努律陀”,名“那迦达瑟”,即阿努律陀之名。那迦达瑟以“断绝王族者,是谁,何人?”引起众生愤怒而被杀。
Agamā kho tvanti kasmā evamāha? Bhagavā kira rañño vacībhede akateyeva cintesi – ‘‘ayaṃ rājā āgantvā tuṇhī niravo ṭhito, kiṃ nu kho cintesī’’ti. Athassa cittaṃ ñatvā – ‘‘ayaṃ mayā saddhiṃ sallapituṃ asakkonto bhikkhusaṅghaṃ anuviloketvā puttaṃ anussari, na kho panāyaṃ mayi anālapante kiñci kathetuṃ sakkhissati, karomi tena saddhiṃ kathāsallāpa’’nti. Tasmā rañño vacanānantaraṃ ‘‘agamā kho tvaṃ, mahārāja, yathāpema’’nti āha. Tassattho – mahārāja, yathā nāma unname vuṭṭhaṃ udakaṃ yena ninnaṃ tena gacchati, evameva tvaṃ bhikkhusaṅghaṃ anuviloketvā yena pemaṃ tena gatoti.
是说“汝不来,为何如此?”世尊本意是在言辞交流无成良机之时,心中默想:“这国王来时默然无语,立于一旁,究竟在思虑何事?”了知国王意念后,世尊告诫说:“尔等比库僧团因不能与我共同交谈,观察其情,犹如父子关系相互追忆。但其必不能在我面前直言不讳,故我与之同话。”因此,王闻此言后即答:“大王,汝当如实而为。”佛告国王说:“正如被提起的那洪流激动之水,以扰乱而流动,尔等观察比库僧团时,亦如利爱之水所驱动而来。”
Atha rañño etadahosi – ‘‘aho acchariyā buddhaguṇā, mayā sadiso bhagavato aparādhakārako nāma natthi, mayā hissa aggupaṭṭhāko ghātito, devadattassa ca kathaṃ gahetvā abhimārā pesitā, nāḷāgiri mutto, maṃ nissāya devadattena silā paviddhā, evaṃ mahāparādhaṃ nāma maṃ ālapato dasabalassa mukhaṃ nappahoti; aho bhagavā pañcahākārehi tādilakkhaṇe suppatiṭṭhito. Evarūpaṃ nāma satthāraṃ pahāya bahiddhā na pariyesissāmā’’ti so somanassajāto bhagavantaṃ ālapanto ‘‘piyo me, bhante’’tiādimāha.
于是国王心生感叹,说:“啊!佛陀的功德何其奇妙!与我相似者,尚无犯戒之事,我的头领护持者倒被杀害,如何不被此事的恶业纠缠?即令魔王都被派遣欺辱,我虽如脱离牢笼般释然,因缘而生之石块刺我,尽显我所犯的严重罪恶。虽如是,我对十方天神的统帅敞开心扉未曾闭口;啊!大佛陀以五种彼相具足而稳固其圣迹,遗弃此种覆满重罪的导师,我将永不再追寻。”如此心情喜悦,他对佛陀恭敬说:“尊者是我所爱。”
§162
162.Bhikkhusaṅghassaañjaliṃ paṇāmetvāti evaṃ kirassa ahosi bhagavantaṃ vanditvā itocito ca gantvā bhikkhusaṅghaṃ vandantena ca bhagavā piṭṭhito kātabbo hoti, garukāropi cesa na hoti. Rājānaṃ vanditvā uparājānaṃ vandantenapi hi rañño agāravo kato hoti. Tasmā bhagavantaṃ vanditvā ṭhitaṭṭhāneyeva bhikkhusaṅghassa añjaliṃ paṇāmetvā ekamantaṃ nisīdi. Kañcideva desanti kañci okāsaṃ.
烧至162句,解释比库僧团行五体投地礼敬。正如此时,有人礼敬世尊后,舆人亦去恭敬禅众,佛应当转身而行,不施以威严之态。王及副王若礼敬他人,则失了王的尊敬。因此礼敬世尊后,应当立于原处,恭敬比库僧团行五体投地礼敬,后方就座,或有人讲话或片刻安歇。
Athassa bhagavā pañhapucchane ussāhaṃ janento āha – ‘‘puccha, mahārāja, yadākaṅkhasī’’ti. Tassattho – ‘‘puccha yadi ākaṅkhasi, na me pañhavissajjane bhāro atthi’’. Atha vā ‘‘puccha, yaṃ ākaṅkhasi, sabbaṃ te vissajjessāmī’’ti sabbaññupavāraṇaṃ pavāresi, asādhāraṇaṃ paccekabuddhaaggasāvakamahāsāvakehi. Te hi yadākaṅkhasīti na vadanti, sutvā vedissāmāti vadanti. Buddhā pana – ‘‘puccha, āvuso, yadākaṅkhasī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 1.237), vā ‘‘puccha, mahārāja, yadākaṅkhasī’’ti vā,
于是,世尊心生勇气,应答问难,即问说:“当问,我愿问。”又说:“问吧,若你愿意,我问难中无累赘。”又说:“你若欲问,我当悉数解答。”佛向辟支佛、独觉佛、正觉佛及诸大弟子开放问法。诸人虽心怀问意,但不言,谓闻知即能了达。佛陀则明言:“当问,吾友,尔欲问何事?”或“国王,当问,欲问何事?”
‘‘Puccha, vāsava, maṃ pañhaṃ, yaṃ kiñci manasicchasi;
“请问,毗舍婆,我欲知尔心所思所欲何事?”
Tassa tasseva pañhassa, ahaṃ antaṃ karomi te’’ti. (dī. ni. 2.356) vā;
“尔问之时,我即为尔解答终结。”(出处于《大藏经•尼柯耶第2集第356页》)
Tena hi tvaṃ, bhikkhu, sake āsane nisīditvā puccha, yadākaṅkhasīti vā,
因此,你这比库,应当在合适的座位上端坐,然后询问,‘你现在有什么愿望呢?’
‘‘Bāvarissa ca tuyhaṃ vā, sabbesaṃ sabbasaṃsayaṃ;
‘是否在你内心已消散所有的疑虑与不安?’
Katāvakāsā pucchavho, yaṃ kiñci manasicchathā’’ti. (su. ni. 1036) vā;
‘你已经获得的机会,好好询问你内心所想的一切。’(相应部经文第1036节)或者说,
‘‘Puccha maṃ, sabhiya, pañhaṃ, yaṃ kiñci manasicchasi;
‘请你告诉我,尊敬的比库,心中所思念的疑问;’
Tassa tasseva pañhassa, ahaṃ antaṃ karomi te’’ti. (su. ni. 517) vā;
‘对于每一个问题,我都会为你做最终的解答。’(相应部经文第517节)
Tesaṃ tesaṃ yakkhanarindadevasamaṇabrāhmaṇaparibbājakānaṃ sabbaññupavāraṇaṃ pavārenti. Anacchariyañcetaṃ, yaṃ bhagavā buddhabhūmiṃ patvā etaṃ pavāraṇaṃ pavāreyya. Yo bodhisattabhūmiyaṃ padesañāṇe ṭhito –
这些时期,无论是夜叉、龙王、天人、沙门、婆罗门、游方者,皆将各种知识具足的障碍逐一清除。这毫不奇怪,因为世尊证悟菩提后,也同样广泛地破除一切障碍。立于菩提之地、专注于觉悟境界的修行者——
‘‘Koṇḍañña , pañhāni viyākarohi;
『拘难那,应当解答这些难问;』
Yācanti taṃ isayo sādhurūpā.
『请求各位诸君以恭敬庄严的形象来询问他。』
Koṇḍañña, eso manujesu dhammo;
『拘难那,世人之中有一法,』
Yaṃ vuddhamāgacchati esa bhāro’’ti. (jā. 2.17.60);
『此法如同重负,愈久愈加沉重。』(纪事经 2.17.60)
Evaṃ sakkādīnaṃ atthāya isīhi yācito –
『如是,为天众等诸天所求之意,凡诸诸君恳求道:』
‘‘Katāvakāsā pucchantu bhonto,
『愿诸位尊者尽管提问,』
Yaṃ kiñci pañhaṃ manasābhipatthitaṃ;
一切由心分别之疑问,
Ahañhi taṃ taṃ vo viyākarissaṃ,
我当为汝等详细解说,
Ñatvā sayaṃ lokamimaṃ parañcā’’ti. (jā. 2.17.61);
亲自了知此世与彼世者。」(世本经第2卷第17章第61偈)
Evaṃ sarabhaṅgakāle. Sambhavajātake ca sakalajambudīpaṃ tikkhattuṃ vicaritvā pañhānaṃ antakaraṃ adisvā suciratena brāhmaṇena, pañhaṃ puṭṭhuṃ okāse kārite jātiyā sattavassiko rathikāya paṃsuṃ kīḷanto pallaṅkamābhujitvā antaravīthiyaṃ nisinnova –
如是于断骨时节,曾游历遍整个斛卢大地,终结诸疑。稍迟间,一婆罗门询问疑问,时值七岁之车夫,戏于尘土,坐于床榻,俨然入坐于室内——
‘‘Taggha te ahamakkhissaṃ, yathāpi kusalo tathā;
「愚者,我为汝誓,虽非全部,然依己力将竭力答之;
Rājā ca kho taṃ jānāti, yadi kāhati vā na vā’’ti. (jā. 1.16.172);
国王亦晓此事,言与不言皆知。」(世本经第1卷第16章第172偈)
Sabbaññupavāraṇaṃ pavāresi. · 以一切智自恣。
§163
163. Evaṃ bhagavatā sabbaññupavāraṇāya pavāritāya attamano rājā pañhaṃ pucchanto – ‘‘yathā nu kho imāni, bhante’’tiādimāha. Tattha sippameva sippāyatanaṃ. Puthusippāyatanānīti bahūni sippāni. Seyyathidanti katame pana te. Hatthārohātiādīhi ye taṃ taṃ sippaṃ nissāya jīvanti, te dasseti. Ayañhi assādhippāyo – ‘‘yathā imesaṃ sippūpajīvīnaṃ taṃ taṃ sippaṃ nissāya sandiṭṭhikaṃ sippaphalaṃ paññāyati. Sakkā nu kho evaṃ sandiṭṭhikaṃ sāmaññaphalaṃ paññāpetu’’nti. Tasmā sippāyatanāni āharitvā sippūpajīvino dasseti.
163. 如是,世尊在一切智慧戒禁之中受持清净,国王亲自前来问询时说:“请问,这诸法,尊者如是吗?”此中“技艺”仅指技艺的场所。所谓众多技艺的场所,即有多种技艺。例如什么呢?从攀爬技艺等起,依赖各自技艺而生存者,则应知晓。此乃感官的洞察,即“如这些依赖诸技艺而活的众生,亲证各自技艺的现前技艺果报。可否也证得如是现前的普遍果报?”因此,展现技艺场所之众生,予以显现。
Tattha hatthārohāti sabbepi hatthācariyahatthivejjahatthimeṇḍādayo dasseti. Assārohāti sabbepi assācariyaassavejjaassameṇḍādayo. Rathikāti sabbepi rathācariyarathayodharatharakkhādayo. Dhanuggahāti dhanuācariyā issāsā. Celakāti ye yuddhe jayadhajaṃ gahetvā purato gacchanti. Calakāti idha rañño ṭhānaṃ hotu, idha asukamahāmattassāti evaṃ senābyūhakārakā. Piṇḍadāyakāti sāhasikamahāyodhā. Te kira parasenaṃ pavisitvā parasīsaṃ piṇḍamiva chetvā chetvā dayanti, uppatitvā uppatitvā niggacchantīti attho. Ye vā saṅgāmamajjhe yodhānaṃ bhattapātiṃ gahetvā parivisanti, tesampetaṃ nāmaṃ. Uggārājaputtāti uggatuggatā saṅgāmāvacarā rājaputtā. Pakkhandinoti ye ‘‘kassa sīsaṃ vā āvudhaṃ vā āharāmā’’ti ‘‘vatvā asukassā’’ti vuttā saṅgāmaṃ pakkhanditvā tadeva āharanti, ime pakkhandantīti pakkhandino. Mahānāgāti mahānāgā viya mahānāgā, hatthiādīsupi abhimukhaṃ āgacchantesu anivattitayodhānametaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Sūrāti ekantasūrā, ye sajālikāpi sacammikāpi samuddaṃ tarituṃ sakkonti. Cammayodhinoti ye cammakañcukaṃ vā pavisitvā saraparittāṇacammaṃ vā gahetvā yujjhanti. Dāsikaputtāti balavasinehā gharadāsayodhā. Āḷārikāti pūvikā. Kappakāti nhāpikā. Nhāpakāti ye nhāpenti. Sūdāti bhattakārakā. Mālākārādayo pākaṭāyeva. Gaṇakāti acchiddakapāṭhakā. Muddikāti hatthamuddāya gaṇanaṃ nissāya jīvino. Yāni vā panaññānipīti ayakāradantakāracittakārādīni. Evaṃgatānīti evaṃ pavattāni. Te diṭṭheva dhammeti te hatthārohādayo tāni puthusippāyatanāni dassetvā rājakulato mahāsampattiṃ labhamānā sandiṭṭhikameva sippaphalaṃ upajīvanti. Sukhentīti sukhitaṃ karonti. Pīṇentīti pīṇitaṃ thāmabalūpetaṃ karonti. Uddhaggikādīsu upari phalanibbattanato uddhaṃ aggamassā atthīti uddhaggikā. Saggaṃ arahatīti sovaggikā. Sukho vipāko assāti sukhavipākā. Suṭṭhu agge rūpasaddagandharasaphoṭṭhabbaāyuvaṇṇasukhayasaādhipateyyasaṅkhāte dasa dhamme saṃvatteti nibbattetīti saggasaṃvattanikā. Taṃ evarūpaṃ dakkhiṇaṃ dānaṃ patiṭṭhapentīti attho. Sāmaññaphalanti ettha paramatthato maggo sāmaññaṃ. Ariyaphalaṃ sāmaññaphalaṃ. Yathāha – ‘‘katamañca, bhikkhave, sāmaññaṃ? Ayameva ariyo aṭṭhaṅgiko maggo. Seyyathidaṃ, sammādiṭṭhi…pe… sammāsamādhi. Idaṃ vuccati, bhikkhave, sāmaññaṃ. Katamāni ca, bhikkhave, sāmaññaphalāni? Sotāpattiphalaṃ…pe… arahattaphala’’nti (saṃ. ni. 5.35). Taṃ esa rājā na jānāti. Upari āgataṃ pana dāsakassakopamaṃ sandhāya pucchati.
其中攀爬技艺者,即诸攀爬之师、攀爬的巫师、黎明时攀爬者等为范例。骑驴技艺者,即所有驴骑师、驴巫师、驴驾御者等。御车技艺者,凡所有御车师、车兵、车护卫者等。弓箭技艺者,即弓箭使、射手等。拨战士者,即战场上携带胜利旗帜的先锋。游行技艺者,乃国王军队中的阵形官员。乞食者,即勇猛善战者。他们彼此进入、互相给予食物,如同切捐食物一般;吃已饱满之后便离去。持饭者,是冲战中分发士兵用餐的职员,称其为“持饭者”。乌戾罗护王子,即勇猛出众的战士王子。叛变者者,即那些放下“谁的首级或武器”之心,背离原阵而带走物资者,是名为叛变者。摩诃那迦者,如大龙一般,面对象等大型动物,坚决作战的勇士。勇士者,专注勇敢,无畏海洋过渡者。皮革战士者,穿戴皮革甲胄战斗者。奴仆之子者,即强壮爱家的家奴战士。贪食者,为食欲旺盛之人。着色者等,均属明显类别。杂技算术者,即运用手指计数的技艺者。若有其他匠人,如制造象牙、牙根、作意匠者,皆属此类活动。如此传承,谓之“如此流转”。所见正法,即前述攀爬等各项技艺场所,就是多种技艺场所,因王族者获得巨大福报,凭此现前技艺果报而生活。所谓安乐者,是作安乐事者;受苦者,乃身心受苦之人。高出者者,则指超越世俗果报的层次。天界、阿拉汉,指极乐境界。此乐果报,是快乐的结果。『良好地,色声香味触法、寿命、威权、称誉、财富等诸法俱足,名为天界降生。』如来教法集成于十大法,谓为天界果报。如此布施的施主,获此意义之果报。所谓普遍果报,此处是指最高正道之普遍果报、圣果报。犹如经典所说:“比库们,何为普遍果报?即是:圣八正道——正见…正定。此谓佛说的普遍果报。又何为普遍果报之果?从初果、二果至阿拉汉果。”(《相应部尼连禅经》5.35)这一点国王尚不明了。后又以“奴仆众”等比喻问询。
Atha bhagavā pañhaṃ avissajjetvāva cintesi – ‘‘ime bahū aññatitthiyasāvakā rājāmaccā idhāgatā, te kaṇhapakkhañca sukkapakkhañca dīpetvā kathīyamāne amhākaṃ rājā mahantena ussāhena idhāgato, tassāgatakālato paṭṭhāya samaṇo gotamo samaṇakolāhalaṃ samaṇabhaṇḍanameva kathetīti ujjhāyissanti, na sakkaccaṃ dhammaṃ sossanti, raññā pana kathīyamāne ujjhāyituṃ na sakkhissanti, rājānameva anuvattissanti. Issarānuvattako hi loko. ‘Handāhaṃ raññova bhāraṃ karomī’ti rañño bhāraṃ karonto ‘‘abhijānāsi no tva’’ntiādimāha.
于是世尊不立即答复问题,却思想:‘这里有许多他教徒弟子以及王子,当他们点亮黑色与白色节灯,议论纷纷时,称大王已亲至,僧侣果德玛已到,僧众骚动、论辩。必定不能悉闻佛法,王者亦不能跟随论辩。世间唯有顺从君王者。‘我今日为王办事。’他们说‘你知道吗?’”
§164
164. Tattha abhijānāsi no tvanti abhijānāsi nu tvaṃ. Ayañca no-saddo parato pucchitāti padena yojetabbo. Idañhi vuttaṃ hoti – ‘‘mahārāja, tvaṃ imaṃ pañhaṃ aññe samaṇabrāhmaṇe pucchitā nu, abhijānāsi ca naṃ puṭṭhabhāvaṃ, na te sammuṭṭha’’nti. Sace te agarūti sace tuyhaṃ yathā te byākariṃsu, tathā idha bhāsituṃ bhāriyaṃ na hoti, yadi na koci aphāsukabhāvo atthi, bhāsassūti attho. Na kho me bhanteti kiṃ sandhāyāha? Paṇḍitapatirūpakānañhi santike kathetuṃ dukkhaṃ hoti, te pade pade akkhare akkhare dosameva vadanti. Ekantapaṇḍitā pana kathaṃ sutvā sukathitaṃ pasaṃsanti, dukkathitesu pāḷipadaatthabyañjanesu yaṃ yaṃ virujjhati, taṃ taṃ ujukaṃ katvā denti. Bhagavatā ca sadiso ekantapaṇḍito nāma natthi. Tenāha – ‘‘na kho me, bhante, garu; yatthassa bhagavā nisinno bhagavantarūpo vā’’ti.
164. 是谓‘你知道吗?’即是‘你是否知道?’关于此问题,言辞必须连贯。此处有言:“大王,若是他方沙门婆罗门问你此问,你是否知其含义?若无所知,则你不懂其本意。”又如若不尊重你,或你随其说法而讲解,你也不能无障碍地将其表达出来,若无健全话语,则无法沟通。问:“世尊,我问此意何在?”确实,在博学者面前讲述此话困难重重,因他们每个词、每个字均挑剔指责。然而博学者听闻正义语句,欢迎赞叹,对不善语句和词义颠倒句,均能公正辩明赋释。但世尊无出其右,故曰:“佛陀之身虽然坐着,却无所胜过者。”
Pūraṇakassapavādavaṇṇanā布勒纳咖萨巴之说注释
§165
165.Ekamidāhanti ekaṃ idha ahaṃ. Sammodanīyaṃ kathaṃ sāraṇīyaṃ vītisāretvāti sammodajanakaṃ saritabbayuttakaṃ kathaṃ pariyosāpetvā.
165. 这是一句诗,意为“在此我有所,如何能使众喜悦、记忆清晰”,如同汇聚各种善法,如何将其完整阐明和结集。
§166
166.‘‘Karoto kho, mahārāja, kārayato’’tiādīsu karototi sahatthā karontassa. Kārayatoti āṇattiyā kārentassa. Chindatoti paresaṃ hatthādīni chindantassa. Pacatoti pare daṇḍena pīḷentassa. Socayatoti parassa bhaṇḍaharaṇādīhi socayato. Socāpayatoti sokaṃ sayaṃ karontassapi parehi kārāpentassapi . Kilamatoti āhārupacchedabandhanāgārappavesanādīhi sayaṃ kilamantassapi parehi kilamāpentassapi. Phandato phandāpayatoti paraṃ phandantaṃ phandanakāle sayampi phandato parampi phandāpayato. Pāṇamatipātāpayatoti pāṇaṃ hanantassapi hanāpentassapi. Evaṃ sabbattha karaṇakāraṇavaseneva attho veditabbo.
166.“以‘作’字作例,如‘他做,他让人为之’等,‘作’字意为动作的执行者。‘做’特别指行为者。‘砍’指用刀斧等砍断他物者。‘打’指用杖棍等施击他者。‘使忧伤’指用抢掠等使人忧伤者。‘使人忧郁’指自他双方均行忧伤行为者。‘束缚’指以食物截断、禁闭置入牢笼等,自他皆受束缚者。‘捕捉、诱捕’指诱惑捕捉他人,而自己同样捕捉他人者。‘杀害’指杀死他人,或施杀害行为者。诸如此类,均应理解为行为和因缘相互关联的范畴。
Sandhinti gharasandhiṃ. Nillopanti mahāvilopaṃ. Ekāgārikanti ekameva gharaṃ parivāretvā viluppanaṃ. Paripantheti āgatāgatānaṃ acchindanatthaṃ magge tiṭṭhato. Karoto na karīyati pāpanti yaṃ kiñci pāpaṃ karomīti saññāya karotopi pāpaṃ na karīyati, natthi pāpaṃ. Sattā pana pāpaṃ karomāti evaṃsaññino hontīti dīpeti. Khurapariyantenāti khuraneminā, khuradhārasadisapariyantena vā. Ekaṃ maṃsakhalanti ekaṃ maṃsarāsiṃ. Puñjanti tasseva vevacanaṃ. Tatonidānanti ekamaṃsakhalakaraṇanidānaṃ.
『接合』者,谓房屋之间的连接。『消除』者,谓大范围的消灭。『出家者』者,谓放弃单一房屋、进入隐居之处。『围绕』者,谓阻断来往的道路,站立于道路上,阻止进出。『行恶』者,谓虽有『我行恶』的认识,却不作恶,故谓无恶。众生若误以为自己作恶,实则是妄想,故而启示此理。『环绕刀刃』者,亦有云以刀刃、或如刀锋锋利之物环绕。一者名为肉钳(夹住肉块者),一者名为肉堆。众生因之聚集。『故因』者,谓因由于肉钳形成之因缘。
Dakkhiṇanti dakkhiṇatīre manussā kakkhaḷā dāruṇā, te sandhāya ‘‘hananto’’tiādimāha. Uttaratīre sattā saddhā honti pasannā buddhamāmakā dhammamāmakā saṅghamāmakā, te sandhāya dadantotiādimāha. Tattha yajantoti mahāyāgaṃ karonto. Damenāti indriyadamena uposathakammena vā. Saṃyamenāti sīlasaṃyamena. Saccavajjenāti saccavacanena. Āgamoti āgamanaṃ, pavattīti attho. Sabbathāpi pāpapuññānaṃ kiriyameva paṭikkhipati.
『南方』者,谓南方岸边之人类,性情严酷残忍,彼等聚集时,唱言要杀敌。『北方』者,谓北岸各类众生,充满信心,心境明朗,自称信仰佛、法、僧三宝。彼等聚集时,唱言要施予。彼处举办盛大祭祀。『节制』者,或谓指根节制或接受伍波萨他戒律之行为。『制戒』者,谓遵守道德。『正语』者,谓守护诚实言辞。『来临』者,谓来往之意。常会断除恶善业之所作之果报。
Ambaṃ puṭṭho labujaṃ byākaroti nāma, yo kīdiso ambo kīdisāni vā ambassa khandhapaṇṇapupphaphalānīti vutte ediso labujo edisāni vā labujassa khandhapaṇṇapupphaphalānīti byākaroti. Vijiteti āṇāpavattidese. Apasādetabbanti viheṭhetabbaṃ. Anabhinanditvāti ‘‘sādhu sādhū’’ti evaṃ pasaṃsaṃ akatvā. Appaṭikkositvāti bāladubbhāsitaṃ tayā bhāsitanti evaṃ appaṭibāhitvā. Anuggaṇhantoti sārato aggaṇhanto. Anikkujjantoti sāravaseneva idaṃ nissaraṇaṃ, ayaṃ paramatthoti hadaye aṭṭhapento. Byañjanaṃ pana tena uggahitañceva nikkujjitañca.
『果实』、『枝叶』、『花朵』、『果子』等蕴集,谓对水质、水体之辨识。例如指明某水好坏、何水含何蕴集物。『征服』者,谓掌控生死流转之地。『不喜』者,谓不生欢喜。『不反对』者,谓虽无赞叹但亦不厌弃。『承受』者,谓接受愿意受持。『无烧毁』者,谓犹如蛾般即使被烧而无所惧,心中断灭如焚烧之灭。整体谓义分别及其象征。
Makkhaligosālavādavaṇṇanā马卡利果萨拉之说的解释
§167-169
167-169. Makkhalivāde paccayoti hetuvevacanameva, ubhayenāpi vijjamānameva kāyaduccaritādīnaṃ saṃkilesapaccayaṃ, kāyasucaritādīnañca visuddhipaccayaṃ paṭikkhipati. Attakāreti attakāro. Yena attanā katakammena ime sattā devattampi mārattampi brahmattampi sāvakabodhimpi paccekabodhimpi sabbaññutampi pāpuṇanti, tampi paṭikkhipati. Dutiyapadena yaṃ parakāraṃ parassa ovādānusāsaniṃ nissāya ṭhapetvā mahāsattaṃ avaseso jano manussasobhagyataṃ ādiṃ katvā yāva arahattaṃ pāpuṇāti, taṃ parakāraṃ paṭikkhipati. Evamayaṃ bālo jinacakke pahāraṃ deti nāma. Natthi purisakāreti yena purisakārena sattā vuttappakārā sampattiyo pāpuṇanti , tampi paṭikkhipati. Natthi balanti yamhi attano bale patiṭṭhitā sattā vīriyaṃ katvā tā sampattiyo pāpuṇanti, taṃ balaṃ paṭikkhipati. Natthi vīriyantiādīni sabbāni purisakāravevacanāneva. ‘‘Idaṃ no vīriyena idaṃ purisathāmena, idaṃ purisaparakkamena pavatta’’nti evaṃ pavattavacanapaṭikkhepakaraṇavasena panetāni visuṃ ādiyanti.
论及麦迦利派之言条件论。谓此言乃因果言说,皆基于身体恶行之因缘以及身体善行之清净因缘,故全然否定身恶及称身清之言。『自作』者,谓自己所行之业。由此自身所为令众生诸天、魔王、梵天、弟子觉者、独觉者及全智者皆能得益,此亦被否定。第二者谓借助他人劝导及教诲,令世人获得人的荣幸乃至阿拉汉果,此亦被否定。所谓愚者抛弃正觉眼。谓无仁者,若借助仁者之力众生获益,则亦被否定。无力量者,谓立于自身力之众生若能发挥勇猛得成正法,此亦否定。无勇猛等,谓全以仁者言语而流传,因而展示其虚假及空疏。
Sabbe sattāti oṭṭhagoṇagadrabhādayo anavasese pariggaṇhāti. Sabbe pāṇāti ekindriyo pāṇo, dvindriyo pāṇotiādivasena vadati. Sabbe bhūtāti aṇḍakosavatthikosesu bhūte sandhāya vadati. Sabbe jīvāti sāliyavagodhumādayo sandhāya vadati. Tesu hi so virūhanabhāvena jīvasaññī. Avasā abalā avīriyāti tesaṃ attano vaso vā balaṃ vā vīriyaṃ vā natthi. Niyatisaṅgatibhāvapariṇatāti ettha niyatīti niyatā. Saṅgatīti channaṃ abhijātīnaṃ tattha tattha gamanaṃ. Bhāvoti sabhāvoyeva. Evaṃ niyatiyā ca saṅgatiyā ca bhāvena ca pariṇatā nānappakārataṃ pattā. Yena hi yathā bhavitabbaṃ, so tatheva bhavati. Yena na bhavitabbaṃ, so na bhavatīti dasseti. Chasvevābhijātīsūti chasu eva abhijātīsu ṭhatvā sukhañca dukkhañca paṭisaṃvedenti. Aññā sukhadukkhabhūmi natthīti dasseti.
『所有众生』者,谓包括昆虫、蜈蚣等不缺漏地统计。『所有生命』者,谓一根所摄为一生命,两根为二生命等。『所有存在』者,谓指蛋、壳、壤及其所在,针对存在而言。『所有活物』者,谓指大米、小麦等食物,针对活物而言。因其化生如芽,故有生命识别。『无力』、『无坚强』、『无勇猛』者,谓其无自身之力量或能力。『固有法则成就』者,谓世间固著常住规律及其因缘成熟变化。谓『固有』者为恒常而非暂时。谓『成就』者谓本质形成及循环往复。如此,对于固定、成就及其性质,呈现多样现象。曰:应成者,则成;非应成者,则不成。谓六组恒常群落故,能分别感受苦乐。无他处可得有乐或苦。
Yonipamukhasatasahassānīti pamukhayonīnaṃ uttamayonīnaṃ cuddasasatasahassāni aññāni ca saṭṭhisatāni aññāni ca chasatāni. Pañca ca kammunosatānīti pañcakammasatāni ca. Kevalaṃ takkamattakena niratthakaṃ diṭṭhiṃ dīpeti. Pañca ca kammāni tīṇi ca kammānītiādīsupi eseva nayo. Keci panāhu – ‘‘pañca ca kammānīti pañcindriyavasena bhaṇati. Tīṇīti kāyakammādivasenā’’ti. Kamme ca upaḍḍhakamme cāti ettha panassa kāyakammañca vacīkammañca kammanti laddhi, manokammaṃ upaḍḍhakammanti. Dvaṭṭhipaṭipadāti dvāsaṭṭhi paṭipadāti vadati. Dvaṭṭhantarakappāti ekasmiṃ kappe catusaṭṭhi antarakappā nāma honti. Ayaṃ pana aññe dve ajānanto evamāha.
『位次首要繁多数』者,谓最胜位次之母系共计数以千计,以及其他数以万计。『五业数』者,谓五类业各分别计数。此呈现唯有帐数而无实义之见解。『五业,三业』者,此亦为惯用表述。间内有者谓身业、语业为业,意业为业的加重。『二十二劫』者,谓一劫内含六十二中间劫,称之为六十二间劫。另有少数二十二劫论者不知此标准而立说不同。
Chaḷābhijātiyoti kaṇhābhijāti, nīlābhijāti, lohitābhijāti, haliddābhijāti, sukkābhijāti, paramasukkābhijātīti imā cha abhijātiyo vadati. Tattha orabbhikā, sākuṇikā, māgavikā, sūkarikā, luddā, macchaghātakā corā, coraghātakā, bandhanāgārikā, ye vā panaññepi keci kurūrakammantā, ayaṃ kaṇhābhijātīti (a. ni. 6.57) vadati. Bhikkhū nīlābhijātīti vadati, te kira catūsu paccayesu kaṇṭake pakkhipitvā khādanti. ‘‘Bhikkhū kaṇṭakavuttikā’’ti (a. ni. 6.57) ayañhissa pāḷiyeva. Atha vā kaṇṭakavuttikā eva nāma eke pabbajitāti vadati. Lohitābhijāti nāma nigaṇṭhā ekasāṭakāti vadati. Ime kira purimehi dvīhi paṇḍaratarā. Gihī odātavasanā acelakasāvakā haliddābhijātīti vadati. Evaṃ attano paccayadāyake nigaṇṭhehipi jeṭṭhakatare karoti. Ājīvakā ājīvakiniyo sukkābhijātīti vadati. Te kira purimehi catūhi paṇḍaratarā. Nando, vaccho, kiso, saṅkiccho, makkhaligosālo, paramasukkābhijātīti (a. ni. 6.57) vadati. Te kira sabbehi paṇḍaratarā.
所谓六种业缘生,指的是黑业缘生、青业缘生、赤业缘生、黄业缘生、臭业缘生和极致臭业缘生。其中心中的黑业缘生,包含如鹰等鸟类、游牧民、野猪、猿猴、杀鱼者及盗贼、杀盗者、被捆缚之民,以及其他若干恶行者,皆属此黑业缘生。比库则称青业缘生,是指那些将四种因缘的荆棘植入口中咀嚼者,故被称为“口中荆棘”。或也有说“口中荆棘”者,指某些出家者之名。赤业缘生称为尼拘陀教派,意为持一尺树枝者。昔日两支黄业缘生,是指居家者穿白布衣,随身携带黄布,故称黄业缘生。此种乃黄业缘生中年长的,且在自身缘由中使其尼拘陀教派年长者作法。阿耆婆教徒及其女徒则称臭业缘生。他们有四支为白布衣者。难陀、瓦乔、迦苏、桑吉、马叉利、极致臭业缘生,他们都是穿白布衣者。
Aṭṭha purisabhūmiyoti mandabhūmi, khiḍḍābhūmi, padavīmaṃsabhūmi, ujugatabhūmi, sekkhabhūmi, samaṇabhūmi , jinabhūmi, pannabhūmīti imā aṭṭha purisabhūmiyoti vadati. Tattha jātadivasato paṭṭhāya sattadivase sambādhaṭṭhānato nikkhantattā sattā mandā honti momūhā, ayaṃ mandabhūmīti vadati. Ye pana duggatito āgatā honti, te abhiṇhaṃ rodanti ceva viravanti ca, sugatito āgatā taṃ anussaritvā hasanti, ayaṃ khiḍḍābhūmi nāma. Mātāpitūnaṃ hatthaṃ vā pādaṃ vā mañcaṃ vā pīṭhaṃ vā gahetvā bhūmiyaṃ padanikkhipanaṃ padavīmaṃsabhūmi nāma. Padasā gantuṃ samatthakāle ujugatabhūmi nāma. Sippāni sikkhitakāle sekkhabhūmi nāma. Gharā nikkhamma pabbajitakāle samaṇabhūmi nāma. Ācariyaṃ sevitvā jānanakāle jinabhūmi nāma. Bhikkhu ca pannako jino na kiñci āhāti evaṃ alābhiṃ samaṇaṃ pannabhūmīti vadati.
所谓八种人之地,指愚痴之地、哭泣之地、脚步踏地、坚定之地、学徒之地、沙门之地、胜利者之地与智慧者之地。这是因为初生出胎后,经历七天时节自胎中出,七天之内心智迟钝,是谓愚痴之地。那些受恶趣痛苦而哭泣的人,及获得善趣而喜乐者,称为哭泣之地。携带父母手或脚或杖或椅坐具放置于地者,称为脚步踏地。脚步可靠而行者,称为坚定之地。学习技艺者,称为学徒之地。出家入门者,称为沙门之地。侍奉师长获识者,称为胜利者之地。比库拥有智慧者,称为智慧者之地,即胜利的沙门。
Ekūnapaññāsa ājīvakasateti ekūnapaññāsaājīvakavuttisatāni. Paribbājakasateti paribbājakapabbajjāsatāni. Nāgāvāsasateti nāgamaṇḍalasatāni. Vīse indriyasateti vīsatindriyasatāni. Tiṃse nirayasateti tiṃsa nirayasatāni. Rajodhātuyoti rajaokiraṇaṭṭhānāni, hatthapiṭṭhipādapiṭṭhādīni sandhāya vadati. Satta saññīgabbhāti oṭṭhagoṇagadrabhaajapasumigamahiṃse sandhāya vadati. Satta asaññīgabbhāti sālivīhiyavagodhūmakaṅguvarakakudrūsake sandhāya vadati. Nigaṇṭhigabbhāti gaṇṭhimhi jātagabbhā, ucchuveḷunaḷādayo sandhāya vadati. Satta devāti bahū devā. So pana sattāti vadati. Manussāpi anantā, so sattāti vadati. Sattapisācāti pisācā mahantamahantā sattāti vadati. Sarāti mahāsarā, kaṇṇamuṇḍarathakāraanotattasīhappapātachaddantamandākinīkuṇāladahe gahetvā vadati.
所谓五十九阿耆婆教徒,意指五十九名阿耆婆教徒。所谓徒游者百名,乃指百名的徒游者出家者。所谓蛇居百名,指百名蛇界。所谓二十根百名,指二千根之集合。所谓三十狱百名,指三十地狱的罪人。所谓尘界,指尘界中尘粒。所谓七处感觉胞胎,依托各种身体部分而起的胎儿。所谓七处无觉胞胎,依托谷物、花草、糠秕等物体而成的胎。所谓尼拘陀胎,指在胎中形成的业力相关胎儿,如蚯蚓、蠕虫等。所谓七众天,指众多诸天。故此称七为众。人类也是无限众数,因此亦谓众。夜叉鬼魅常为大群聚集,亦谓众。鹫族、剃刀面狮兽、伞盖毒刺、鱼钩火焰等众生,亦如此称。
Pavuṭāti gaṇṭhikā. Papātāti mahāpapātā. Papātasatānīti khuddakapapātasatāni. Supināti mahāsupinā. Supinasatānīti khuddakasupinasatāni. Mahākappinoti mahākappānaṃ. Tattha ekamhā mahāsarā vassasate vassasate kusaggena ekaṃ udakabinduṃ nīharitvā sattakkhattuṃ tamhi sare nirudake kate eko mahākappoti vadati. Evarūpānaṃ mahākappānaṃ caturāsītisatasahassāni khepetvā bāle ca paṇḍite ca dukkhassantaṃ karontīti ayamassa laddhi. Paṇḍitopi kira antarā visujjhituṃ na sakkoti. Bālopi tato uddhaṃ na gacchati.
所谓骨髓,指脊髓或骨中的髓。所谓天堕,指大堕落之地。所谓堕落百名,指无数量之堕落众。所谓大睡,意谓沉睡甚深。所谓睡者百名,指少数沉睡众。所谓大咖毕那,是一大种族。其间有一大群天,年复一年,用草地中一滴水,经历七十万劫而被吸干时,有一人乃称大咖毕那。如此众多大咖毕那,达八十四万余千,愚者智者皆令痛苦平息。即使智者,也难以净化其中邪恶;愚者更不能兴盛。
Sīlenāti acelakasīlena vā aññena vā yena kenaci. Vatenāti tādiseneva vatena. Tapenāti tapokammena. Aparipakkaṃ paripāceti nāma, yo ‘‘ahaṃ paṇḍito’’ti antarā visujjhati. Paripakkaṃ phussa phussa byantiṃ karoti nāma yo ‘‘ahaṃ bālo’’ti vuttaparimāṇaṃ kālaṃ atikkamitvā yāti. Hevaṃ natthīti evaṃ natthi. Tañhi ubhayampi na sakkā kātunti dīpeti. Doṇamiteti doṇena mitaṃ viya. Sukhadukkheti sukhadukkhaṃ. Pariyantakateti vuttaparimāṇena kālena katapariyante. Natthihāyanavaḍḍhaneti natthi hāyanavaḍḍhanāni. Na saṃsāro paṇḍitassa hāyati, na bālassa vaḍḍhatīti attho. Ukkaṃsāvakaṃseti ukkaṃsāvakaṃsā. Hāyanavaḍḍhanānametaṃ adhivacanaṃ.
所谓戒律,指由长老或他人,依据某种规范所示者。所谓言说,指照此规者。所谓修行,指以修苦行之法。所谓未成熟与成熟,是指称为“我智者”而本心未净,以及频频发生疏漏之“我是愚者”的状态。所谓“确无此事”,指否认两者皆能成就。所谓朴直,指如实显现者。所谓福祸,则指幸福及痛苦。所谓完结,指因时间而终。所谓无灭无增,指无增无减。此谓世间无论智者或愚者,皆无损增无常。所谓剥皮,是指剥除内外之义。所谓无增无灭,是此名称。
Idāni tamatthaṃ upamāya sādhento ‘‘seyyathāpi nāmā’’tiādimāha. Tattha suttaguḷeti veṭhetvā katasuttaguḷe. Nibbeṭhiyamānameva paletīti pabbate vā rukkhagge vā ṭhatvā khittaṃ suttappamāṇena nibbeṭhiyamānameva gacchati, sutte khīṇe tattheva tiṭṭhati, na gacchati. Evameva vuttakālato uddhaṃ na gacchatīti dasseti.
现在依所论明喻,举如“譬如某物”等言。其间,将竹簇围起来,依竹簇围护之处安放树木,置于山中或树下,其燃烧程度恰为围簇之所限,如竹簇已尽火即灭而不溢延。此喻示现,表明瑜伽时代从不安逸状态升起无上道果之后,心不外散也不退转。
Ajitakesakambalavādavaṇṇanā阿基德给萨甘巴拉之说的解释
§170-172
170-172. Ajitavāde natthi dinnanti dinnaphalābhāvaṃ sandhāya vadati. Yiṭṭhaṃ vuccati mahāyāgo. Hutanti paheṇakasakkāro adhippeto. Tampi ubhayaṃ phalābhāvameva sandhāya paṭikkhipati. Sukatadukkaṭānanti sukatadukkaṭānaṃ, kusalākusalānanti attho. Phalaṃ vipākoti yaṃ phalanti vā vipākoti vā vuccati, taṃ natthīti vadati. Natthi ayaṃ lokoti paraloke ṭhitassa ayaṃ loko natthi, natthi paro lokoti idha loke ṭhitassāpi paro loko natthi, sabbe tattha tattheva ucchijjantīti dasseti. Natthi mātā natthi pitāti tesu sammāpaṭipattimicchāpaṭipattīnaṃ phalābhāvavasena vadati. Natthi sattā opapātikāti cavitvā upapajjanakā sattā nāma natthīti vadati.
170-172节。否定无掉落果报的论说者,建立于掉落果报的不存在而说法。此谓伟大舍弃。所谓火起乃火焰之相。是火亦以二者果报之不存在为缘而摒弃。所谓善恶苦者,即善恶之义。所谓果报、果受或果报之意者,谓其无有。谓无此者,此世无也,彼方世无也。谓彼方世无,此世中立者之彼方世亦无,诸处皆然,如法灭尽。谓无母无父者,指行善恶正行与邪行之结果之无无果报故。谓诸有生者为缘起者,去存之间生死有之者无。
Cātumahābhūtikoti catumahābhūtamayo. Pathavī pathavikāyanti ajjhattikapathavīdhātu bāhirapathavīdhātuṃ. Anupetīti anuyāyati. Anupagacchatīti tasseva vevacanaṃ. Anugacchatītipi attho. Ubhayenāpi upeti, upagacchatīti dasseti. Āpādīsupi eseva nayo. Indriyānīti manacchaṭṭhāni indriyāni ākāsaṃ pakkhandanti. Āsandipañcamāti nipannamañcena pañcamā, mañco ceva cattāro mañcapāde gahetvā ṭhitā cattāro purisā cāti attho. Yāvāḷāhanāti yāva susānā. Padānīti ‘ayaṃ evaṃ sīlavā ahosi, evaṃ dussīlo’tiādinā nayena pavattāni guṇāguṇapadāni, sarīrameva vā ettha padānīti adhippetaṃ. Kāpotakānīti kapotavaṇṇāni, pārāvatapakkhavaṇṇānīti attho. Bhassantāti bhasmantā, ayameva vā pāḷi. Āhutiyoti yaṃ paheṇakasakkārādibhedaṃ dinnadānaṃ, sabbaṃ taṃ chārikāvasānameva hoti, na tato paraṃ phaladāyakaṃ hutvā gacchatīti attho. Dattupaññattanti dattūhi bālamanussehi paññattaṃ. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – ‘bālehi abuddhīhi paññattamidaṃ dānaṃ, na paṇḍitehi. Bālā denti, paṇḍitā gaṇhantī’ti dasseti.
所谓四大者,即由四大组成。所谓地,即内在地界与外在地界。所谓相随,谓追随。一词中亦有相随,即跟随之意。双重皆表随行,或跟行。又如「上床」之意。所谓根,即念六根,根可分别。六根出空际。所谓坐席五者,赁一座位,五为坐席。所谓已熟,谓成熟成熟。所谓足,指『正如此人有德或无德』等品质名称,如此于身体上所称之足。所谓鸽色,即鸽羽色,及其翅羽之色。所谓化灰,谓灰烬,此即巴利所用名词。所谓供养,即衣服、尊敬等各类施与赠予,供养皆于迦罗婆罗园诸僧所现,非由其他而生后来的功德。所谓赠与定义,谓幼稚人赠者为定义。语言已说,有愚痴幼稚者施赠,贤慧者受纳,愚者施予,贤人受纳之义。
Tattha pūraṇo ‘‘karoto na karīyati pāpa’’nti vadanto kammaṃ paṭibāhati. Ajito ‘‘kāyassa bhedā ucchijjatī’’ti vadanto vipākaṃ paṭibāhati. Makkhali ‘‘natthi hetū’’ti vadanto ubhayaṃ paṭibāhati. Tattha kammaṃ paṭibāhantenāpi vipāko paṭibāhito hoti, vipākaṃ paṭibāhantenāpi kammaṃ paṭibāhitaṃ hoti. Iti sabbepete atthato ubhayappaṭibāhakā ahetukavādā ceva akiriyavādā ca natthikavādā ca honti.
此处,波罗诃那坚称「作恶不必作」,复位置否定业。阿季陀辩论「身破即断灭」以否定果报。魔兴辩说「无因」而否定因果。此处虽否业,亦须肯定果报,虽肯果报,亦须肯业。故合论中既以双重肯定,亦含无因论、无为论与无效论。
Ye vā pana tesaṃ laddhiṃ gahetvā rattiṭṭhāne divāṭhāne nisinnā sajjhāyanti vīmaṃsanti, tesaṃ ‘‘karoto na karīyati pāpaṃ, natthi hetu, natthi paccayo, mato ucchijjatī’’ti tasmiṃ ārammaṇe micchāsati santiṭṭhati, cittaṃ ekaggaṃ hoti, javanāni javanti, paṭhamajavane satekicchā honti, tathā dutiyādīsu, sattame buddhānampi atekicchā anivattino ariṭṭhakaṇṭakasadisā. Tattha koci ekaṃ dassanaṃ okkamati, koci dve, koci tīṇipi, ekasmiṃ okkantepi, dvīsu tīsu okkantesupi, niyatamicchādiṭṭhikova hoti; patto saggamaggāvaraṇañceva mokkhamaggāvaraṇañca, abhabbo tassattabhāvassa anantaraṃ saggampi gantuṃ, pageva mokkhaṃ. Vaṭṭakhāṇu nāmesa satto pathavigopako, yebhuyyena evarūpassa bhavato vuṭṭhānaṃ natthi.
或者,取其所得者,昼夜各处盘坐修习,观照思惟。彼等持有「作恶不作恶、无因无缘、心即断灭」等恶见。于此执着起错误界限之一,心专注而生速疾念,初速疾念多,如此第二等至第七佛时亦有少量且未断绝者,似敌害。其间有人通达之一端者,有人达二端,有人达三端,或在一端有所通达,二三端亦然。此恶见如执着于天界及解脱道之障碍,不能迅速得天上,亦不能即得解脱。名曰「轮谷」,守护大地之神,因无此类彼起。
‘‘Tasmā akalyāṇajanaṃ, āsīvisamivoragaṃ;
「因此,应远离恶劣之人,如毒箭如毒蛇一般;
Ārakā parivajjeyya, bhūtikāmo vicakkhaṇo’’ti.
勇士应当远离,善于分别,志求真理者。」
Pakudhakaccāyanavādavaṇṇanā巴古德咖吒亚那之说的解释
§173-175
173-175. Pakudhavāde akaṭāti akatā. Akaṭavidhāti akatavidhānā. Evaṃ karohīti kenaci kārāpitāpi na hontīti attho. Animmitāti iddhiyāpi na nimmitā. Animmātāti animmāpitā, keci animmāpetabbāti padaṃ vadanti, taṃ neva pāḷiyaṃ, na aṭṭhakathāyaṃ dissati. Vañjhādipadattayaṃ vuttatthameva. Na iñjantīti esikatthambho viya ṭhitattā na calanti. Na vipariṇamantīti pakatiṃ na jahanti. Na aññamaññaṃ byābādhentīti na aññamaññaṃ upahananti. Nālanti na samatthā. Pathavikāyotiādīsu pathavīyeva pathavikāyo, pathavisamūho vā. Tatthāti tesu jīvasattamesu kāyesu. Sattannaṃ tveva kāyānanti yathā muggarāsiādīsu pahataṃ satthaṃ muggādīnaṃ antarena pavisati, evaṃ sattannaṃ kāyānaṃ antarena chiddena vivarena satthaṃ pavisati. Tattha ahaṃ imaṃ jīvitā voropemīti kevalaṃ saññāmattameva hotīti dasseti.
173-175. 关于「假有」、「未有」的释义说明。所谓「假有」者,谓未真实具备之事。所谓「未造有」者,谓未造作之状。此「如此为之」者,即使有人强令作之,却不能成就其义。所谓「无相」者,即使凭神通亦不具相。所谓「未造」则是未被造作,有些人言应当作「未造」,但此说既非巴利原文,亦不见于注疏中。此种说法乃依空文义而言。所谓「不变」者,犹如立于支柱之固定状态,不动摇也。所谓「不转」者,中间无变化无消失。所谓「不相侵」者,彼此不互相侵扰。所谓「不损」者,不得破坏。所谓「不合」者,不能结合。所谓「地有」者,是指地元素之体,或地元素之集合。在此,即指诸有情生命所具之身躯。如同泥球等,外部损伤时,能渗入中间部分,诸有情生命之身亦复如是,其中空隙中能入其内。谓此我身之生命仅为一种意识印象,还表现了其仅是感知名相的状态。
Nigaṇṭhanāṭaputtavādavaṇṇanā尼干陀那达子之说的解释
§176-178
176-178. Nāṭaputtavāde cātuyāmasaṃvarasaṃvutoti catukoṭṭhāsena saṃvarena saṃvuto. Sabbavārivāritocāti vāritasabbaudako paṭikkhittasabbasītodakoti attho. So kira sītodake sattasaññī hoti, tasmā na taṃ vaḷañjeti. Sabbavāriyuttoti sabbena pāpavāraṇena yutto. Sabbavāridhutoti sabbena pāpavāraṇena dhutapāpo. Sabbavāriphuṭoti sabbena pāpavāraṇena phuṭṭho. Gatattoti koṭippattacitto. Yatattoti saṃyatacitto. Ṭhitattoti suppatiṭṭhitacitto. Etassa vāde kiñci sāsanānulomampi atthi, asuddhaladdhitāya pana sabbā diṭṭhiyeva jātā.
第176-178句。关于“Nāṭaputta”(迦毗罗派)的说法: 所谓“四重约束”,即由四种约束所守持。 “Sabbavārivāritocā”意谓被全体水流包围,亦即被寒水所拒绝;此水被视为寒冷水。其人便如有七种感知于此寒水中,故其不愿进入此寒水。 “Sabbavāriyutta”者,谓全面以恶障碍所缠绕。 “Sabbavāridhuta”者,谓以恶障染污。 “Sabbavāriphuṭa”者,谓恶障亦曾被打破。 “Gatatta”者,谓意志已远离纷扰。 “Yatatta”者,谓心已调摄。 “Ṭhitatta”者,谓心已坚固安住。 此教义中虽有些许与三藏教法相契合之处,但因基于不清净之利得,故只生于邪见之中。
Sañcayabelaṭṭhaputtavādavaṇṇanā散泽耶贝拉塔子之说的解释
§179-181
179-181. Sañcayavādo amarāvikkhepe vuttanayo eva.
179-181. 积聚论者,谓无残余积累者,此乃针对教义之论述。
Paṭhamasandiṭṭhikasāmaññaphalavaṇṇanā第一种现见沙门果的解释
§182
182.Sohaṃ, bhanteti so ahaṃ bhante, vālukaṃ pīḷetvā telaṃ alabhamāno viya titthiyavādesu sāraṃ alabhanto bhagavantaṃ pucchāmīti attho.
第182句。“Sohaṁ, bhante”意谓“我啊,长老”,此处如沙地被碾压取油,于异端中取其精髓,意曾问及世尊之义。
§183
183.Yathā te khameyyāti yathā te rucceyya. Dāsoti antojātadhanakkītakaramarānītasāmaṃdāsabyopagatānaṃ aññataro. Kammakāroti analaso kammakaraṇasīloyeva. Dūrato disvā paṭhamameva uṭṭhahatīti pubbuṭṭhāyī. Evaṃ uṭṭhito sāmino āsanaṃ paññapetvā pādadhovanādikattabbakiccaṃ katvā pacchā nipatati nisīdatīti pacchānipātī. Sāmikamhi vā sayanato avuṭṭhite pubbeyeva vuṭṭhātīti pubbuṭṭhāyī. Paccūsakālato paṭṭhāya yāva sāmino rattiṃ niddokkamanaṃ, tāva sabbakiccāni katvā pacchā nipatati, seyyaṃ kappetīti pacchānipātī. Kiṃ karomi, kiṃ karomīti evaṃ kiṃkārameva paṭisuṇanto vicaratīti kiṃ kārapaṭissāvī. Manāpameva kiriyaṃ karotīti manāpacārī. Piyameva vadatīti piyavādī. Sāmino tuṭṭhapahaṭṭhaṃ mukhaṃ ullokayamāno vicaratīti mukhullokako.
183. 如你欲令彼安住,如你欲令彼悦意。所谓奴隶,谓被内在出身世故污秽戏谑所牵累者。所谓业行者,谓勤劳持守戒律之人。如从远处见须臾立起,即谓前行者。如此起立者,恰似端坐于座具,恰当地完成如洗足等应行之事,之后安然坐下,此谓『之后坐下』。或于眠床上起来时,亦是最先立起者。此谓『先行者』。于天明时起身后,整夜间完成一切业事,之后坐下,准备卧床,此谓『之后坐下』。如是思虑「当作何事,当作何事」,即为『有所思虑』。行事唯依意愿,此谓『意愿行为』。语言温和悦耳,此谓『悦语者』。行者面带喜色与满足,专注观视,此谓『面观者』。
Devo maññeti devo viya. Sovatassāhaṃ puññāni kareyyanti so vata ahaṃ evarūpo assaṃ, yadi puññāni kareyyanti attho. ‘‘So vatassa’ssa’’ntipi pāṭho, ayamevattho. Yaṃnūnāhanti sace dānaṃ dassāmi, yaṃ rājā ekadivasaṃ deti, tato satabhāgampi yāvajīvaṃ na sakkhissāmi dātunti pabbajjāyaṃ ussāhaṃ katvā evaṃ cintanabhāvaṃ dasseti.
“Devo maññeti”谓“以为为神”,即误以为自己是天人者。 “我必行善积功德”,言此人自念若行善则有益。 “‘So vataassa’ssa’之句为文本,意涵即是此义。” “所谓如果我行布施,若国王一日所施,我更不可能终身给予百倍之多”,此乃发起出家决志前之强烈意念,表示其决心由此而生。
Kāyena saṃvutoti kāyena pihito hutvā akusalassa pavesanadvāraṃ thaketvāti attho. Eseva nayo sesapadadvayepi. Ghāsacchādanaparamatāyāti ghāsacchādanena paramatāya uttamatāya, etadatthampi anesanaṃ pahāya aggasallekhena santuṭṭhoti attho. Abhirato paviveketi ‘‘kāyaviveko ca vivekaṭṭhakāyānaṃ, cittaviveko ca nekkhammābhiratānaṃ, paramavodānappattānaṃ upadhiviveko ca nirupadhīnaṃ puggalānaṃ visaṅkhāragatāna’’nti evaṃ vutte tividhepi viveke rato; gaṇasaṅgaṇikaṃ pahāya kāyena eko viharati, cittakilesasaṅgaṇikaṃ pahāya aṭṭhasamāpattivasena eko viharati, phalasamāpattiṃ vā nirodhasamāpattiṃ vā pavisitvā nibbānaṃ patvā viharatīti attho. Yaggheti codanatthe nipāto.
以身缚者,意谓用身躯所束缚,将身躯遮盖,使其不入不善之门。此乃该词义所在,与余下两词同义。所谓用草覆盖,乃指用草覆盖以达到最高境界,此义亦指弃恶染,依正洁划为满足。所谓欢喜于独处,即‘身之独处是制止身体之独处者,心之独处则属舍弃分别贪著者,依最高无上智慧而得者,且无弊碍者之栖止独处’,如此说法中有三种独处之乐:离群而独,一人以身独住;断除心之烦恼,以八禅定住;入于果位或灭尽定而涅槃而住。此句终结语“yagghe”属助词催促。
§184
184.Āsanenapinimanteyyāmāti nisinnāsanaṃ papphoṭetvā idha nisīdathāti vadeyyāma. Abhinimanteyyāmapi nanti abhiharitvāpi naṃ nimanteyyāma. Tattha duvidho abhihāro – vācāya ceva kāyena ca. Tumhākaṃ icchiticchitakkhaṇe amhākaṃ cīvarādīhi vadeyyātha yenatthoti vadanto hi vācāya abhiharitvā nimanteti nāma. Cīvarādivekallaṃ sallakkhetvā idaṃ gaṇhāthāti tāni dento pana kāyena abhiharitvā nimanteti nāma. Tadubhayampi sandhāya abhinimanteyyāmapi nanti āha. Ettha ca gilānapaccayabhesajjaparikkhāroti yaṃ kiñci gilānassa sappāyaṃ osadhaṃ. Vacanattho pana visuddhimagge vutto. Rakkhāvaraṇaguttinti rakkhāsaṅkhātañceva āvaraṇasaṅkhātañca guttiṃ. Sā panesā na āvudhahatthe purise ṭhapentena dhammikā nāma saṃvidahitā hoti. Yathā pana avelāya kaṭṭhahārikapaṇṇahārikādayo vihāraṃ na pavisanti, migaluddakādayo vihārasīmāya mige vā macche vā na gaṇhanti, evaṃ saṃvidahantena dhammikā nāma rakkhā saṃvihitā hoti, taṃ sandhāyāha – ‘‘dhammika’’nti.
经文曰:“坐处不可侮慢”,意谓屁股坐处开放应即坐此。即使不侮慢亦不应使其屈伸。此处所说侮慢有二种,语言与身行。比如你们临时欲求我们的衣物等,即谓语中以语言侮慢呼求;若因衣物等牵连则谓身行侮慢呼求。故因二者连合说“不应侮慢”。又说病人所用之药物乃一切病中所需之药。此语意出处为《清净道论》。所谓保障及遮蔽,即‘保护和覆盖之义’,此处规定“保障”不是武器手持之法而是法中所具之保护。譬如毒蛇蝎蜘蛛等不进入舍中,猎犬猎豹不侵入界限,以此守护者称为法之保障,此中宣称为“法者”。
§185
185.Yadi evaṃ santeti yadi tava dāso tuyhaṃ santikā abhivādanādīni labheyya. Evaṃ sante. Addhāti ekaṃsavacanametaṃ. Paṭhamanti bhaṇanto aññassāpi atthitaṃ dīpeti. Teneva ca rājā sakkā pana, bhante, aññampītiādimāha.
经文曰:“若如此安然,若你的仆人向你求安,得以安者,如是安然。”其中“依达”即一句话。此指首语中者,先人所说亦启示他义。故王及天帝等言“尊者,此亦他人”。
Dutiyasandiṭṭhikasāmaññaphalavaṇṇanā第二现见沙门果义注
§186-188
186-188. Kasatīti kassako. Gehassa pati, ekagehamatte jeṭṭhakoti gahapatiko. Balisaṅkhātaṃ karaṃ karotīti karakārako. Dhaññarāsiṃ dhanarāsiñca vaḍḍhetīti rāsivaḍḍhako.
186-188. 「卡萨」意谓农夫。「家户主人」谓独居一处之居士长者。「劳动者」意谓持守自身工作者。「财产增多者」意谓财富增长者。
Appaṃvāti parittakaṃ vā antamaso taṇḍulanāḷimattakampi. Bhogakkhandhanti bhogarāsiṃ. Mahantaṃ vāti vipulaṃ vā. Yathā hi mahantaṃ pahāya pabbajituṃ dukkaraṃ, evaṃ appampīti dassanatthaṃ ubhayamāha. Dāsavāre pana yasmā dāso attanopi anissaro, pageva bhogānaṃ. Yañhi tassa dhanaṃ, taṃ sāmikānaññeva hoti, tasmā bhogaggahaṇaṃ na kataṃ. Ñātiyeva ñātiparivaṭṭo.
“Appaṃvā”意为少量或小幅度,“parittakaṃ vā”应为少分,“antamaso”指里面。因而合成意为连稻梗秸秆少许也。“Bhogakkhandha”则指财产量。“Mahantaṃ vā”意为广大。意旨放弃广大财富而出家甚难,因而称为少也,目的是二者的对照。又言仆役者常无主,所在凭借财富,若有其财富即是主人,故不制造占有财富的动作。又“Ñātiyeva ñātiparivaṭṭo”指名族范围内的亲属圈。
Paṇītatarasāmaññaphalavaṇṇanā更殊胜沙门果义注
§189
189.Sakkā pana, bhante, aññampi diṭṭheva dhammeti idha evamevāti na vuttaṃ. Taṃ kasmāti ce, evamevāti hi vuccamāne pahoti bhagavā sakalampi rattindivaṃ tato vā bhiyyopi evarūpāhi upamāhi sāmaññaphalaṃ dīpetuṃ. Tattha kiñcāpi etassa bhagavato vacanasavane pariyantaṃ nāma natthi, tathāpi attho tādisoyeva bhavissatīti cintetvā upari visesaṃ pucchanto evamevāti avatvā – ‘‘abhikkantatarañca paṇītatarañcā’’ti āha. Tattha abhikkantataranti abhimanāpataraṃ atiseṭṭhataranti attho. Paṇītataranti uttamataraṃ. Tena hīti uyyojanatthe nipāto. Savane uyyojento hi naṃ evamāha. Suṇohīti abhikkantatarañca paṇītatarañca sāmaññaphalaṃ suṇāti.
经文云:“尊者,除了此处所说,尚无他法。”若有人问此为何,即谓“evameva”即是如此说法,世尊故由昼夜不断多方喻义以显此道果。虽然此处无殊胜外语经文,但意义当如此存在。故深思问及更殊胜者,之后以“abhikkantatarañca paṇītatarañca”论曰更深更佳者,且更纯净者。故结句以地图之意作结。其谓“abhikkantatara”即更为超越,更为拔萃。“paṇītatara”即更为纯净。此句为总结语。听闻之者能得更深且更纯净功德。
Sādhukaṃ manasikarohīti ettha pana sādhukaṃ sādhūti ekatthametaṃ. Ayañhi sādhu-saddo āyācanasampaṭicchanasampahaṃsanasundara daḷhīkammādīsu dissati. ‘‘Sādhu me, bhante, bhagavā saṅkhittena dhammaṃ desetū’’tiādīsu (saṃ. ni. 4.95) hi āyācane dissati. ‘‘Sādhu, bhanteti kho so bhikkhu bhagavato bhāsitaṃ abhinanditvā anumoditvā’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 3.86) sampaṭicchane. ‘‘Sādhu sādhu, sāriputtā’’tiādīsu (dī. ni. 3.349) sampahaṃsane.
“应当称赞”之意,此处所称“应当称赞”即合于同义。这里“应当称赞”一词体现于请求、赞同和赞美等语境中,尤其显现于劝请、请求、称赞及欢喜实务等中。如『善哉!世尊,请简要宣说法』等请求用语(《增支部》4.95)即可见;又如称赞时说『善哉,尊者!』表示喜悦赞叹(《中部》3.86);及赞美中说『善哉!善哉!沙利迦子』(《长部》3.349)。
‘‘Sādhu dhammaruci rājā, sādhu paññāṇavā naro;
“善哉,有好法趣向的王,善哉,智慧充足的人;
Sādhu mittānamaddubbho, pāpassākaraṇaṃ sukha’’nti. (jā. 2.17.101);
善哉,善于结交朋友,恶事已除乃得安乐。”(《长部》2.17.101)
Ādīsu sundare. ‘‘Tena hi, brāhmaṇa, suṇohi sādhukaṃ manasi karohī’’tiādīsu (a. ni. 5.192) sādhukasaddoyeva daḷhīkamme, āṇattiyantipi vuccati . Idhāpi assa ettheva daḷhīkamme ca āṇattiyañca veditabbo. Sundarepi vaṭṭati. Daḷhīkammatthena hi daḷhamimaṃ dhammaṃ suṇāhi, suggahitaṃ gaṇhanto. Āṇattiatthena mama āṇattiyā suṇāhi, sundaratthena sundaramimaṃ bhaddakaṃ dhammaṃ suṇāhīti evaṃ dīpitaṃ hoti.
此皆佳言。如经中所说:“所以,婆罗门啊,应当记取‘善哉’之语”(《增壹阿含》5.192),可见‘善哉’一词于坚定实务上十分重要,且有敬称性质。此处应当认识到其实践坚定与敬称之用并存。且‘善哉’于美善之义亦成立。依坚定功用者,听闻此法时要坚定接受;依敬称功用,则以尊敬接受;依美善意义,则以此美妙之法令人欢喜,因此如是被明示。
Manasi karohīti āvajja, samannāharāti attho, avikkhittacitto hutvā nisāmehi, citte karohīti adhippāyo. Api cettha suṇohīti sotindriyavikkhepanivāraṇametaṃ. Sādhukaṃ manasi karohīti manasikāre daḷhīkammaniyojanena manindriyavikkhepanivāraṇaṃ. Purimañcettha byañjanavipallāsaggāhavāraṇaṃ, pacchimaṃ atthavipallāsaggāhavāraṇaṃ. Purimena ca dhammassavane niyojeti, pacchimena sutānaṃ dhammānaṃ dhāraṇūpaparikkhādīsu. Purimena ca sabyañjano ayaṃ dhammo, tasmā savanīyoti dīpeti . Pacchimena sattho, tasmā sādhukaṃ manasi kātabboti. Sādhukapadaṃ vā ubhayapadehi yojetvā yasmā ayaṃ dhammo dhammagambhīro ceva desanāgambhīro ca, tasmā suṇāhi sādhukaṃ, yasmā atthagambhīro ca paṭivedhagambhīro ca, tasmā sādhukaṃ manasi karohīti evaṃ yojanā veditabbā. Bhāsissāmīti sakkā mahārājāti evaṃ paṭiññātaṃ sāmaññaphaladesanaṃ vitthārato bhāsissāmi. ‘‘Desessāmī’’ti hi saṅkhittadīpanaṃ hoti. Bhāsissāmīti vitthāradīpanaṃ. Tenāha vaṅgīsatthero –
“记取”一词意为牢记、具足意愿,意指心意专注,不分散,尽心于意,名为致心。此处“听闻”指防止根尘相接而心散乱。“应当称赞并牢记”指用坚定的专注力,避免散乱,使六根不散乱。这里前项指因言音变异及语义偏差的障碍,后项是指意义之障碍。前者拘束于闻法,后者拘束于听闻法的持守及思考。由前者,即音声遮蔽,此法得以集聚,因此称为易于听闻。由后者,即教说者(导师)得以使弟子了解此法,因此称为应当谨慎牢记。以这双重意涵结合,因为此法深奥且讲义深广,所以“善哉应当记忆”之意应当如此体认。我将详述如是义因何方——
‘‘Saṅkhittenapi deseti, vitthārenapi bhāsati;
“简要而说,又详尽而演讲;
Sāḷikāyiva nigghoso, paṭibhānaṃ udīrayī’’ti. (saṃ. ni. 1.214);
“如同鸦雀鸣叫,声音响亮清晰。”(分别集·注1.214)
Evaṃ vutte ussāhajāto hutvā – ‘‘evaṃ, bhante’’ti kho rājā māgadho ajātasattu vedehiputto bhagavato paccassosi bhagavato vacanaṃ sampaṭicchi, paṭiggahesīti vuttaṃ hoti.
经如此宣说后,怀着由精进而生的信心,玛嘎达国王未生怨、世尊弟子听闻佛陀的教诲,内心清净接受了佛陀的话语,愿意奉行,于是有此记载。
§190
190. Athassa bhagavā etadavoca, etaṃ avoca, idāni vattabbaṃ ‘‘idha mahārājā’’tiādiṃ sakalaṃ suttaṃ avocāti attho. Tattha idhāti desāpadese nipāto, svāyaṃ katthaci lokaṃ upādāya vuccati. Yathāha – ‘‘idha tathāgato loke uppajjatī’’ti. Katthaci sāsanaṃ yathāha – ‘‘idheva, bhikkhave, paṭhamo samaṇo, idha dutiyo samaṇo’’ti (a. ni. 4.241). Katthaci okāsaṃ. Yathāha –
190. 彼时世尊说了此言,然后又说,现在应该说的是“此处大王”,等等,称此为全部的经文。这里“idhāti”是指地域词,是说明特定场所的副词,自身表示特定地方或境界。比如说——“此处如来在世间降生”。也有指某教法的场合,比如说——“正是在这里,诸比库,第一沙门,第二沙门”等等。(中部·注4.241)又有指时间场合,如说——
‘‘Idheva tiṭṭhamānassa, devabhūtassa me sato;
“正是在这里立足,成为神通者的我。[我]觉知此事,摩厉沙啊,能如此知晓。”
Punarāyu ca me laddho, evaṃ jānāhi mārisā’’ti. (dī. ni. 2.369);
「愿我得复寿命,尔时当知,魔王」——此语出自《大分律》2卷369页。
Katthaci padapūraṇamattameva. Yathāha ‘‘idhāhaṃ, bhikkhave, bhuttāvī assaṃ pavārito’’ti (ma. ni. 1.30). Idha pana lokaṃ upādāya vuttoti veditabbo. Mahārājāti yathā paṭiññātaṃ desanaṃ desetuṃ puna mahārājāti ālapati. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – ‘‘mahārāja imasmiṃ loke tathāgato uppajjati arahaṃ…pe… buddho bhagavā’’ti. Tattha tathāgatasaddo brahmajāle vutto. Arahantiādayo visuddhimagge vitthāritā. Loke uppajjatīti ettha pana lokoti – okāsaloko sattaloko saṅkhāralokoti tividho. Idha pana sattaloko adhippeto. Sattaloke uppajjamānopi ca tathāgato na devaloke, na brahmaloke, manussalokeva uppajjati. Manussalokepi na aññasmiṃ cakkavāḷe, imasmiṃyeva cakkavāḷe. Tatrāpi na sabbaṭṭhānesu, ‘‘puratthimāya disāya gajaṅgalaṃ nāma nigamo tassāparena mahāsālo, tato parā paccantimā janapadā orato majjhe, puratthimadakkhiṇāya disāya salaḷavatī nāma nadī. Tato parā paccantimā janapadā, orato majjhe, dakkhiṇāya disāya setakaṇṇikaṃ nāma nigamo, tato parā paccantimā janapadā, orato majjhe, pacchimāya disāya thūṇaṃ nāma brāhmaṇagāmo, tato parā paccantimā janapadā, orato majjhe, uttarāya disāya usiraddhajo nāma pabbato, tato parā paccantimā janapadā orato majjhe’’ti evaṃ paricchinne āyāmato tiyojanasate, vitthārato aḍḍhateyyayojanasate, parikkhepato navayojanasate majjhimapadese uppajjati. Na kevalañca tathāgato, paccekabuddhā, aggasāvakā, asītimahātherā, buddhamātā, buddhapitā, cakkavattī rājā aññe ca sārappattā brāhmaṇagahapatikā etthevuppajjanti.
又有用法仅止于词语填补,比如说“现在我,诸比库,将要起身离去。”(中部·注1.30)这里“idhāti”意指特定地方,应理解为特定世界。称“大王”是因为重新宣说已知的教法,故再次称其为“大王”。有记载曰:“大王,在此世界中,如来出现,阿拉汉……佛,世尊”诸称号均在此地发生。此处如来之名,乃以梵网经诵;阿拉汉等圣者以清净之道展开说明。说“世界出现”,这里的“世界”指三界,即贪、嗔、痴缠绕形成的存在界分类。此处是七界掌控者。即便在此七界之中,世尊也不产生于天界梵天界,乃在人间世出世间界。且在人间世界中,并非所有地方都有诞生。不是于处处皆有,如东方宝象林是其所居大营,北方南方各有著名城邑河流山岳详列:象林名为“Nigamo”,北方有“Salaḷavatī”河,南方有“Setakaṇṇika”城,西方有“Thūṇa”的婆罗门村落,北方有“Usiraddhajo”山等。依此分割区域约三十余里宽广,内容详尽分布范围约八十余里,往返距离近十里,于中部位生成。世尊不仅如此,诸助佛圣者、初果弟子、年长比库寮母、比库等诸王、婆罗门、富商皆生于此处。
Tattha tathāgato sujātāya dinnamadhupāyāsabhojanato yāva arahattamaggo, tāva uppajjati nāma, arahattaphale uppanno nāma. Mahābhinikkhamanato vā yāva arahattamaggo. Tusitabhavanato vā yāva arahattamaggo. Dīpaṅkarapādamūlato vā yāva arahattamaggo, tāva uppajjati nāma, arahattaphale uppanno nāma. Idha sabbapaṭhamaṃ uppannabhāvaṃ sandhāya uppajjatīti vuttaṃ. Tathāgato loke uppanno hotīti ayañhettha attho.
在此,如来自世尊从善出生、受食蜜乳糜,到达到阿拉汉果的路径上,直到获得阿拉汉果为止,所生的名号即为『阿拉汉果生起』。或者自大出世生起直到阿拉汉果的路径,或者自忉利天宫(忉利天居所)直到阿拉汉果的路径,又或者自提婆达多(Dīpaṅkara)足下开始直到阿拉汉果的路径,都是如此而生起。于此,上述皆为述及第一开始生起状态,并由此而生起,故而说曰:世尊于世间之生起具足,这就是此处之义。
So imaṃ lokanti so bhagavā imaṃ lokaṃ. Idāni vattabbaṃ nidasseti. Sadevakanti saha devehi sadevakaṃ. Evaṃ saha mārena samārakaṃ, saha brahmunā sabrahmakaṃ, saha samaṇabrāhmaṇehi sassamaṇabrāhmaṇiṃ. Pajātattā pajā, taṃ pajaṃ. Saha devamanussehi sadevamanussaṃ. Tattha sadevakavacanena pañca kāmāvacaradevaggahaṇaṃ veditabbaṃ. Samāraka – vacanena chaṭṭhakāmāvacaradevaggahaṇaṃ. Sabrahmakavacanena brahmakāyikādibrahmaggahaṇaṃ. Sassamaṇabrāhmaṇīvacanena sāsanassa paccatthikapaccāmittasamaṇabrāhmaṇaggahaṇaṃ, samitapāpabāhitapāpasamaṇabrāhmaṇaggahaṇañca. Pajāvacanena sattalokaggahaṇaṃ. Sadevamanussavacanena sammutidevaavasesamanussaggahaṇaṃ. Evamettha tīhi padehi okāsalokena saddhiṃ sattaloko. Dvīhi pajāvasena sattalokova gahitoti veditabbo.
那个世界即是这个世界,世尊亦即这个世界。现在应当说明此义。所谓天众,就是和众神同在的诸天。又如同与魔王共同作伴的魔使,与梵天一同归依的梵众,以及与沙门婆罗门共同而居的沙门婆罗门。众生即为生俱,生俱即为众生。和天人共处之凡人,称为凡众。于此,藉由天众之语应当了解五欲界之欲界天;借魔众之语即六欲界之欲界天;借梵众之语即色界梵天之中梵身天;而借沙门婆罗门语则为法之根本、依止、从因而起的沙门婆罗门天,以及斩恶除恶之沙门婆罗门天;借众生语为七界天;借凡人天语则为经认可之诸天及凡众。借此三重称谓,七界与凡界合一为七界。由两种众生之称谓,七界定立应当如此。
Aparo nayo, sadevakaggahaṇena arūpāvacaradevaloko gahito. Samārakaggahaṇena cha kāmāvacaradevaloko. Sabrahmakaggahaṇena rūpī brahmaloko. Sassamaṇabrāhmaṇādiggahaṇena catuparisavasena sammutidevehi vā saha manussaloko, avasesasabbasattaloko vā.
此外,依据天众之称谓,非色界诸天为无色界欲界诸天;依魔王众为六欲界欲界诸天;依梵众为色界三十三天等色界梵身天;依沙门婆罗门众为四部天众,合诸天及人与凡界众生。
Api cettha sadevakavacanena ukkaṭṭhaparicchedato sabbassa lokassa sacchikatabhāvamāha. Tato yesaṃ ahosi – ‘‘māro mahānubhāvo cha kāmāvacarissaro vasavattī, kiṃ sopi etena sacchikato’’ti, tesaṃ vimatiṃ vidhamanto ‘‘samāraka’’nti āha. Yesaṃ pana ahosi – ‘‘brahmā mahānubhāvo ekaṅguliyā ekasmiṃ cakkavāḷasahasse ālokaṃ pharati, dvīhi …pe… dasahi aṅgulīhi dasasu cakkavāḷasahassesu ālokaṃ pharati. Anuttarañca jhānasamāpattisukhaṃ paṭisaṃvedeti, kiṃ sopi sacchikato’’ti, tesaṃ vimatiṃ vidhamanto sabrahmakanti āha. Tato ye cintesuṃ – ‘‘puthū samaṇabrāhmaṇā sāsanassa paccatthikā, kiṃ tepi sacchikatā’’ti, tesaṃ vimatiṃ vidhamanto sassamaṇabrāhmaṇiṃ pajanti āha. Evaṃ ukkaṭṭhukkaṭṭhānaṃ sacchikatabhāvaṃ pakāsetvā atha sammutideve avasesamanusse ca upādāya ukkaṭṭhaparicchedavasena sesasattalokassa sacchikatabhāvaṃ pakāsento sadevamanussanti āha. Ayamettha bhāvānukkamo.
又此处,借天众之语大致划分而表述诸世界之真实存在。对于那些认为:『魔王虽为大力者,是六欲界欲界诸天的主宰,有何证据示现?』者,其惑乱因错认魔众故称『魔使』。对于认为:『梵天虽为大神,其光仅及一指宽、少许界域,有时扩展至数千界,而体证未曾达至无上禅定的极乐,如何得称真实?』者,其惑乱因错认梵众故称『梵天』。对于认为:『众多的沙门婆罗门为佛法之依止者,何有其真实?』者,迷惑之因故称『沙门婆罗门』。由此粗略划分并表明真实存在,随后说明经认可之诸天及凡人之界限,及由此衍生之众生界次序称谓,故以天众、凡众结成此法递次之理。
Porāṇā panāhu sadevakanti devehi saddhiṃ avasesalokaṃ. Samārakanti mārena saddhiṃ avasesalokaṃ. Sabrahmakanti brahmehi saddhiṃ avasesalokaṃ. Evaṃ sabbepi tibhavūpage satte tīhākārehi tīsu padesu pakkhipitvā puna dvīhi padehi pariyādiyanto sassamaṇabrāhmaṇiṃ pajaṃ sadevamanussanti āha. Evaṃ pañcahipi padehi tena tenākārena tedhātukameva pariyādinnanti.
自古以来,天众即与诸天共住于凡界,魔众即与魔王同居于凡界,梵众则同住于梵天界。由此,三界之生灵以三种形态分布于三处地点,复又以二者称谓环绕,最终得知诸天、沙门婆罗门、众生三者相互环绕周旋。如此,于五处界域上,各以五称谓而分别验证其对象。
Sayaṃ abhiññā sacchikatvā pavedetīti ettha pana sayanti sāmaṃ aparaneyyo hutvā. Abhiññāti abhiññāya, adhikena ñāṇena ñatvāti attho. Sacchikatvāti paccakkhaṃ katvā, etena anumānādipaṭikkhepo kato hoti. Pavedetīti bodheti viññāpeti pakāseti.
所谓「自现神通而显现」,本此语境指示「自证神通后明说」。此处「自现」不可与「如实」互换,乃指通过深入知识完全认识之义。所谓「如实」者,谓亲证验证,故此推断及诸逻辑活动得以断除。所谓「明说」者,谓示知或启说。
So dhammaṃ deseti ādikalyāṇaṃ…pe… pariyosānakalyāṇanti so bhagavā sattesu kāruññataṃ paṭicca hitvāpi anuttaraṃ vivekasukhaṃ dhammaṃ deseti. Tañca kho appaṃ vā bahuṃ vā desento ādikalyāṇādippakārameva deseti. Ādimhipi, kalyāṇaṃ bhaddakaṃ anavajjameva katvā deseti, majjhepi, pariyosānepi, kalyāṇaṃ bhaddakaṃ anavajjameva katvā desetīti vuttaṃ hoti. Tattha atthi desanāya ādimajjhapariyosānaṃ, atthi sāsanassa. Desanāya tāva catuppadikāyapi gāthāya paṭhamapādo ādi nāma, tato dve majjhaṃ nāma, ante eko pariyosānaṃ nāma. Ekānusandhikassa suttassa nidānaṃ ādi, idamavocāti pariyosānaṃ, ubhinnamantarā majjhaṃ. Anekānusandhikassa suttassa paṭhamānusandhi ādi, ante anusandhi pariyosānaṃ, majjhe eko vā dve vā bahū vā majjhameva.
世尊宣说这法,其义起于初善,终于终善。世尊在众生中起慈愍之心,基于此利益众生,宣说无上寂灭安乐之法。其宣说或多或少,无非自初善开始之教法。所谓初善、善、善终,即指世尊于初、中、终皆将善、吉祥、纯净之法宣说。此中所谓宣说者,即是从初、中、终贯穿之教义,乃教法之全体。宣说中有四句颂,首句名为初句,次有两句为中句,末句名终句。一部简略经文,其名起于开首;另一部多线索经文,其首末两端分别为初句与终句,中间一或两句多句皆为中句。
Sāsanassa pana sīlasamādhivipassanā ādi nāma. Vuttampi cetaṃ – ‘‘ko cādi kusalānaṃ dhammānaṃ? Sīlañca suvisuddhaṃ diṭṭhi ca ujukā’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.369). ‘‘Atthi, bhikkhave, majjhimā paṭipadā tathāgatena abhisambuddhā’’ti evaṃ vutto pana ariyamaggo majjhaṃ nāma. Phalañceva nibbānañca pariyosānaṃ nāma. ‘‘Etadatthamidaṃ, brāhmaṇa, brahmacariyaṃ, etaṃ sāraṃ, etaṃ pariyosāna’’nti (ma. ni. 1.324) hi ettha phalaṃ pariyosānanti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Nibbānogadhaṃ hi, āvuso visākha, brahmacariyaṃ vussati, nibbānaparāyanaṃ nibbānapariyosāna’’nti (ma. ni. 1.466) ettha nibbānaṃ pariyosānanti vuttaṃ. Idha desanāya ādimajjhapariyosānaṃ adhippetaṃ. Bhagavā hi dhammaṃ desento ādimhi sīlaṃ dassetvā majjhe maggaṃ pariyosāne nibbānaṃ dasseti. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘so dhammaṃ deseti ādikalyāṇaṃ majjhekalyāṇaṃ pariyosānakalyāṇa’’nti. Tasmā aññopi dhammakathiko dhammaṃ kathento –
教法具戒、定、慧等,三学之首。经典中亦宣说:『何为善法之首?戒清净,见正直。』『比库啊,有中道修行,是如来所自觉之路。』此乃圣道之中也。其果即涅槃,为终极善果。『世尊教导婆罗门,戒法是其精髓,是终极善果。』『维萨迦啊,出家修行留存涅槃,涅槃是终极善果。』此涅槃谓终曲。此处宣说之法乃涵盖初、中、终。世尊宣说时示初者为戒,中者为道,终者为涅槃。故云「宣说此法,为初善、中善、终善」。故诸法师讲法亦依此说:
‘‘Ādimhi sīlaṃ dasseyya, majjhe maggaṃ vibhāvaye;
『于初当示戒,于中应明道;
Pariyosānamhi nibbānaṃ, esā kathikasaṇṭhitī’’ti.
于终证涅槃,是法师之立场。』
Sātthaṃ sabyañjananti yassa hi yāgubhattaitthipurisādivaṇṇanānissitā desanā hoti, na so sātthaṃ deseti. Bhagavā pana tathārūpaṃ desanaṃ pahāya catusatipaṭṭhānādinissitaṃ desanaṃ deseti. Tasmā sātthaṃ desetīti vuccati. Yassa pana desanā ekabyañjanādiyuttā vā sabbaniroṭṭhabyañjanā vā sabbavissaṭṭhasabbaniggahītabyañjanā vā, tassa damiḷakirātasavarādimilakkhūnaṃ bhāsā viya byañjanapāripūriyā abhāvato abyañjanā nāma desanā hoti. Bhagavā pana –
所谓生动传达其义,是指宣说依赖善知识、长老、正统人士等之注释,故称为义传。若宣说无生动表达之义,仅靠字面或全无明晰表达之语,如印度的土语或难通语言般,因缺乏明确表义无活泼义传,故不谓之义传。世尊则是:
‘‘Sithilaṃ dhanitañca dīgharassaṃ, garukaṃ lahukañca niggahītaṃ;
『言辞松缓且富饶,长短相间,有重有轻,言语严谨含蓄。』
Sambandhavavatthitaṃ vimuttaṃ, dasadhā byañjanabuddhiyā pabhedo’’ti.
与所依相应的解脱,称为通过十种分别识别细微差别而达成的解脱。
Evaṃ vuttaṃ dasavidhaṃ byañjanaṃ amakkhetvā paripuṇṇabyañjanameva katvā dhammaṃ deseti, tasmā sabyañjanaṃ dhammaṃ desetīti vuccati. Kevalaparipuṇṇanti ettha kevalanti sakalādhivacanaṃ. Paripuṇṇanti anūnādhikavacanaṃ. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti sakalaparipuṇṇameva deseti, ekadesanāpi aparipuṇṇā natthīti. Upanetabbaapanetabbassa abhāvato kevalaparipuṇṇanti veditabbaṃ. Parisuddhanti nirupakkilesaṃ. Yo hi imaṃ dhammadesanaṃ nissāya lābhaṃ vā sakkāraṃ vā labhissāmīti deseti, tassa aparisuddhā desanā hoti. Bhagavā pana lokāmisanirapekkho hitapharaṇena mettābhāvanāya muduhadayo ullumpanasabhāvasaṇṭhitena cittena deseti. Tasmā parisuddhaṃ dhammaṃ desetīti vuccati.
如此所说的十种分别,舍弃不具足者,仅以具足分别成就后,于此说法中阐述佛法。因此称为具足分别的佛法。所谓“唯具足”,此处“唯”指全面的说法;“具足”是指至少有较充分的措辞。此语意为所说佛法是完全具足的,虽有个别说法未尽具足。因无应提出或应舍弃者,故称为唯具足。所谓“清净”是指无染污者。若有人以此佛法教学可令获得利益与恭敬而宣说,即其说法非清净。世尊则以舍离世间利益的心,怀慈悲喜舍,心念柔和欢喜,依止圣道正法,于此教法庄严宣说。因此谓之清净佛法。
Brahmacariyaṃ pakāsetīti ettha panāyaṃ brahmacariya-saddo dāne veyyāvacce pañcasikkhāpadasīle appamaññāsu methunaviratiyaṃ sadārasantose vīriye uposathaṅgesu ariyamagge sāsaneti imesvatthesu dissati.
“示现梵行”者,此处梵行之词,依施、戒、出世间五戒、八戒中常持清净、不淫净、随喜随足及精进、守八关斋戒,宣示圣道法义,由此可见。
‘‘Kiṃ te vataṃ kiṃ pana brahmacariyaṃ,
“你说什么?究竟何谓梵行?
Kissa suciṇṇassa ayaṃ vipāko;
这是由什么干净清净之因而成就此果?
Iddhī jutī balavīriyūpapatti,
神通、施舍、力量、精勤的达成
Idañca te nāga, mahāvimānaṃ.
在此,如来教法中,是那龙,乃具广阔庄严的威仪。
Ahañca bhariyā ca manussaloke,
我及我的妻子,处于人间世间中,
Saddhā ubho dānapatī ahumhā;
二人皆有信心,亦是施主;
Opānabhūtaṃ me gharaṃ tadāsi,
当时我庄严的宅第被毁坏,
Santappitā samaṇabrāhmaṇā ca.
苦恼者为沙门与婆罗门,
Taṃ me vataṃ taṃ pana brahmacariyaṃ,
那正是我所经历的,那却是真正的梵行。
Tassa suciṇṇassa ayaṃ vipāko;
这是他净洁的果报;
Iddhī jutī balavīriyūpapatti,
是得神通、威力与精进之因;
Idañca me dhīra mahāvimāna’’nti. (jā. 2.17.1595);
这就是说,我这位智者拥有广大光辉的正智。」(《经集》卷二,第十七章第1595偈);
Imasmiñhi puṇṇakajātake dānaṃ brahmacariyanti vuttaṃ.
在此完整的布施生中,谓之梵行。
‘‘Kena pāṇi kāmadado, kena pāṇi madhussavo;
「以何手得欲界的财富,以何手得蜜食的甘美;
Kena te brahmacariyena, puññaṃ pāṇimhi ijjhati.
以何种梵行,使善行在手中滋生。」
Tena pāṇi kāmadado, tena pāṇi madhussavo;
于是该持的手,给予欲望;于是该持的手,给予嗜蜜。
Tena me brahmacariyena, puññaṃ pāṇimhi ijjhatī’’ti. (pe. va. 275,277);
以此清净的梵行,我愿献上功德于此双手。」(参见《比库戒别释》275、277页)
Imasmiṃ aṅkurapetavatthumhi veyyāvaccaṃ brahmacariyanti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Evaṃ, kho taṃ bhikkhave, tittiriyaṃ nāma brahmacariyaṃ ahosī’’ti (cūḷava. 311) imasmiṃ tittirajātake pañcasikkhāpadasīlaṃ brahmacariyanti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Taṃ kho pana me, pañcasikha, brahmacariyaṃ neva nibbidāya na virāgāya na nirodhāya…pe… yāvadeva brahmalokūpapattiyā’’ti (dī. ni. 2.329) imasmiṃ mahāgovindasutte catasso appamaññāyo brahmacariyanti vuttā. ‘‘Pare abrahmacārī bhavissanti, mayamettha brahmacārī bhavissāmā’’ti (ma. ni. 1.83) imasmiṃ sallekhasutte methunavirati brahmacariyanti vuttā.
在此,称为萌芽根本的事项中,令比库修习梵行被称为「特提利亚梵行」。『比库们啊,由此,称为忏悔梵行的名称为特提利亚梵行。』在此《特提利迦本生经》中,记载修习五戒梵行。『但于我,五戒梵行并非因厌离、不爱欲、不止息……如此直到入于梵天之处境。』(参见《大尼柯耶》二卷329页)在此《大果德玛经》中,有四种难降伏者被称为梵行者说:『之后必将出非梵行者,我等今当为梵行者。』(参见《中部尼柯耶》一卷83页)在此《沙利迦经》中,修持禁欲夫妻交合的梵行被称为梵行。
‘‘Mayañca bhariyā nātikkamāma,
『我不越妻子,
Amhe ca bhariyā nātikkamanti;
妻子也不逾我;
Aññatra tāhi brahmacariyaṃ carāma,
除了她,我们修持梵行,』
Tasmā hi amhaṃ daharā na mīyare’’ti. (jā. 1.4.97);
因此,年幼的我们不会死亡。
Mahādhammapālajātake sadārasantoso brahmacariyanti vutto. ‘‘Abhijānāmi kho panāhaṃ, sāriputta, caturaṅgasamannāgataṃ brahmacariyaṃ caritā, tapassī sudaṃ homī’’ti (ma. ni. 1.155) lomahaṃsanasutte vīriyaṃ brahmacariyanti vuttaṃ.
大法护诞生本生故事中,常称赞修行清净的善行者。曾说:“我实已知晓,沙利弗特,你修行具备四力的清净行,坚持苦行,诚以火焰自燃。”在天鹅经中,也称其为具足精进的梵行。
‘‘Hīnena brahmacariyena, khattiye upapajjati;
“低等的清净行,唯有贵族出身者受生;
Majjhimena ca devattaṃ, uttamena visujjhatī’’ti. (jā. 1.8.75);
中等的至天界;最高等则得清净。”
Evaṃ nimijātake attadamanavasena kato aṭṭhaṅgiko uposatho brahmacariyanti vutto. ‘‘Idaṃ kho pana me, pañcasikha, brahmacariyaṃ ekantanibbidāya virāgāya nirodhāya…pe… ayameva ariyo aṭṭhaṅgiko maggo’’ti (dī. ni. 2.329) mahāgovindasuttasmiṃyeva ariyamaggo brahmacariyanti vutto. ‘‘Tayidaṃ brahmacariyaṃ iddhañceva phītañca vitthārikaṃ bāhujaññaṃ puthubhūtaṃ yāva devamanussehi suppakāsita’’nti (dī. ni. 3.174) pāsādikasutte sikkhattayasaṅgahitaṃ sakalasāsanaṃ brahmacariyanti vuttaṃ. Imasmimpi ṭhāne idameva brahmacariyanti adhippetaṃ. Tasmā brahmacariyaṃ pakāsetīti so dhammaṃ deseti ādikalyāṇaṃ…pe… parisuddhaṃ. Evaṃ desento ca sikkhattayasaṅgahitaṃ sakalasāsanaṃ brahmacariyaṃ pakāsetīti evamettha attho daṭṭhabbo. Brahmacariyanti seṭṭhaṭṭhena brahmabhūtaṃ cariyaṃ. Brahmabhūtānaṃ vā buddhādīnaṃ cariyanti vuttaṃ hoti.
如此,在尼摩迦本生经中,曾称自己因断除自我制心,坚持八正道持戒修行。谓:“贤者啊,我的此清净行,因单纯厌倦、离欲、止灭,正是高贵八正道之路。”又在摩诃拘文达经中,称此为圣洁圣道的修行。又在普萨底经中,称持清净五戒,修行整个三藏教法。于此处,专注此清净行为第一。因此开示清净行法,为最初善法,纯净无垢。如此宣说,修习完整教法,宣说清净行法;其义即如是。清净行即最高清净的梵行。谓最高清净者,即佛等之所修行。
§191
191.Taṃ dhammanti taṃ vuttappakārasampadaṃ dhammaṃ. Suṇāti gahapati vāti kasmā paṭhamaṃ gahapatiṃ niddisati? Nihatamānattā, ussannattā ca. Yebhuyyena hi khattiyakulato pabbajitā jātiṃ nissāya mānaṃ karonti. Brāhmaṇakulā pabbajitā mante nissāya mānaṃ karonti. Hīnajaccakulā pabbajitā attano attano vijātitāya patiṭṭhātuṃ na sakkonti. Gahapatidārakā pana kacchehi sedaṃ muñcantehi piṭṭhiyā loṇaṃ pupphamānāya bhūmiṃ kasitvā tādisassa mānassa abhāvato nihatamānadappā honti. Te pabbajitvā mānaṃ vā dappaṃ vā akatvā yathābalaṃ sakalabuddhavacanaṃ uggahetvā vipassanāya kammaṃ karontā sakkonti arahatte patiṭṭhātuṃ. Itarehi ca kulehi nikkhamitvā pabbajitā nāma na bahukā, gahapatikāva bahukā. Iti nihatamānattā ussannattā ca paṭhamaṃ gahapatiṃ niddisatīti.
191. 此法即是真实宣说之法。居士闻之,何以首先贬低居士?乃因其谦虚与骄傲。贵族出家者,凭其族姓生起傲慢。婆罗门出家者,凭其种姓生起傲慢。低贱出家者,不足以凭自异姓站稳。居士之子,虽放弃一切,若自恃世间资财、地位、衣饰花香,内心无骄慢则谦卑。彼等出家,不生傲慢也不生自负,尽力承袭佛陀圣言,勤修内观,得阿拉汉所成之果而立身。其他各族出家者较少,此中贵族居士最多。因此,居士被责难者,乃由其骄慢与傲气也。
Aññatarasmiṃ vāti itaresaṃ vā kulānaṃ aññatarasmiṃ. Paccājātoti patijāto. Tathāgate saddhaṃ paṭilabhatīti parisuddhaṃ dhammaṃ sutvā dhammassāmimhi tathāgate – ‘‘sammāsambuddho vata so bhagavā’’ti saddhaṃ paṭilabhati. Iti paṭisañcikkhatīti evaṃ paccavekkhati. Sambādho gharāvāsoti sacepi saṭṭhihatthe ghare yojanasatantarepi vā dve jāyampatikā vasanti, tathāpi nesaṃ sakiñcanasapalibodhaṭṭhena gharāvāso sambādhoyeva. Rajopathoti rāgarajādīnaṃ uṭṭhānaṭṭhānanti mahāaṭṭhakathāyaṃ vuttaṃ. Āgamanapathotipi vadanti. Alagganaṭṭhena abbhokāso viyāti abbhokāso. Pabbajito hi kūṭāgāraratanapāsādadevavimānādīsu pihitadvāravātapānesu paṭicchannesu vasantopi neva laggati, na sajjati, na bajjhati. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘abbhokāso pabbajjā’’ti. Api ca sambādho gharāvāso kusalakiriyāya okāsābhāvato. Rajopatho asaṃvutasaṅkāraṭṭhānaṃ viya rajānaṃ kilesarajānaṃ sannipātaṭṭhānato. Abbhokāso pabbajjā kusalakiriyāya yathāsukhaṃ okāsasabbhāvato.
某一处风吹拂,是指某些家族中有风,或各家族中有风。‘出生’是指出世。当闻到清净法,在法的范围内认为如来“世尊实为正自觉者”,便生起信心。由此反观总结,即如此思惟。所谓“居所相连”,即使在六十余家庭、千余由旬之中若有两位出家者同住,其住所仍是相通的。所谓“尘途”,即染污之起伏处,依大论中说法是指。也有说是“来路道路”。所谓“与外界相连”是指通道连通;“通道”是通路。出家者虽住于屋舍、宝殿和天宫等被门窗等遮断的地方,外界气息阻隔,亦不会相通、结连、连接。因此有言:“通路即出家通路”。与此同时,“住所相连”是指善行因缘使得外通。所谓尘途,是指浊染、污秽等杂垢聚集之地,宛如恶浊之集合。通路即出家通路,因善行因缘而通畅无碍。
Nayidaṃsukaraṃ…pe… pabbajeyyanti etthāyaṃ saṅkhepakathā, yadetaṃ sikkhattayabrahmacariyaṃ ekampi divasaṃ akhaṇḍaṃ katvā carimakacittaṃ pāpetabbatāya ekantaparipuṇṇaṃ, caritabbaṃ ekadivasampi ca kilesamalena amalīnaṃ katvā carimakacittaṃ pāpetabbatāya ekantaparisuddhaṃ . Saṅkhalikhitanti likhitasaṅkhasadisaṃ dhotasaṅkhasappaṭibhāgaṃ caritabbaṃ. Idaṃ na sukaraṃ agāraṃ ajjhāvasatā agāramajjhe vasantena ekantaparipuṇṇaṃ…pe… carituṃ, yaṃnūnāhaṃ kese ca massuñca ohāretvā kasāyarasapītatāya kāsāyāni brahmacariyaṃ carantānaṃ anucchavikāni vatthāni acchādetvā paridahitvā agārasmā nikkhamitvā anagāriyaṃ pabbajeyyanti. Ettha ca yasmā agārassa hitaṃ kasivāṇijjādikammaṃ agāriyanti vuccati, tañca pabbajjāya natthi, tasmā pabbajjā anagāriyanti ñātabbā, taṃ anagāriyaṃ. Pabbajeyyanti paṭipajjeyyaṃ.
‘这并非易事……’此处略有总提,是指这三学的持守戒行,即使一天不中断、全心一意持守,为远离污秽者一道;即使只有一天,割除烦恼污垢,清净专心修持,也必须持守。所谓‘写数’是指以文字方式记录持戒,似衣物缝合之分割部分。此非易事,与众同住于正觉中静处禅院中,专心一意圆满持守……甚至放弃头发胡须,因染色如染浊染衣物,脱去后遮盖身体与衣物,离开住处出家,称为非居士出家。因出家人弃绝市井商贾等俗务,不从事世俗贸易,故无俗人之常事,称为“非居士”。应当认识此出家,方可得名‘出家’,应习修‘出家’。
§192-193
192-193.Appaṃ vāti sahassato heṭṭhā bhogakkhandho appo nāma hoti, sahassato paṭṭhāya mahā. Ābandhanaṭṭhena ñātiyeva ñātiparivaṭṭo. Sopi vīsatiyā heṭṭhā appo nāma hoti, vīsatiyā paṭṭhāya mahā. Pātimokkhasaṃvarasaṃvutoti pātimokkhasaṃvarena samannāgato. Ācāragocarasampannoti ācārena ceva gocarena ca sampanno. Aṇumattesūti appamattakesu. Vajjesūti akusaladhammesu. Bhayadassāvīti bhayadassī. Samādāyāti sammā ādiyitvā. Sikkhati sikkhāpadesūti sikkhāpadesu taṃ taṃ sikkhāpadaṃ samādiyitvā sikkhati. Ayamettha saṅkhepo, vitthāro pana visuddhimagge vutto.
“少量”如千分之一称为“少”,所对应之多为“多”。以绑缚为例,亲族中亲眷所围绕。相应地二十分之一为“少”,二十倍为“多”。所谓“具戒律”即具戒律约束,称“具戒律”。所谓“行为端正”即行为与对象皆正。所谓“极微”指极细微。所谓“惩戒”是针对不善法的惩罚。所谓“观念”,是指出于正当缘起的正当把握。所谓“学习”,是指依戒律教诲学习,逐一承受教诲而修持。以上皆为简略说,此后有关于净趣之详细论述。
Kāyakammavacīkammena samannāgato kusalena parisuddhājīvoti ettha ācāragocaraggahaṇeneva ca kusale kāyakammavacīkamme gahitepi yasmā idaṃ ājīvapārisuddhisīlaṃ nāma na ākāse vā rukkhaggādīsu vā uppajjati, kāyavacīdvāresuyeva pana uppajjati; tasmā tassa uppattidvāradassanatthaṃ kāyakammavacīkammena samannāgato kusalenāti vuttaṃ. Yasmā pana tena samannāgato, tasmā parisuddhājīvo. Samaṇamuṇḍikaputtasuttantavasena (ma. ni. 2.260) vā evaṃ vuttaṃ. Tattha hi ‘‘katame ca, thapati, kusalā sīlā? Kusalaṃ kāyakammaṃ, kusalaṃ vacīkammaṃ, parisuddhaṃ ājīvampi kho ahaṃ thapati sīlasmiṃ vadāmī’’ti vuttaṃ. Yasmā pana tena samannāgato, tasmā parisuddhājīvoti veditabbo.
具备身语意三业的善业正净生活,指行为对象及其接受皆符合善法、端正之生活。此生活洁净非生于虚空树木等处,而在身语的门户处显现;故称“具备身语之善”,即身体与语言行为俱善。因具此缘故,称为“正净生活”。如《沙门剃头子经》中亦云,世尊愿言:‘何等才称为端正戒体?即善身业、善语业,正净的生活习惯,我称其为戒体。’由此可知,具备此三者即为端正戒体。
Sīlasampannoti brahmajāle vuttena tividhena sīlena samannāgato hoti. Indriyesu guttadvāroti manacchaṭṭhesu indriyesu pihitadvāro hoti. Satisampajaññena samannāgatoti abhikkante paṭikkantetiādīsu sattasu ṭhānesu satiyā ceva sampajaññena ca samannāgato hoti. Santuṭṭhoti catūsu paccayesu tividhena santosena santuṭṭho hoti.
所谓具戒律者,依《梵网经》说法,乃具三种戒法。所谓“身根紧闭”,如同心门紧闭,五根感官门关闭。所谓“具正念正知”,谓在遇诸境界时,心不退转,正念与正知俱足。所谓“满足”,是指于四种因缘俱足身心安乐满足。
Cūḷasīlavaṇṇanā小戒义注
§194-211
194-211. Evaṃ mātikaṃ nikkhipitvā anupubbena bhājento ‘‘kathañca, mahārāja, bhikkhu sīlasampanno hotī’’tiādimāha. Tattha idampissa hoti sīlasminti idampi assa bhikkhuno pāṇātipātā veramaṇi sīlasmiṃ ekaṃ sīlaṃ hotīti attho. Paccattavacanatthe vā etaṃ bhummaṃ. Mahāaṭṭhakathāyañhi idampi tassa samaṇassa sīlanti ayameva attho vutto. Sesaṃ brahmajāle vuttanayeneva veditabbaṃ. Idamassa hoti sīlasminti idaṃ assa sīlaṃ hotīti attho.
“194-211。”如此陈列纲目,逐渐细讲“如何成为具戒律的比库”等语。此处“此处所称戒律”是指该比库所持的“不杀生”戒律,是比库所守持的一戒。此可视为字面意思。大论中亦有同义解释。其他类似《梵网经》中说戒律之义,由此可知当知“具戒律”是指所持此戒律;此处“此处所称戒律”就是指该戒律。
§212
212.Na kutoci bhayaṃ samanupassati, yadidaṃ sīlasaṃvaratoti yāni asaṃvaramūlakāni bhayāni uppajjanti, tesu yaṃ idaṃ bhayaṃ sīlasaṃvarato bhaveyya, taṃ kutoci ekasaṃvaratopi na samanupassati. Kasmā? Saṃvarato asaṃvaramūlakassa bhayassa abhāvā. Muddhābhisittoti yathāvidhānavihitena khattiyābhisekena muddhani avasitto. Yadidaṃ paccatthikatoti yaṃ kutoci ekapaccatthikatopi bhayaṃ bhaveyya, taṃ na samanupassati. Kasmā? Yasmā nihatapaccāmitto. Ajjhattanti niyakajjhattaṃ, attano santāneti attho. Anavajjasukhanti anavajjaṃ aninditaṃ kusalaṃ sīlapadaṭṭhānehi avippaṭisārapāmojjapītipassaddhidhammehi pariggahitaṃ kāyikacetasikasukhaṃ paṭisaṃvedeti. Evaṃ kho, mahārāja, bhikkhu sīlasampanno hotīti evaṃ nirantaraṃ vitthāretvā dassitena tividhena sīlena samannāgato bhikkhu sīlasampanno nāma hotīti sīlakathaṃ niṭṭhāpesi.
212.从何处观察不生怖畏者,此谓戒律持守。戒律持守者当会生起的恐怖,即那些由不持戒而生的根本恐怖,戒律持守者绝不在任何处所生起此类恐怖。何以故?因持守戒律者,缺无不持戒根本恐怖。如同国王正式加冕,头戴冠冕,已坐于宝座上。由此即为紧要因缘,令恐怖不能从任何一个紧要因缘处生起,因此戒律持守者不生恐怖。何以故?因已被镇息熄灭,没有后继缘故。内在者具足良好保障,是自身安乐。持守无缺戒律,以戒为基础,调伏诸染净除,心无逆反,欢喜清净,因此感受身心欢喜乐。因此,尊者,持戒完善之比库,经过广泛细致解说,以三种戒律全备者,谓持戒完善,其持戒述说如何圆满成立。
Indriyasaṃvarakathā根律仪论
§213
213. Indriyesu guttadvārabhājanīye cakkhunā rūpanti ayaṃ cakkhusaddo katthaci buddhacakkhumhi vattati, yathāha – ‘‘buddhacakkhunā lokaṃ volokesī’’ti (mahāva. 9). Katthaci sabbaññutaññāṇasaṅkhāte samantacakkhumhi, yathāha – ‘‘tathūpamaṃ dhammamayaṃ, sumedha, pāsādamāruyha samantacakkhū’’ti (mahāva. 8). Katthaci dhammacakkhumhi ‘‘virajaṃ vītamalaṃ dhammacakkhuṃ udapādī’’ti (mahāva. 16) hi ettha ariyamaggattayapaññā. ‘‘Cakkhuṃ udapādi ñāṇaṃ udapādī’’ti (mahāva. 15) ettha pubbenivāsādiñāṇaṃ paññācakkhūti vuccati. ‘‘Dibbena cakkhunā’’ti (ma. ni. 1.284) āgataṭṭhānesu dibbacakkhumhi vattati. ‘‘Cakkhuñca paṭicca rūpe cā’’ti ettha pasādacakkhumhi vattati. Idha panāyaṃ pasādacakkhuvohārena cakkhuviññāṇe vattati, tasmā cakkhuviññāṇena rūpaṃ disvāti ayametthattho. Sesapadesu yaṃ vattabbaṃ siyā, taṃ sabbaṃ visuddhimagge vuttaṃ. Abyāsekasukhanti kilesabyāsekavirahitattā abyāsekaṃ asammissaṃ parisuddhaṃ adhicittasukhaṃ paṭisaṃvedetīti.
213.于六根中,眼识能断门户,眼能识色。此色眼声响,或生于佛眼见。如尊大比库尼论所说:「以佛眼观察世间」。于全知全能明了中,周知世间之色,如经大论云:「此法犹如眼,聪慧者登楼,遍观四方」。于法眼中,亦有无垢清净法眼发出,此为圣道三解智。经中云:「眼随无染清净法眼而生」。又称:「以神通妙眼观察诸境」。以到来的地点论中,即称此为神通眼。又曰:「眼识缘色缘起」。此即称为清净眼识。此处于清净如净观眼力所生之眼识故,以眼识而见色,谓此旨趣。于其余境,须依正净之道理说完备一切。无染快乐,乃无染去染之状态,非染污状态。藉此无染不染、安乐定心,显现内在清净之心而感受身心安乐。
Satisampajaññakathā念正知论
§214
214. Satisampajaññabhājanīyamhi abhikkante paṭikkanteti ettha tāva abhikkantaṃ vuccati gamanaṃ, paṭikkantaṃ nivattanaṃ, tadubhayampi catūsu iriyāpathesu labbhati. Gamane tāva purato kāyaṃ abhiharanto abhikkamati nāma . Paṭinivattanto paṭikkamati nāma. Ṭhānepi ṭhitakova kāyaṃ purato onāmento abhikkamati nāma, pacchato apanāmento paṭikkamati nāma. Nisajjāya nisinnakova āsanassa purimaaṅgābhimukho saṃsaranto abhikkamati nāma, pacchimaaṅgapadesaṃ paccāsaṃsaranto paṭikkamati nāma. Nipajjanepi eseva nayo.
214.于念力与正知调伏诸根处,称为进退亦谓之前行与返回。此四路行住动作皆具足。向前行者,将身体先伸出,为前行。向后退者,则退返回。立定不动者,如立住,向前稍伸以行,谓前行;向后稍退以行,为返回。坐姿亦然,坐上身向前转动谓前行,向后转动谓返回。俯身亦同。
Sampajānakārī hotīti sampajaññena sabbakiccakārī. Sampajaññameva vā kārī. So hi abhikkantādīsu sampajaññaṃ karoteva. Na katthaci sampajaññavirahito hoti. Tattha sātthakasampajaññaṃ, sappāyasampajaññaṃ, gocarasampajaññaṃ asammohasampajaññanti catubbidhaṃ sampajaññaṃ. Tattha abhikkamanacitte uppanne cittavaseneva agantvā – ‘‘kinnu me ettha gatena attho atthi natthī’’ti atthānatthaṃ pariggahetvā atthapariggaṇhanaṃ sātthakasampajaññaṃ. Tattha ca atthoti cetiyadassanabodhisaṅghatheraasubhadassanādivasena dhammato vuḍḍhi. Cetiyaṃ vā bodhiṃ vā disvāpi hi buddhārammaṇaṃ, saṅghadassanena saṅghārammaṇaṃ, pītiṃ uppādetvā tadeva khayavayato sammasanto arahattaṃ pāpuṇāti. There disvā tesaṃ ovāde patiṭṭhāya, asubhaṃ disvā tattha paṭhamajjhānaṃ uppādetvā tadeva khayavayato sammasanto arahattaṃ pāpuṇāti. Tasmā etesaṃ dassanaṃ sātthakanti vuttaṃ. Keci pana āmisatopi vuḍḍhi atthoyeva, taṃ nissāya brahmacariyānuggahāya paṭipannattāti vadanti.
此为具正知者,谓以正知调伏诸所作事。仅以正知作事。于进退起止时,必作正知,绝不离正知。有四种正知:为利益者正知,为清净者正知,为所有者正知,为不迷者正知。于前出行者心生,意识犹客来般,思惟此行有何意,有益无益,此即为利益正知。然于利益之义,因经典诸法缘觉说,生增进法理。于佛塔、觉处等,见佛陀圣迹、僧群圣迹,生大喜悦,因喜灭无明,获得阿拉汉果。又见不净境界,生初禅,因摄摄灭烦恼,而证阿拉汉果。此示见皆称为利益。部分虽为尘世俗利,为方便持戒修行之资,故称此练习为利益正知。
Tasmiṃ pana gamane sappāyāsappāyaṃ pariggahetvā sappāyapariggaṇhanaṃ sappāyasampajaññaṃ. Seyyathidaṃ – cetiyadassanaṃ tāva sātthakaṃ, sace pana cetiyassa mahāpūjāya dasadvādasayojanantare parisā sannipatanti, attano vibhavānurūpā itthiyopi purisāpi alaṅkatapaṭiyattā cittakammarūpakāni viya sañcaranti. Tatra cassa iṭṭhe ārammaṇe lobho hoti, aniṭṭhe paṭigho, asamapekkhane moho uppajjati, kāyasaṃsaggāpattiṃ vā āpajjati. Jīvitabrahmacariyānaṃ vā antarāyo hoti, evaṃ taṃ ṭhānaṃ asappāyaṃ hoti. Vuttappakāraantarāyābhāve sappāyaṃ. Bodhidassanepi eseva nayo. Saṅghadassanampi sātthaṃ. Sace pana antogāme mahāmaṇḍapaṃ kāretvā sabbarattiṃ dhammassavanaṃ karontesu manussesu vuttappakāreneva janasannipāto ceva antarāyo ca hoti, evaṃ taṃ ṭhānaṃ asappāyaṃ hoti. Antarāyābhāve sappāyaṃ. Mahāparisaparivārānaṃ therānaṃ dassanepi eseva nayo.
于是行进中,于方便与不方便之间,称为方便正知。譬如见佛塔,若有大供养会众集聚于塔附近,男女众生携带装饰品如意宝,随行类似心业,产生贪心、瞋恨、不平等无知、产生体触,障碍持戒生活,故此处为不方便。若无障碍,则为方便。见觉处亦同。见僧众集聚讲法,若节奏和谐无障碍,为方便。反之若有扰乱、吵闹,便是不方便。见长老出入僧众,若顺利无障碍,为方便。若阻碍,不方便。长者与大长老诸多僧众集会讲法,亦同。
Asubhadassanampi sātthaṃ, tadatthadīpanatthañca idaṃ vatthu – eko kira daharabhikkhu sāmaṇeraṃ gahetvā dantakaṭṭhatthāya gato. Sāmaṇero maggā okkamitvā purato gacchanto asubhaṃ disvā paṭhamajjhānaṃ nibbattetvā tadeva pādakaṃ katvā saṅkhāre sammasanto tīṇi phalāni sacchikatvā uparimaggatthāya kammaṭṭhānaṃ pariggahetvā aṭṭhāsi. Daharo taṃ apassanto sāmaṇerāti pakkosi. So ‘mayā pabbajitadivasato paṭṭhāya bhikkhunā saddhiṃ dve kathā nāma na kathitapubbā. Aññasmimpi divase upari visesaṃ nibbattessāmī’ti cintetvā kiṃ, bhanteti paṭivacanamadāsi. ‘Ehī’ti ca vutte ekavacaneneva āgantvā, ‘bhante, iminā tāva maggeneva gantvā mayā ṭhitokāse muhuttaṃ puratthābhimukho ṭhatvā olokethā’ti āha. So tathā katvā tena pattavisesameva pāpuṇi. Evaṃ ekaṃ asubhaṃ dvinnaṃ janānaṃ atthāya jātaṃ. Evaṃ sātthampi panetaṃ purisassa mātugāmāsubhaṃ asappāyaṃ, mātugāmassa ca purisāsubhaṃ asappāyaṃ, sabhāgameva sappāyanti evaṃ sappāyapariggaṇhanaṃ sappāyasampajaññaṃ nāma.
不净见亦与利益相符。例有一童比库尼,刚刚受戒,为磨牙而行。此比库尼弃绝路径,前行时见不净境,生初禅涅槃,生定力,证三果。童者不识悲悯此比库尼,且嗤笑之。彼思:“自出家第一日,未与比库尼同语两言。今日或得殊胜果,故向彼语问。”遂赴彼处,约定少顷面朝前立观。不久获一殊胜果。如此一份不净见,利众生二人。由此不净乃为男子及妇女之不利,妇女相对于男子不利,男子相对于妇女不利。于堂会则方便,故便利之名为方便正知。
Evaṃ pariggahitasātthakasappāyassa pana aṭṭhatiṃsāya kammaṭṭhānesu attano cittaruciyaṃ kammaṭṭhānasaṅkhātaṃ gocaraṃ uggahetvā bhikkhācāragocare taṃ gahetvāva gamanaṃ gocarasampajaññaṃ nāma. Tassāvibhāvanatthaṃ idaṃ catukkaṃ veditabbaṃ –
如是,对于已确立利行法门的三十三种修行处,修行者在自心欢喜的修行场所上确立自身修行所专属的境界,进而摄取于比库行持之境界,此谓行持境界的确立。为了解释此义,应当辨知以下四种情形──
Idhekacco bhikkhu harati, na paccāharati; ekacco paccāharati, na harati; ekacco pana neva harati, na paccāharati; ekacco harati ca, paccāharati cāti. Tattha yo bhikkhu divasaṃ caṅkamena nisajjāya ca āvaraṇīyehi dhammehi cittaṃ parisodhetvā tathā rattiyā paṭhamayāme, majjhimayāme seyyaṃ kappetvā pacchimayāmepi nisajjacaṅkamehi vītināmetvā pageva cetiyaṅgaṇabodhiyaṅgaṇavattaṃ katvā bodhirukkhe udakaṃ āsiñcitvā, pānīyaṃ paribhojanīyaṃ paccupaṭṭhapetvā ācariyupajjhāyavattādīni sabbāni khandhakavattāni samādāya vattati. So sarīraparikammaṃ katvā senāsanaṃ pavisitvā dve tayo pallaṅke usumaṃ gāhāpento kammaṭṭhānaṃ anuyuñjitvā bhikkhācāravelāyaṃ uṭṭhahitvā kammaṭṭhānasīseneva pattacīvaramādāya senāsanato nikkhamitvā kammaṭṭhānaṃ manasikarontova cetiyaṅgaṇaṃ gantvā, sace buddhānussatikammaṭṭhānaṃ hoti, taṃ avissajjetvāva cetiyaṅgaṇaṃ pavisati. Aññaṃ ce kammaṭṭhānaṃ hoti, sopānamūle ṭhatvā hatthena gahitabhaṇḍaṃ viya taṃ ṭhapetvā buddhārammaṇaṃ pītiṃ gahetvā cetiyaṅgaṇaṃ āruyha, mahantaṃ cetiyaṃ ce, tikkhattuṃ padakkhiṇaṃ katvā catūsu ṭhānesu vanditabbaṃ. Khuddakaṃ cetiyaṃ ce, tatheva padakkhiṇaṃ katvā aṭṭhasu ṭhānesu vanditabbaṃ. Cetiyaṃ vanditvā bodhiyaṅgaṇaṃ pattenāpi buddhassa bhagavato sammukhā viya nipaccākāraṃ dassetvā bodhi vanditabbā. So evaṃ cetiyañca bodhiñca vanditvā paṭisāmitaṭṭhānaṃ gantvā paṭisāmitabhaṇḍakaṃ hatthena gaṇhanto viya nikkhittakammaṭṭhānaṃ gahetvā gāmasamīpe kammaṭṭhānasīseneva cīvaraṃ pārupitvā gāmaṃ piṇḍāya pavisati. Atha naṃ manussā disvā ayyo no āgatoti paccuggantvā pattaṃ gahetvā āsanasālāya vā gehe vā nisīdāpetvā yāguṃ datvā yāva bhattaṃ na niṭṭhāti, tāva pāde dhovitvā telena makkhetvā purato te nisīditvā pañhaṃ vā pucchanti, dhammaṃ vā sotukāmā honti. Sacepi na kathāpenti, janasaṅgahatthaṃ dhammakathā nāma kātabbā yevāti aṭṭhakathācariyā vadanti. Dhammakathā hi kammaṭṭhānavinimuttā nāma natthi, tasmā kammaṭṭhānasīseneva dhammakathaṃ kathetvā kammaṭṭhānasīseneva āhāraṃ paribhuñjitvā anumodanaṃ katvā nivattiyamānehipi manussehi anugatova gāmato nikkhamitvā tattha te nivattetvā maggaṃ paṭipajjati.
其一,有的比库修行时摄取(境界)而不舍弃;有的舍弃而不摄取;有的既不摄取亦不舍弃;有的则摄取与舍弃并行。这里,白昼行脚与坐禅,修止观以净其心;夜晚打第一个、第二个并将第三个卧处设立好,远离撩扰,诸如禅林场所、觉树、施水。设置饮食等供养诸事,听从导师及长老们,遵守戒律规章而行。修过身体净行,进入宿处,依三床安稳修息,修持所择修行处,待比库行持时间,起身摄取修行处,携着衣钵,出宿处后,怀念佛境界往禅林;若其有憶佛修行处,则不舍离而入禅林。若持其他修行处,则立于台阶根处,手托所需物,如手持器具般放置,怀喜佛之身相,登上禅林,若禅林宏大,即绕三圈礼敬四处;若小,则绕三圈礼敬八处。礼敬禅林后,于觉树下如佛陀面前卑身礼礼敬觉树。如此礼敬禅林与觉树后,往打坐处,手持坐垫,取衣覆之,入乡乞食。乡人见之,迎来请坐于舍或室,施以食物;期间洗足,搽油,坐于前方,或问法或听法。若不问,辅以大众请法,即谓传经说法。修行处断遣诸烦恼,因此以修行处坐垫说法,取用坐垫进食,获教赞叹,归乡时住处退还坐垫,循道而行。
Atha naṃ puretaraṃ nikkhamitvā bahigāme katabhattakiccā sāmaṇeradaharabhikkhū disvā paccuggantvā pattacīvaramassa gaṇhanti. Porāṇakabhikkhū kira amhākaṃ upajjhāyo ācariyoti na mukhaṃ oloketvā vattaṃ karonti, sampattaparicchedeneva karonti. Te taṃ pucchanti – ‘‘bhante, ete manussā tumhākaṃ kiṃ honti, mātipakkhato sambandhā pitipakkhato’’ti? Kiṃ disvā pucchathāti? Tumhesu etesaṃ pemaṃ bahumānanti. Āvuso, yaṃ mātāpitūhipi dukkaraṃ, taṃ ete amhākaṃ karonti, pattacīvarampi no etesaṃ santakameva, etesaṃ ānubhāvena neva bhaye bhayaṃ, na chātake chātakaṃ jānāma. Īdisā nāma amhākaṃ upakārino natthīti tesaṃ guṇe kathento gacchati. Ayaṃ vuccati harati na paccāharatīti.
后来从前往乡中,见乡村作饭的沙玛内、比库,前来迎接,取坐垫衣钵。旧比库谓吾辈乃导师与师,未曾回首,仅作修行,专注持戒。后问曰,诸比库,众生于尔为何?为父为母?见此问爱多者,谓诸比库如父母,养育及护持者。比喻说,父母难事,尔众亦然;坐垫衣钵不过是养护,而无恐畏心,犹如布谷鸟不害布谷鸟。此即所谓摄取不舍弃。
Yassa pana pageva vuttappakāraṃ vattapaṭipattiṃ karontassa kammajatejodhātu pajjalati, anupādinnakaṃ muñcitvā upādinnakaṃ gaṇhāti, sarīrato sedā muñcanti, kammaṭṭhānaṃ vīthiṃ nārohati, so pageva pattacīvaramādāya vegasā cetiyaṃ vanditvā gorūpānaṃ nikkhamanavelāyameva gāmaṃ yāgubhikkhāya pavisitvā yāguṃ labhitvā āsanasālaṃ gantvā pivati, athassa dvattikkhattuṃ ajjhoharaṇamatteneva kammajatejodhātu upādinnakaṃ muñcitvā anupādinnakaṃ gaṇhāti, ghaṭasatena nhāto viya tejodhātu pariḷāhanibbānaṃ patvā kammaṭṭhānasīsena yāguṃ paribhuñjitvā pattañca mukhañca dhovitvā antarābhatte kammaṭṭhānaṃ manasikatvā avasesaṭṭhāne piṇḍāya caritvā kammaṭṭhānasīsena āhārañca paribhuñjitvā tato paṭṭhāya poṅkhānupoṅkhaṃ upaṭṭhahamānaṃ kammaṭṭhānaṃ gahetvā āgacchati, ayaṃ vuccati paccāharatina haratīti. Edisā ca bhikkhū yāguṃ pivitvā vipassanaṃ ārabhitvā buddhasāsane arahattappattā nāma gaṇanapathaṃ vītivattā. Sīhaḷadīpeyeva tesu tesu gāmesu āsanasālāyaṃ vā na taṃ āsanamatthi, yattha yāguṃ pivitvā arahattappattā bhikkhū natthīti.
持戒修净行者,煽发业火之灵焰,弃恶取善,身离贪染,身心自由,修行道途不退。乃时,取衣钵,急速礼敬塔林,于众牛出徙之际入乡乞食,得食后入坐厅饮水,于座前二十二次施放内心之火,熏浴心境如滴水洗罐,礼敬坐垫修行处,洒水涤颜,打扫修行处。随喜焚香、阵阵风扇,入乡乞食。此谓舍弃与摄取。正如此,饮食后勤修内观,发菩提心,于佛教法中成就阿拉汉资格,如斯事迹遍及印度诸乡,诸乡舍置座厅,谓其中饮食后必成阿拉汉比库无一虚设。
Yo pana pamādavihārī hoti, nikkhittadhuro sabbavattāni bhinditvā pañcavidhacetokhīlavinibandhacitto viharanto – ‘‘kammaṭṭhānaṃ nāma atthī’’ti saññampi akatvā gāmaṃ piṇḍāya pavisitvā ananulomikena gihisaṃsaggena saṃsaṭṭho caritvā ca bhuñjitvā ca tuccho nikkhamati, ayaṃ vuccati neva harati na paccāharatīti.
然若有比库放逸懈怠,置坐处舍,断五种破心之习,内心杂乱流溢,「修行处无用」之心滋长,无所觉知,随乡乞食,与非正行俗人交游,生活凋敝,终无成就。此谓既不摄取亦不舍弃。
Yo panāyaṃ – ‘‘harati ca paccāharati cā’’ti vutto, so gatapaccāgatavattavaseneva veditabbo. Attakāmā hi kulaputtā sāsane pabbajitvā dasapi vīsampi tiṃsampi cattālīsampi paññāsampi satampi ekato vasantā katikavattaṃ katvā viharanti, ‘‘āvuso, tumhe na iṇaṭṭā, na bhayaṭṭā, na jīvikāpakatā pabbajitā, dukkhā muccitukāmā panettha pabbajitā, tasmā gamane uppannakilesaṃ gamaneyeva niggaṇhatha, tathā ṭhāne, nisajjāya, sayane uppannakilesaṃ sayaneva niggaṇhathā’’ti.
又有说摄取与舍弃俱行者者,谓其进退来往具足,恰若互为依托。世尊教法中,在家子如父母般奉行教誡,常住三十、四十、五十年,依季节修行。谓曰,诸比库,当无恐惧无害怕,无生计忧虑,乃以解脱苦恼为趣,如是行脚时,生起染污应当随处斩除,坐卧亦复如是应当随处斩除。
Te evaṃ katikavattaṃ katvā bhikkhācāraṃ gacchantā aḍḍhausabhausabhaaḍḍhagāvutagāvutantaresu pāsāṇā honti, tāya saññāya kammaṭṭhānaṃ manasikarontāva gacchanti. Sace kassaci gamane kileso uppajjati, tattheva naṃ niggaṇhāti. Tathā asakkonto tiṭṭhati, athassa pacchato āgacchantopi tiṭṭhati. So ‘‘ayaṃ bhikkhu tuyhaṃ uppannavitakkaṃ jānāti, ananucchavikaṃ te eta’’nti attānaṃ paṭicodetvā vipassanaṃ vaḍḍhetvā tattheva ariyabhūmiṃ okkamati; tathā asakkonto nisīdati. Athassa pacchato āgacchantopi nisīdatīti soyeva nayo. Ariyabhūmiṃ okkamituṃ asakkontopi taṃ kilesaṃ vikkhambhetvā kammaṭṭhānaṃ manasikarontova gacchati, na kammaṭṭhānavippayuttena cittena pādaṃ uddharati, uddharati ce, paṭinivattitvā purimapadesaṃyeva eti. Ālindakavāsī mahāphussadevatthero viya.
他们于是完成一周期而行,去修习比库生活,居住于市镇、乡村、集市、矿场、村寨等地,那里有石头,他们以此作为念处,专注修习业处。若有人外出途中生起烦恼,当即不放任,不被其所缠缚。若不能制止,则止步不前,且其身后来人近处来临时,亦止步不进。此人心自警觉,知道‘此比库你懂得烦恼生起,不该放任’,由此自励,增长内观,于彼地进入圣地;反之不能者则止步坐下。其后有来者近来时,也坐下以示同道。即使不能进入圣地,也如同放下烦恼、专心念业处那样前行,不以离开念处的心意起脚前进,若起脚则退回原处,若退回亦如前。此境界有如依止生石的住者——大通达天长老。
So kira ekūnavīsativassāni gatapaccāgatavattaṃ pūrento eva vihāsi, manussāpi addasaṃsu antarāmagge kasantā ca vapantā ca maddantā ca kammāni ca karontā theraṃ tathāgacchantaṃ disvā – ‘‘ayaṃ thero punappunaṃ nivattitvā gacchati, kinnu kho maggamūḷho, udāhu kiñci pamuṭṭho’’ti samullapanti. So taṃ anādiyitvā kammaṭṭhānayuttacitteneva samaṇadhammaṃ karonto vīsativassabbhantare arahattaṃ pāpuṇi, arahattappattadivase cassa caṅkamanakoṭiyaṃ adhivatthā devatā aṅgulīhi dīpaṃ ujjāletvā aṭṭhāsi. Cattāropi mahārājāno sakko ca devānamindo brahmā ca sahampati upaṭṭhānaṃ agamaṃsu. Tañca obhāsaṃ disvā vanavāsī mahātissatthero taṃ dutiyadivase pucchi – ‘‘rattibhāge āyasmato santike obhāso ahosi, kiṃ so obhāso’’ti? Thero vikkhepaṃ karonto obhāso nāma dīpobhāsopi hoti, maṇiobhāsopīti evamādimāha. Tato ‘paṭicchādetha tumhe’ti nibaddho ‘āmā’ti paṭijānitvā ārocesi. Kāḷavallimaṇḍapavāsī mahānāgatthero viya ca.
这位如同暮暮朝朝修行完成行者般的住者,曾历二十九载不断坚持,人在中途曾见此长老过往往来,忙碌做各种工作——修建房屋、担水施物。目睹此景的人们见他反复往返,便议论说‘这长老常反复行走,莫非迷途,或者稍有迟钝?’然而他无所理会,心不离候业境界修习,二十年间遂获阿拉汉果。得果之日,他以手指点燃灯火站立,四大帝王、萨咖天帝及梵天等天众来侍奉。次日,住于山林的大智慧长老见这光明便问‘夜半时分,在长老面前为何有光?此光为何意?’该长老不以为意,解释此光乃灯火之光,非奇异光明。随后示意‘你们遮蔽此光’理解‘嗯’而允许。他如同居住黑波流罗祠堂的大领袖长老一样行持。
Sopi kira gatapaccāgatavattaṃ pūrento – paṭhamaṃ tāva bhagavato mahāpadhānaṃ pūjessāmīti sattavassāni ṭhānacaṅkamameva adhiṭṭhāsi. Puna soḷasavassāni gatapaccāgatavattaṃ pūretvā arahattaṃ pāpuṇi. So kammaṭṭhānayutteneva cittena pādaṃ uddharanto, viyuttena uddhaṭe paṭinivattento gāmasamīpaṃ gantvā ‘‘gāvī nu pabbajito nū’’ti āsaṅkanīyapadese ṭhatvā cīvaraṃ pārupitvā kacchakantarato udakena pattaṃ dhovitvā udakagaṇḍūsaṃ karoti. Kiṃ kāraṇā? Mā me bhikkhaṃ dātuṃ vā vandituṃ vā āgate manusse ‘dīghāyukā hothā’ti vacanamattenāpi kammaṭṭhānavikkhepo ahosīti. ‘‘Ajja, bhante, katimī’’ti divasaṃ vā bhikkhugaṇanaṃ vā pañhaṃ vā pucchito pana udakaṃ gilitvā āroceti. Sace divasādīni pucchakā na honti, nikkhamanavelāya gāmadvāre niṭṭhubhitvāva yāti.
他当初完成行者往复如是行,最初曾发愿为世尊广宣大教积七年,专注行踏地方中而坚住。又历十六年完成往复行者,得证阿拉汉果。于是继续念业境界,起脚前进,未心生放逸,退转时亦如前往村边而立,担衣过水隔沟洗头,清净身心。何因?因他思惟‘我来人间非为乞求布施或受礼敬,仅因有心念业境界的疑惑而生动摇。’“今、尊者,多少每日有僧众?”有人问,他饮水后回答。若无人回答,则出门时止步村口如有人静立不动。
Kalambatitthavihāre vassūpagatā paññāsabhikkhū viya ca. Te kira āsaḷhipuṇṇamāyaṃ katikavattaṃ akaṃsu – ‘‘arahattaṃ appatvā aññamaññaṃ nālapissāmā’’ti, gāmañca piṇḍāya pavisantā udakagaṇḍūsaṃ katvā pavisiṃsu. Divasādīsu pucchitesu vuttanayeneva paṭipajjiṃsu. Tattha manussā niṭṭhubhanaṃ disvā jāniṃsu – ‘‘ajjeko āgato, ajja dve’’ti. Evañca cintesuṃ – ‘‘kinnu kho ete amhehiyeva saddhiṃ na sallapanti, udāhu aññamaññampi. Sace aññamaññampi na sallapanti, addhā vivādajātā bhavissanti. Etha ne aññamaññaṃ khamāpessāmā’’ti, sabbe vihāraṃ gantvā paññāsāya bhikkhūsu dvepi bhikkhū ekokāse nāddasaṃsu. Tato yo tesu cakkhumā puriso, so āha – ‘‘na bho kalahakārakānaṃ vasanokāso īdiso hoti, susammaṭṭhaṃ cetiyaṅgaṇabodhiyaṅgaṇaṃ, sunikkhittā sammajjaniyo, sūpaṭṭhapitaṃ pānīyaṃ paribhojanīya’’nti, te tatova nivattā. Tepi bhikkhū anto temāseyeva arahattaṃ patvā mahāpavāraṇāya visuddhipavāraṇaṃ pavāresuṃ.
在迦兰巴陀寺中,雨季来时约五十比库齐聚。于是于八月望日完成周期,把证阿拉汉果之事互相告知,入城乞食,复洗水净身后入寺。每日问答如是实行。人见他们停步不前,便知‘一人已来,一日两人也来。’众人于是思忖‘为何他们不彼此交谈?难道相互之间不言语?若彼此无言语,则定生争执。此时我们应互相宽恕。’众比库遍访各处,发现智慧者于两人同处一室时言道――‘他们非争吵者,而是以适当方式修习尊圣处所与觉知觉悟之道,恭敬守持饮食器皿—手洗清净,坐姿端正。’那些比库听闻后,于雨季中断获阿拉汉,并在伟大僧众大会时宣布清净戒律。
Evaṃ kāḷavallimaṇḍapavāsī mahānāgatthero viya, kalambatitthavihāre vassūpagatabhikkhū viya ca kammaṭṭhānayutteneva cittena pādaṃ uddharanto gāmasamīpaṃ gantvā udakagaṇḍūsaṃ katvā vīthiyo sallakkhetvā, yattha surāsoṇḍadhuttādayo kalahakārakā caṇḍahatthiassādayo vā natthi, taṃ vīthiṃ paṭipajjati. Tattha ca piṇḍāya caramāno na turitaturito viya javena gacchati. Na hi javena piṇḍapātiyadhutaṅgaṃ nāma kiñci atthi. Visamabhūmibhāgappattaṃ pana udakasakaṭaṃ viya niccalo hutvā gacchati. Anugharaṃ paviṭṭho ca dātukāmaṃ vā adātukāmaṃ vā sallakkhetvā tadanurūpaṃ kālaṃ āgamento bhikkhaṃ paṭilabhitvā ādāya antogāme vā bahigāme vā vihārameva vā āgantvā yathā phāsuke patirūpe okāse nisīditvā kammaṭṭhānaṃ manasikaronto āhāre paṭikūlasaññaṃ upaṭṭhapetvā akkhabbhañjana – vaṇalepanaputtamaṃsūpamavasena paccavekkhanto aṭṭhaṅgasamannāgataṃ āhāraṃ āhāreti, neva davāya na madāya na maṇḍanāya na vibhūsanāya…pe… bhuttāvī ca udakakiccaṃ katvā muhuttaṃ bhattakilamathaṃ paṭippassambhetvā yathā purebhattaṃ, evaṃ pacchābhattaṃ purimayāmaṃ pacchimayāmañca kammaṭṭhānameva manasi karoti, ayaṃ vuccati harati ca paccāharati cāti.
正如居住黑波流罗祠堂的大领袖长老,如迦兰巴陀寺中雨季比库一样,念业境界念念不离,起脚前行,退转时走近村庄,秉持戒律道理,避开沉湎酒色与争斗暴虐等行为,循此道路而行。乞食时行止安稳不疾不徐,正如水流平缓而不激荡。水流虽平稳,却无障碍阻碍其去路。诸比库依愿而行动,或取物或不取,按时而来,或入村落、或出村落,或在寺院中止,在适当处所坐下,念修业境界。吃食时摒除不善分别,并施以眼药膏涂敷,细察摄持八正道整备之食。饮食无求无欲无张扬无装饰……食毕,洗水净身,稍作休息,如同早饭一般,然后思惟次一餐及之前之修习业状况,此即所谓‘取’与‘受’。
Idaṃ pana haraṇapaccāharaṇasaṅkhātaṃ gatapaccāgatavattaṃ pūrento yadi upanissayasampanno hoti, paṭhamavaye eva arahattaṃ pāpuṇāti. No ce paṭhamavaye pāpuṇāti, atha majjhimavaye; no ce majjhimavaye pāpuṇāti, atha maraṇasamaye; no ce maraṇasamaye pāpuṇāti, atha devaputto hutvā; no ce devaputto hutvā pāpuṇāti, anuppanne buddhe nibbatto paccekabodhiṃ sacchikaroti. No ce paccekabodhiṃ sacchikaroti, atha buddhānaṃ sammukhībhāve khippābhiñño hoti; seyyathāpi thero bāhiyo dārucīriyo mahāpañño vā, seyyathāpi thero sāriputto mahiddhiko vā, seyyathāpi thero mahāmoggallāno dhutavādo vā, seyyathāpi thero mahākassapo dibbacakkhuko vā, seyyathāpi thero anuruddho vinayadharo vā, seyyathāpi thero upāli dhammakathiko vā, seyyathāpi thero puṇṇo mantāṇiputto āraññiko vā, seyyathāpi thero revato bahussuto vā, seyyathāpi thero ānando bhikkhākāmo vā, seyyathāpi thero rāhulo buddhaputtoti. Iti imasmiṃ catukke yvāyaṃ harati ca paccāharati ca, tassa gocarasampajaññaṃ sikhāpattaṃ hoti.
这完成取与受一周期往复行者,若具备依止条件,于初阶便得阿拉汉果。若不于初阶得,则于中阶得;若不于中阶得,则于临终得;若不于临终得,则转世为天子;若不为天子得,则于未来佛出现时成就辟支佛。若不成辟支佛,则于佛出现时亲见悟道,速证神通。如长老巴希优达尔德器——大智慧者、沙利子——大神通者、摩嘎剌那——洁净论说者、大咖萨巴——天眼者、阿努儒达——律持者、伍巴离——法说者、玛哈念那边护者、雷瓦达——广闻者、阿难——美女望者、拉胡喇——佛子者。如此在此四阶阶段中,完成此取受循环者,将具明了觉知,得习悉修之证。
Abhikkamādīsu pana asammuyhanaṃ asammohasampajaññaṃ, taṃ evaṃ veditabbaṃ – idha bhikkhu abhikkamanto vā paṭikkamanto vā yathā andhabālaputhujjanā abhikkamādīsu – ‘‘attā abhikkamati, attanā abhikkamo nibbattito’’ti vā, ‘‘ahaṃ abhikkamāmi, mayā abhikkamo nibbattito’’ti vā sammuyhanti, tathā asammuyhanto ‘‘abhikkamāmī’’ti citte uppajjamāne teneva cittena saddhiṃ cittasamuṭṭhānā vāyodhātu viññattiṃ janayamānā uppajjati. Iti cittakiriyavāyodhātuvipphāravasena ayaṃ kāyasammato aṭṭhisaṅghāto abhikkamati. Tassevaṃ abhikkamato ekekapāduddharaṇe pathavīdhātu āpodhātūti dve dhātuyo omattā honti mandā, itarā dve adhimattā honti balavatiyo; tathā atiharaṇavītiharaṇesu. Vossajjane tejodhātu vāyodhātūti dve dhātuyo omattā honti mandā, itarā dve adhimattā balavatiyo, tathā sannikkhepanasannirujjhanesu. Tattha uddharaṇe pavattā rūpārūpadhammā atiharaṇaṃ na pāpuṇanti, tathā atiharaṇe pavattā vītiharaṇaṃ, vītiharaṇe pavattā vossajjanaṃ, vossajjane pavattā sannikkhepanaṃ, sannikkhepane pavattā sannirujjhanaṃ na pāpuṇanti. Tattha tattheva pabbaṃ pabbaṃ sandhi sandhi odhi odhi hutvā tattakapāle pakkhittatilāni viya paṭapaṭāyantā bhijjanti. Tattha ko eko abhikkamati, kassa vā ekassa abhikkamanaṃ? Paramatthato hi dhātūnaṃyeva gamanaṃ, dhātūnaṃ ṭhānaṃ, dhātūnaṃ nisajjanaṃ, dhātūnaṃ sayanaṃ. Tasmiṃ tasmiṃ koṭṭhāse saddhiṃ rūpena.
关于出入息等处存在的不随顺、不迷乱而具正知的现象,应当如此认识:这里说出入息时,比库无论是吸气还是呼气,如同盲人、愚昧世人一般,在出入息过程中,心中或起“我在呼吸”,“我已呼吸完毕”之妄想,亦或“我正在呼吸”,“我已完成呼吸”之妄念,如是妄念起时,与心同生的心集聚于此,产生心的作用风的流动,形成身体上称为八种合聚处的运动状态,称为呼吸。于此呼吸个别足部提起时,地界与水界这两种元素为柔软、迟钝的,而另外两种元素则较强健有力,类似于搬运物品时的状态。放下时,火界与风界这两种元素为柔软迟钝,另外两种元素较强健有力,类似于聚集堆叠的情形。由此可知,提起时运行的色与非色法不能达到搬运效果,搬运时不能达到放下效果,放下时不能达到聚集效果,聚集时不能达到堆叠效果。于是彼时彼处,断层与断层相接,缝隙与缝隙相合,犹如屋脊的瓦片交叠覆盖,彼此融洽贯通。此中谁谓之呼吸?又谁拥有各别呼吸?依究极意义,所遍行的是元素本身,是元素的位置、元素的凝结、元素的安卧。于每一元素层中,皆与色相相应合而同行。
Aññaṃ uppajjate cittaṃ, aññaṃ cittaṃ nirujjhati;
心有生起,心亦有灭去。
Avīcimanusambandho, nadīsotova vattatīti.
其相续流转无止无断,如同河水流动不息。
Evaṃ abhikkamādīsu asammuyhanaṃ asammohasampajaññaṃ nāmāti.
如此在出入息处的不随顺与无迷惑正知,称为此法名。
Niṭṭhito abhikkante paṭikkante sampajānakārī hotīti padassa attho.
“终止呼吸,开始呼吸,具正知”是此语词含义。
Ālokite vilokiteti ettha pana ālokitaṃ nāma purato pekkhaṇaṃ. Vilokitaṃ nāma anudisāpekkhaṇaṃ. Aññānipi heṭṭhā upari pacchato pekkhaṇavasena olokitaullokitāpalokitāni nāma honti, tāni idha na gahitāni. Sāruppavasena pana imāneva dve gahitāni, iminā vā mukhena sabbānipi tāni gahitānevāti.
“观照观察”此处“观照”指向前方观察,“观察”指向后方注视。此外,尚有向上、向下、向内、向外等多种注视,虽未于此处详述。简言之,此两者可视为心之根本,以此为起点涵盖全部观察行为。
Tattha ‘‘ālokessāmī’’ti citte uppanne cittavaseneva anoloketvā atthapariggaṇhanaṃ sātthakasampajaññaṃ, taṃ āyasmantaṃ nandaṃ kāyasakkhiṃ katvā veditabbaṃ. Vuttañhetaṃ bhagavatā – ‘‘sace, bhikkhave, nandassa puratthimā disā āloketabbā hoti, sabbaṃ cetasā samannāharitvā nando puratthimaṃ disaṃ āloketi – ‘evaṃ me puratthimaṃ disaṃ ālokayato na abhijjhādomanassā pāpakā akusalā dhammā anvāssavissantī’ti. Itiha tattha sampajāno hoti (a. ni. 8.9). Sace, bhikkhave, nandassa pacchimā disā…pe… uttarā disā…pe… dakkhiṇā disā…pe… uddhaṃ…pe… adho…pe… anudisā anuviloketabbā hoti, sabbaṃ cetasā samannāharitvā nando anudisaṃ anuviloketi – ‘evaṃ me anudisaṃ anuvilokayato na abhijjhādomanassā pāpakā akusalā dhammā anvāssavissantī’ti. Itiha tattha sampajāno hotī’’ti.
于此,「ālokessāmī」意指在心识中生起后,心识不直接观察所现的法,而是忽视它,从而达成对意义的理解与觉知,据此应当了解具寿难陀因身体为证者。世尊曾说:「比库们,假若难陀应当观察东方,乃是以全然具足的心力观视,难陀则观察东方,心中念言:『我这样观照东方,贪欲与瞋恚等不善恶法不会生起。』于此,他具醒觉知。若应当观察西方、北方、南方、上方、下方及四箇杂方向,也是如此,皆以圆满的心力观照,难陀便观彼杂方向,念言:『我如此观彼杂方向,贪欲憎恨等恶法不复生起。』于是,他具足觉知。」
Api ca idhāpi pubbe vuttacetiyadassanādivaseneva sātthakatā ca sappāyatā ca veditabbā, kammaṭṭhānassa pana avijahanameva gocarasampajaññaṃ. Tasmā ettha khandhadhātuāyatanakammaṭṭhānikehi attano kammaṭṭhānavaseneva, kasiṇādikammaṭṭhānikehi vā pana kammaṭṭhānasīseneva ālokanaṃ vilokanaṃ kātabbaṃ. Abbhantare attā nāma āloketā vā viloketā vā natthi, ‘ālokessāmī’ti pana citte uppajjamāne teneva cittena saddhiṃ cittasamuṭṭhānā vāyodhātu viññattiṃ janayamānā uppajjati. Iti cittakiriyavāyodhātuvipphāravasena heṭṭhimaṃ akkhidalaṃ adho sīdati, uparimaṃ uddhaṃ laṅgheti. Koci yantakena vivaranto nāma natthi. Tato cakkhuviññāṇaṃ dassanakiccaṃ sādhentaṃ uppajjatīti evaṃ pajānanaṃ panettha asammohasampajaññaṃ nāma. Api ca mūlapariññā āgantukatāva kālikabhāvavasena pettha asammohasampajaññaṃ veditabbaṃ. Mūlapariññāvasena tāva –
又此处亦如先前所说之净信境等般,皆应以意趣明了、审慎周详来理解,但对此处修行境界卻只以对境知觉之显现作为意识的觉察。故此,在此,依五蕴、六界、四念处等修行境地,或依遍、相等观修境地,须以察观为主,不可内在自观。意指「ālokessāmī」者,心识涌现时,随其心识激荡与气流,产生意识的显现;意识流动变化如风入眼而下垂、上升,如无支柱般漂浮荡漾,故下方即为眼底,上方为眼顶,无人分隔。由此生起眼识现观之职,遂知如此即称为无惑觉知。且亦当理解基本根本的清净觉知亦可归属于无惑觉知。根本觉所在,此时显现为:
Bhavaṅgāvajjanañceva, dassanaṃ sampaṭicchanaṃ;
「心境出现时,觉察亦随之准确契合;」
Santīraṇaṃ voṭṭhabbanaṃ, javanaṃ bhavati sattamaṃ.
「跨越障碍,动荡呈现为第七变化。」
Tattha bhavaṅgaṃ upapattibhavassa aṅgakiccaṃ sādhayamānaṃ pavattati, taṃ āvaṭṭetvā kiriyamanodhātu āvajjanakiccaṃ sādhayamānā, taṃnirodhā cakkhuviññāṇaṃ dassanakiccaṃ sādhayamānaṃ, taṃnirodhā vipākamanodhātu sampaṭicchanakiccaṃ sādhayamānā, taṃnirodhā vipākamanoviññāṇadhātu santīraṇakiccaṃ sādhayamānā, taṃnirodhā kiriyamanoviññāṇadhātu voṭṭhabbanakiccaṃ sādhayamānā , taṃnirodhā sattakkhattuṃ javanaṃ javati. Tattha paṭhamajavanepi – ‘‘ayaṃ itthī, ayaṃ puriso’’ti rajjanadussanamuyhanavasena ālokitavilokitaṃ nāma na hoti. Dutiyajavanepi…pe… sattamajavanepi. Etesu pana yuddhamaṇḍale yodhesu viya heṭṭhupariyavasena bhijjitvā patitesu – ‘‘ayaṃ itthī, ayaṃ puriso’’ti rajjanādivasena ālokitavilokitaṃ hoti. Evaṃ tāvettha mūlapariññāvasena asammohasampajaññaṃ veditabbaṃ.
于此,心境生起,如同行者所起行作用;藉由由驱使行处分支的内动力,进行觉察用事;而行用任务止息时,则眼识产生现观任务;现观止息时,则果报行用任务产生觉察;果报止息时,则非识行用发生跨越;非识止息时,则行用动作消退;持续七次,形成第七变动之跳跃。于第一跳跃处,不生男女相辨之观察,此为心中未涌男子女子的心相;而第二跳跃…直至第七跳跃亦是如此。然而在这各个跳跃间,如同战场上战士在陷阵时,在激烈的相抵及跌倒起伏之间,随群众喧嚣,如「此为女子,此为男子」之视相浮现。此由此识根本觉知所显现的无惑觉知应当理解为此种境况。
Cakkhudvāre pana rūpe āpāthamāgate bhavaṅgacalanato uddhaṃ sakakiccanipphādanavasena āvajjanādīsu uppajjitvā niruddhesu avasāne javanaṃ uppajjati, taṃ pubbe uppannānaṃ āvajjanādīnaṃ gehabhūte cakkhudvāre āgantukapuriso viya hoti. Tassa yathā paragehe kiñci yācituṃ paviṭṭhassa āgantukapurisassa gehassāmikesu tuṇhīmāsinesu āṇākaraṇaṃ na yuttaṃ, evaṃ āvajjanādīnaṃ gehabhūte cakkhudvāre āvajjanādīsupi arajjantesu adussantesu amuyhantesu ca rajjanadussanamuyhanaṃ ayuttanti evaṃ āgantukabhāvavasena asammohasampajaññaṃ veditabbaṃ.
而眼门处形色侵入时,因心境动荡产生上升的触发作用,随之感官觉知出现;触觉出现后,心境遂止。继而感知出现,是以犹如先者所发生的感官侵入入家之客。譬如有客进家乞食,家中主人应维静默不适暴突阻挠,若有侵入触觉等之存在者亦不得驱逐、侮辱、恶行殴打,正如对来访客人应礼待,不可迫使其离开。由此对入家之侵入触觉等,若以粗暴阻止、拒绝、责骂,则与对家中来访者驱逐谩骂无异。此应知为来访客方性格的无惑觉知。
Yāni panetāni cakkhudvāre voṭṭhabbanapariyosānāni cittāni uppajjanti, tāni saddhiṃ sampayuttadhammehi tattha tattheva bhijjanti, aññamaññaṃ na passantīti, ittarāni tāvakālikāni honti. Tattha yathā ekasmiṃ ghare sabbesu mānusakesu matesu avasesassa ekassa taṅkhaṇaññeva maraṇadhammassa na yuttā naccagītādīsu abhirati nāma. Evameva ekadvāre sasampayuttesu āvajjanādīsu tattha tattheva matesu avasesassa taṅkhaṇeyeva maraṇadhammassa javanassāpi rajjanadussanamuyhanavasena abhirati nāma na yuttāti. Evaṃ tāvakālikabhāvavasena asammohasampajaññaṃ veditabbaṃ.
诸眼门中因轮转结束而生起的诸心,俱行相应的法,彼处彼时相应地生起,却不相见彼此,故称各为暂时。譬如一室中众多凡夫,于末后阶段中彼此唯独厌离生死之相,不乐戏歌舞乐。乃至一眼门中,相应而生的触等法中,于最后阶段中唯独厌恶生死相,虽有心行之生灭、乱恶等相亦不乐。由此暂时性质,应当了知无惑正知。
Api ca khandhāyatanadhātupaccayapaccavekkhaṇavasena petaṃ veditabbaṃ. Ettha hi cakkhu ceva rūpā ca rūpakkhandho, dassanaṃ viññāṇakkhandho, taṃsampayuttā vedanā vedanākkhandho, saññā saññākkhandho, phassādikā saṅkhārakkhandho. Evametesaṃ pañcannaṃ khandhānaṃ samavāye ālokanavilokanaṃ paññāyati. Tattha ko eko āloketi, ko viloketi?
又当通过对蕴、处、界及因缘的观察,认识彼如鬼神般之存在。此中眼乃色,色为色蕴,见为识蕴所现,彼识相应而生受受蕴,受相应生想想蕴,触为触蕴之所缘。如此合成五蕴之聚合,称为眼根之观察智慧。问彼中谁为“观察”,谁为“视察”?
Tathā cakkhu cakkhāyatanaṃ, rūpaṃ rūpāyatanaṃ, dassanaṃ manāyatanaṃ, vedanādayo sampayuttadhammā dhammāyatanaṃ. Evametesaṃ catunnaṃ āyatanānaṃ samavāye ālokanavilokanaṃ paññāyati. Tattha ko eko āloketi, ko viloketi?
如眼即眼处,色即色处,见即心处,受等相应法为法处。此四处之合成即为观察智慧。问彼中谁为“观察”,谁为“视察”?
Tathā cakkhu cakkhudhātu, rūpaṃ rūpadhātu, dassanaṃ cakkhuviññāṇadhātu, taṃsampayuttā vedanādayo dhammā dhammadhātu. Evametāsaṃ catunnaṃ dhātūnaṃ samavāye ālokanavilokanaṃ paññāyati. Tattha ko eko āloketi, ko viloketi?
如眼即眼界,色即色界,见即眼识界,受等相应法为法界。此四界合成即为观察智慧。问彼中谁为“观察”,谁为“视察”?
Tathā cakkhu nissayapaccayo, rūpā ārammaṇapaccayo, āvajjanaṃ anantarasamanantarūpanissayanatthivigatapaccayo , āloko upanissayapaccayo, vedanādayo sahajātapaccayo. Evametesaṃ paccayānaṃ samavāye ālokanavilokanaṃ paññāyati. Tattha ko eko āloketi, ko viloketīti? Evamettha khandhāyatanadhātupaccayapaccavekkhaṇavasenapi asammohasampajaññaṃ veditabbaṃ.
如眼依赖条件,色以所缘为依,触依无间断的非色相应法,色界以光明为先依,受等法以同生为依。此诸依缘合成乃观察智慧。问彼中谁为“观察”,谁为“视察”?以此缘起观看五蕴处界及其依缘时,亦当了知无惑正知。
Samiñjite pasāriteti pabbānaṃ samiñjanapasāraṇe. Tattha cittavaseneva samiñjanapasāraṇaṃ akatvā hatthapādānaṃ samiñjanapasāraṇapaccayā atthānatthaṃ pariggaṇhitvā atthapariggaṇhanaṃ sātthakasampajaññaṃ. Tattha hatthapāde aticiraṃ samiñjetvā vā pasāretvā vā ṭhitassa khaṇe khaṇe vedanā uppajjati, cittaṃ ekaggataṃ na labhati, kammaṭṭhānaṃ paripatati, visesaṃ nādhigacchati. Kāle samiñjentassa kāle pasārentassa pana tā vedanā nuppajjanti, cittaṃ ekaggaṃ hoti, kammaṭṭhānaṃ phātiṃ gacchati, visesamadhigacchatīti , evaṃ atthānatthapariggaṇhanaṃ veditabbaṃ.
“调伏”即“展开”,于五蕴中调伏展开。此处心意为调伏展开之因,舍弃手足调伏展开之因,视心的舍弃与获得,即为利义正知。若久调伏或展开手足时,常生痛苦,不得心聚,修习破碎,难有专长;但于适当时调伏或展开时,痛苦不起,心得专注,修习顺利,成就殊胜。由此应知此舍弃得受之利害义理。
Atthe pana satipi sappāyāsappāyaṃ pariggaṇhitvā sappāyapariggaṇhanaṃ sappāyasampajaññaṃ. Tatrāyaṃ nayo –
这里所说的念的全面涵摄,应包括完整涵摄和部分涵摄两法,其中对完整涵摄持守即称为完整涵摄的正知。在此缘起有以下归纳——
Mahācetiyaṅgaṇe kira daharabhikkhū sajjhāyaṃ gaṇhanti, tesaṃ piṭṭhipassesu daharabhikkhuniyo dhammaṃ suṇanti. Tatreko daharo hatthaṃ pasārento kāyasaṃsaggaṃ patvā teneva kāraṇena gihī jāto. Aparo bhikkhu pādaṃ pasārento aggimhi pasāresi, aṭṭhimāhacca pādo jhāyi. Aparo vammike pasāresi, so āsīvisena ḍaṭṭho. Aparo cīvarakuṭidaṇḍake pasāresi, taṃ maṇisappo ḍaṃsi. Tasmā evarūpe asappāye apasāretvā sappāye pasāretabbaṃ. Idamettha sappāyasampajaññaṃ.
在大塔院中,据说幼年比库们正在聚集讲习,幼年比库尼们在馆舍内听闻法义。有一位幼年比库伸出手臂,跌倒在身体接触之处,因而生了家众。一位比库伸出脚,脚触火堆,骨头焦烂坏死。另一位比库伸出烟灰,烟灰被篾条烧过。还有一位比库把袈裟放在杖头上,杖子被蚂蚁咬坏。因此,对于此类不完整涵摄,应将其摈除,而以完整涵摄替代者为宜。这就是所谓的完整涵摄的正知。
Gocarasampajaññaṃ pana mahātheravatthunā dīpetabbaṃ – mahāthero kira divāṭhāne nisinno antevāsikehi saddhiṃ kathayamāno sahasā hatthaṃ samiñjetvā puna yathāṭhāne ṭhapetvā saṇikaṃ samiñjesi. Taṃ antevāsikā pucchiṃsu – ‘‘kasmā, bhante, sahasā hatthaṃ samiñjitvā puna yathāṭhāne ṭhapetvā saṇikaṃ samiñjiyitthā’’ti? Yato paṭṭhāyāhaṃ, āvuso, kammaṭṭhānaṃ manasikātuṃ āraddho, na me kammaṭṭhānaṃ muñcitvā hattho samiñjitapubbo, idāni pana me tumhehi saddhiṃ kathayamānena kammaṭṭhānaṃ muñcitvā samiñjito. Tasmā puna yathāṭhāne ṭhapetvā samiñjesinti. Sādhu , bhante, bhikkhunā nāma evarūpena bhavitabbanti. Evametthāpi kammaṭṭhānāvijahanameva gocarasampajaññanti veditabbaṃ.
关于境界涵摄,应由长老阐述——有一位长老白天坐在室内,与随侍人谈话时,突然将手举起又放回原处,缓缓地再次举起。他的随侍们便问道:“尊者,为何您突然将手举起又放下,然后重新缓缓举起呢?”尊者答曰:“因为我起意于当下用以修习功夫,故未放弃功夫便先举手,现因与你们共语时已放弃功夫,所以就重新举起。”他们说:“善哉,尊者!比库们应当如此行为。”如此方能明知于功夫不舍弃而有境界的涵摄。这便是所谓境界涵摄应当体知。
Abbhantare attā nāma koci samiñjento vā pasārento vā natthi, vuttappakāracittakiriyavāyodhātuvipphārena pana suttākaḍḍhanavasena dāruyantassa hatthapādalacalanaṃ viya samiñjanapasāraṇaṃ hotīti evaṃ parijānanaṃ panettha asammohasampajaññanti veditabbaṃ.
内心中没有有伸展或收敛之意,用于表示自性恰如释迦牟尼佛所说心的变化、感受等现象,恰似挥动手足般的伸展收敛。因此,此种认知谓之无惑正知,属于应当分别体知的范畴。
Saṅghāṭipattacīvaradhāraṇeti ettha saṅghāṭicīvarānaṃ nivāsanapārupanavasena pattassa bhikkhāpaṭiggahaṇādivasena paribhogo dhāraṇaṃ nāma. Tattha saṅghāṭicīvaradhāraṇe tāva nivāsetvā vā pārupitvā vā piṇḍāya carato āmisalābho sītassa paṭighātāyātiādinā nayena bhagavatā vuttappakāroyeva ca attho attho nāma. Tassa vasena sātthakasampajaññaṃ veditabbaṃ.
关于穿着僧袍,指的是托裟袍和僧衣的穿用、折叠以及袒露品相的相关实务,称为袍服穿着。其含义包括穿着托裟袍、折叠托裟袍,托钵外出乞食时,因寒冷、阻碍等而穿着,皆属于佛陀所说的适用情形。这便是寒热障碍中袍服穿着所包含的内容,且应被利益者的正知所了知。
Uṇhapakatikassa pana dubbalassa ca cīvaraṃ sukhumaṃ sappāyaṃ, sītālukassa ghanaṃ dupaṭṭaṃ. Viparītaṃ asappāyaṃ. Yassa kassaci jiṇṇaṃ asappāyameva, aggaḷādidānena hissa taṃ palibodhakaraṃ hoti. Tathā paṭṭuṇṇadukūlādibhedaṃ lobhanīyacīvaraṃ. Tādisañhi araññe ekakassa nivāsantarāyakaraṃ jīvitantarāyakarañcāpi hoti. Nippariyāyena pana yaṃ nimittakammādimicchājīvavasena uppannaṃ, yañcassa sevamānassa akusalā dhammā abhivaḍḍhanti, kusalā dhammā parihāyanti, taṃ asappāyaṃ. Viparītaṃ sappāyaṃ. Tassa vasenettha sappāyasampajaññaṃ. Kammaṭṭhānāvijahanavaseneva gocarasampajaññaṃ veditabbaṃ.
对于体弱多病之人,其穿着的是柔软且舒适的袈裟,寒冷的季节则穿较为厚重的内袍,这与相反的不舒适的穿着是不同的。如果某人长期身处不舒服的环境里,则施与柔软衣物能使其身心舒适。善法的分割和建立正当持守的权巧衣服,使该布施成为护持生命和隔绝恶缘的工具。相对地,不良的穿着方式属于不正当行为,是不适宜的。此种区别正是完整涵摄的正知。借由熟练观察修行的功德场所,方能辨识此境界涵摄所谓正知。
Abbhantare attā nāma koci cīvaraṃ pārupento natthi, vuttappakārena cittakiriyavāyodhātuvipphāreneva pana cīvarapārupanaṃ hoti. Tattha cīvarampi acetanaṃ, kāyopi acetano. Cīvaraṃ na jānāti – ‘‘mayā kāyo pārupito’’ti. Kāyopi na jānāti – ‘‘ahaṃ cīvarena pārupito’’ti. Dhātuyova dhātusamūhaṃ paṭicchādenti paṭapilotikāyapotthakarūpapaṭicchādane viya. Tasmā neva sundaraṃ cīvaraṃ labhitvā somanassaṃ kātabbaṃ, na asundaraṃ labhitvā domanassaṃ.
内在而言,自我并无任何衣服为所覆被,仅就宣说的意义而言,心的行为流、风元素的分散乃至衣服的覆被实有存在。于此,衣服本身是不具意识的,身体也是无意识的。衣服不知晓“我的身体被衣服所覆”,身体亦不知晓“我被衣服所覆”。元素如同元素群体一般彼此覆盖,如同用丝瓜络遮蔽身躯一般。因此,获得美衣应当使人欢喜,未能获得美衣则不必忧愁。
Nāgavammikacetiyarukkhādīsu hi keci mālāgandhadhūmavatthādīhi sakkāraṃ karonti, keci gūthamuttakaddamadaṇḍasatthappahārādīhi asakkāraṃ. Na tehi nāgavammikarukkhādayo somanassaṃ vā domanassaṃ vā karonti. Evameva neva sundaraṃ cīvaraṃ labhitvā somanassaṃ kātabbaṃ , na asundaraṃ labhitvā domanassanti, evaṃ pavattapaṭisaṅkhānavasenettha asammohasampajaññaṃ veditabbaṃ.
有些人在纳伽望密树等树木上,用花环、香、烟等供养表示敬重;有些人则因泥土、木杖、棒杖、棍棒等而不敬重。这些树木及其被供养者既不作欢喜,也不作忧愁。同样地,获得美好的衣服应令内心欢喜,未获美衣不当忧愁,依此发生之思想观照,应当明知不为迷惑。
Pattadhāraṇepi pattaṃ sahasāva aggahetvā imaṃ gahetvā piṇḍāya caramāno bhikkhaṃ labhissāmīti, evaṃ pattaggahaṇapaccayā paṭilabhitabbaṃ atthavasena sātthakasampajaññaṃ veditabbaṃ.
持衣者若突兀地抓取衣物,捉取后以此行乞,自当知道可以获得比库食物。依此持衣缘故,必当知此义理,明了合时的知觉。
Kisadubbalasarīrassa pana garupatto asappāyo, yassa kassaci catupañcagaṇṭhikāhato dubbisodhanīyo asappāyova. Duddhotapattopi na vaṭṭati, taṃ dhovantasseva cassa palibodho hoti. Maṇivaṇṇapatto pana lobhanīyo, cīvare vuttanayeneva asappāyo, nimittakammādivasena laddho pana yañcassa sevamānassa akusalā dhammā abhivaḍḍhanti, kusalā dhammā parihāyanti, ayaṃ ekantaasappāyova. Viparīto sappāyo. Tassa vasenettha sappāyasampajaññaṃ. Kammaṭṭhānāvijahanavaseneva ca gocarasampajaññaṃ veditabbaṃ.
对于何种体质弱小者而言,因生疾有时会伤及四五寸之长,顽固难愈。业染恶病不生改变,如同洗涤而清清楚楚显现。染有宝石色泽之病则有贪欲,如衣服法中所说的不可净故。他因所行业力,恶法增长,善法减少,此为彻底的业障。反之则为善法。从此法理中,应理解业果的知觉,如同观其业缘。
Abbhantare attā nāma koci pattaṃ gaṇhanto natthi, vuttappakārena cittakiriyavāyodhātuvipphāravaseneva pattaggahaṇaṃ nāma hoti. Tattha pattopi acetano, hatthāpi acetanā. Patto na jānāti – ‘‘ahaṃ hatthehi gahito’’ti. Hatthāpi na jānanti – ‘‘amhehi patto gahito’’ti. Dhātuyova dhātusamūhaṃ gaṇhanti, saṇḍāsena aggivaṇṇapattaggahaṇe viyāti. Evaṃ pavattapaṭisaṅkhānavasenettha asammohasampajaññaṃ veditabbaṃ.
内在而言,自我无任何衣物为所执,依宣说之意,手持之行为可谓持衣。于此, 衣物是无意识的,手也是无意识的。衣物不知“我被手持”,手亦不知“我执持衣物”。元素如同元素群体一般相持,如同绳结相缠绕一般。因此在此观察中,应觉知非迷惑。
Api ca yathā chinnahatthapāde vaṇamukhehi paggharitapubbalohitakimikule nīlamakkhikasamparikiṇṇe anāthasālāyaṃ nipanne anāthamanusse disvā, ye dayālukā purisā, te tesaṃ vaṇamattacoḷakāni ceva kapālādīhi ca bhesajjāni upanāmenti. Tattha coḷakānipi kesañci saṇhāni, kesañci thūlāni pāpuṇanti. Bhesajjakapālakānipi kesañci susaṇṭhānāni, kesañci dussaṇṭhānāni pāpuṇanti, na te tattha sumanā vā dummanā vā honti . Vaṇapaṭicchādanamatteneva hi coḷakena, bhesajjapaṭiggahaṇamatteneva ca kapālakena tesaṃ attho. Evameva yo bhikkhu vaṇacoḷakaṃ viya cīvaraṃ, bhesajjakapālakaṃ viya ca pattaṃ, kapāle bhesajjamiva ca patte laddhaṃ bhikkhaṃ sallakkheti, ayaṃ saṅghāṭipattacīvaradhāraṇe asammohasampajaññena uttamasampajānakārīti veditabbo.
譬如断手断脚之人,躺卧于森林边缘枯树树根的蜂窝中孤儿院,被慈悲之人看到,施以蜂蜜药膏及头部等部位的药物。其蜂窝中既有发繁之蜂巢,也有衰败蜂巢,所施药物头部亦有保护良好和不良之分,其蜂群亦非总是和善或恶劣。蜂窝遮盖作用明显,药膏涂于头部作用明显,是为了它们的利益。如此,若比库如同是衣服的森林蜂窝,手持衣服如同给头部的药膏,所得食物如同头部所获药物,则应知此乃桑嘎帝持衣之最高正知,不为迷惑之觉。
Asitādīsu asiteti piṇḍapātabhojane. Pīteti yāguādipāne. Khāyiteti piṭṭhakhajjādikhādane. Sāyiteti madhuphāṇitādisāyane. Tattha neva davāyātiādinā nayena vutto aṭṭhavidhopi attho attho nāma. Tasseva vasena sātthakasampajaññaṃ veditabbaṃ.
于食物方面,以生臭腐烂等为不洁净。以醇酒等饮料为可憎恶。以粪屎等排泄物为不净。以蜂蜜、乳汁等为安住之所。在此,无论是白天还是夜晚,诸如此类,并非仅限于驱除白昼的意义,而是指八种不同的含义,应以此为准,依此而知义理确实精确无误。
Lūkhapaṇītatittamadhurarasādīsu pana yena bhojanena yassa phāsu na hoti, taṃ tassa asappāyaṃ. Yaṃ pana nimittakammādivasena paṭiladdhaṃ, yañcassa bhuñjato akusalā dhammā abhivaḍḍhanti, kusalā dhammā parihāyanti, taṃ ekantaasappāyameva, viparītaṃ sappāyaṃ. Tassa vasenettha sappāyasampajaññaṃ. Kammaṭṭhānāvijahanavaseneva ca gocarasampajaññaṃ veditabbaṃ.
在污秽、污浊、苦涩、甜美的味道等等方面,若以某种食物吃而其身体不健壮,则该食物是不善的。依凭因缘业力及行为等因素而获得的食物,若食受此物时,恶法增长,善法减少,则该食必定是不善食物;反之为善食物。由此义理,应知不善食品的实义,并由此缘起,应了知属于修学业处的通达无误。
Abbhantare attā nāma koci bhuñjako natthi, vuttappakāracittakiriyavāyodhātuvipphāreneva pattappaṭiggahaṇaṃ nāma hoti. Cittakiriyavāyodhātuvipphāreneva hatthassa patte otāraṇaṃ nāma hoti. Cittakiriyavāyodhātuvipphāreneva ālopakaraṇaṃ ālopauddhāraṇaṃ mukhavivaraṇañca hoti, na koci kuñcikāya yantakena vā hanukaṭṭhīni vivarati. Cittakiriyavāyodhātuvipphāreneva ālopassa mukhe ṭhapanaṃ, uparidantānaṃ musalakiccasādhanaṃ, heṭṭhimadantānaṃ udukkhalakiccasādhanaṃ, jivhāya hatthakiccasādhanañca hoti. Iti tattha aggajivhāya tanukakheḷo mūlajivhāya bahalakheḷo makkheti. Taṃ heṭṭhādantaudukkhale jivhāhatthaparivattakaṃ kheḷodakena temitaṃ uparidantamusalasañcuṇṇitaṃ koci kaṭacchunā vā dabbiyā vā antopavesento nāma natthi, vāyodhātuyāva pavisati. Paviṭṭhaṃ paviṭṭhaṃ koci palālasanthāraṃ katvā dhārento nāma natthi, vāyodhātuvaseneva tiṭṭhati. Ṭhitaṃ ṭhitaṃ koci uddhanaṃ katvā aggiṃ jāletvā pacanto nāma natthi, tejodhātuyāva paccati. Pakkaṃ pakkaṃ koci daṇḍakena vā yaṭṭhiyā vā bahi nīhārako nāma natthi, vāyodhātuyeva nīharati. Iti vāyodhātu paṭiharati ca, vītiharati ca, dhāreti ca, parivatteti ca, sañcuṇṇeti ca, visoseti ca, nīharati ca. Pathavīdhātu dhāreti ca, parivatteti ca, sañcuṇṇeti ca, visoseti ca. Āpodhātu sineheti ca, allattañca anupāleti. Tejodhātu antopaviṭṭhaṃ paripāceti. Ākāsadhātu añjaso hoti. Viññāṇadhātu tattha tattha sammāpayogamanvāya ābhujatīti. Evaṃ pavattapaṭisaṅkhānavasenettha asammohasampajaññaṃ veditabbaṃ.
内里自我没有所谓的享用者,唯有对心念行为及气的变化者,说为所得与接受。由于念行与气的变化,手掌有接触及支承之用。因念行与气的变化,存在有遮蔽体、揭起体及口唇开合等功能,并非由钩爪、杠杆或膝骨所开合。由念行与气的变化,遮蔽物置于口中,上牙使用杵状器物,作为辅助上下牙齿磨合的工具,舌头有手的辅助功能。因此,上牙间隙称为细小缝隙,下牙间隙称为较大缝隙,口唇称为口缘。这些均用于上下牙的咬合转动,没有像钩状物或压板等入内的结构。气体进入则进入唇部,进入后没有保持污物或凝聚持留,气体保持通畅。没有点燃火焰的行为,没有用眼睛燃火等状况,火元素无此作用。没有用棒打、及用刀击打软组织之事,气体亦无此类遭遇。气元素能够排出、疏散、承担、旋转、凝集、蔓延和排除。地元素具有承担、旋转、凝集、蔓延之能。水元素能使物体湿润,未被损坏。火元素能够内部燃烧成熟。空元素为空隙。识元素于处处相应适宜结合。综上因缘观照,应了知此处无迷惑之明智。
Api ca gamanato pariyesanato paribhogato āsayato nidhānato aparipakkato paripakkato phalato nissandato sammakkhanatoti, evaṃ dasavidhapaṭikūlabhāvapaccavekkhaṇato pettha asammohasampajaññaṃ veditabbaṃ. Vitthārakathā panettha visuddhimagge āhārapaṭikūlasaññāniddesato gahetabbā.
又在行走、周旋、使用、心态、拥有、未成熟、成熟、结果、依靠、相对等十种相反状态的反观察中,也应以此处无迷惑之明智而观察。有关详细解说,将于《清净道论》中有关厌离饮食的识别作进一步展开。
Uccārapassāvakammeti uccārassa ca passāvassa ca karaṇe. Tattha pattakāle uccārapassāvaṃ akarontassa sakalasarīrato sedā muccanti, akkhīni bhamanti, cittaṃ na ekaggaṃ hoti, aññe ca rogā uppajjanti. Karontassa pana sabbaṃ taṃ na hotīti ayamettha attho. Tassa vasena sātthakasampajaññaṃ veditabbaṃ.
念语音清浊者,指的是说话的声音与气息。若于适当的时候未能正当清浊呼吸,则全身僵硬,眼睛朦胧,心念不聚,且有他病生起。但此处所指并非说未能做到为无过。以此义理,应知义理确确实实明了无误。
Aṭṭhāne uccārapassāvaṃ karontassa pana āpatti hoti, ayaso vaḍḍhati, jīvitantarāyo hoti, patirūpe ṭhāne karontassa sabbaṃ taṃ na hotīti idamettha sappāyaṃ tassa vasena sappāyasampajaññaṃ. Kammaṭṭhānāvijahanavaseneva ca gocarasampajaññaṃ veditabbaṃ.
于固定处所不当呼吸时,出现异常现象,金属生锈,生命受损。若于相对处所有不当情况,并非其所有行为皆不善,乃指其为不善食物的行为。由此义理,理应以此确定其为不善。同时也应以此为界限,了知属于修学业处的无误通达。
Abbhantare attā nāma uccārapassāvakammaṃ karonto natthi, cittakiriyavāyodhātuvipphāreneva pana uccārapassāvakammaṃ hoti . Yathā vā pana pakke gaṇḍe gaṇḍabhedena pubbalohitaṃ akāmatāya nikkhamati. Yathā ca atibharitā udakabhājanā udakaṃ akāmatāya nikkhamati. Evaṃ pakkāsayamuttavatthīsu sannicitā uccārapassāvā vāyuvegasamuppīḷitā akāmatāyapi nikkhamanti. So panāyaṃ evaṃ nikkhamanto uccārapassāvo neva tassa bhikkhuno attano hoti, na parassa, kevalaṃ sarīranissandova hoti. Yathā kiṃ? Yathā udakatumbato purāṇudakaṃ chaḍḍentassa neva taṃ attano hoti, na paresaṃ; kevalaṃ paṭijagganamattameva hoti; evaṃ pavattapaṭisaṅkhānavasenettha asammohasampajaññaṃ veditabbaṃ.
内在的自我并没有发声呼吸的功能,但由于心的作用和气流元素的变化,的确存在发声呼吸的活动。例如,成熟的牙根因为牙龈的断裂血肉外露而被动流出分泌物。如同负重过大的水管泄露水流,虽非自主意愿,但水却流出。由此可见,在成熟腐朽的体内存在的呼吸气流,虽然因气流的压力被迫排出,且非自主自愿,依然会排出。这个排出的呼吸活动既不是属于该比库自身,也不是属于他人,而仅依赖身体而发生。比如,装满水的容器倒出旧水,旧水并不属于容器本身或属于他人,仅仅是被容器放出而已。这样以运动与反动的关系为依据,此处应以不迷惑且清明的智慧去观察此理。
Gatādīsu gateti gamane. Ṭhiteti ṭhāne. Nisinneti nisajjāya. Sutteti sayane. Jāgariteti jāgaraṇe. Bhāsiteti kathane. Tuṇhībhāveti akathane. ‘‘Gacchanto vā gacchāmīti pajānāti, ṭhito vā ṭhitomhīti pajānāti, nisinno vā nisinnomhīti pajānāti, sayāno vā sayānomhīti pajānātī’’ti imasmiñhi sutte addhānairiyāpathā kathitā. ‘‘Abhikkante paṭikkante ālokite vilokite samiñjite pasārite’’ti imasmiṃ majjhimā. ‘‘Gate ṭhite nisinne sutte jāgarite’’ti idha pana khuddakacuṇṇiyairiyāpathā kathitā. Tasmā tesupi vuttanayeneva sampajānakāritā veditabbā.
“去者”是指行进中。“立者”是指立于一处。“坐者”是指坐下。“卧者”是指卧倒。“觉者”是指清醒。“说者”是指讲话。“默者”是指不说话。加之“行者即知自己在行”,“立者即知自己在立”,“坐者即知自己在坐”,“卧者即知自己在卧”,这是经中关于四念处的行持法门所说明的。此处又有“前进、后退、向外观照、向内察视、沈静、舒展”等中道状态的说明。此地又论及小止观法中的“去、立、坐、卧、觉”五法。据此,也应明了这些法门皆可使人具足正念觉知。
Tipiṭakamahāsivatthero panāha – yo ciraṃ gantvā vā caṅkamitvā vā aparabhāge ṭhito iti paṭisañcikkhati – ‘‘caṅkamanakāle pavattā rūpārūpadhammā ettheva niruddhā’’ti . Ayaṃ gate sampajānakārī nāma.
《三藏大长老注》说——凡是长时间行走或者转动身体后,后来站着,这种状态称为“转动时诸色及非色法全然止息于此处”,此时的行走即是正念觉知的表现。
Yo sajjhāyaṃ vā karonto, pañhaṃ vā vissajjento, kammaṭṭhānaṃ vā manasikaronto ciraṃ ṭhatvā aparabhāge nisinno iti paṭisañcikkhati – ‘‘ṭhitakāle pavattā rūpārūpadhammā ettheva niruddhā’’ti. Ayaṃ ṭhite sampajānakārī nāma.
凡是正当讲授或放下疑惑,或专心观想修行场所,长时间站立后坐下者,此时称为“站立时诸色及非色法全然止息于此处”,这就是站立时正念觉知的表现。
Yo sajjhāyādikaraṇavaseneva ciraṃ nisīditvā aparabhāge uṭṭhāya iti paṭisañcikkhati – ‘‘nisinnakāle pavattā rūpārūpadhammā ettheva niruddhā’’ti. Ayaṃ nisinne sampajānakārī nāma.
凡是以类似于正当讲授的方式长时间坐着,随后起立者,此时称为“坐着时诸色及非色法全然止息于此处”,这就是坐着时正念觉知的表现。
Yo pana nipannako sajjhāyaṃ vā karonto kammaṭṭhānaṃ vā manasikaronto niddaṃ okkamitvā aparabhāge uṭṭhāya iti paṭisañcikkhati – ‘‘sayanakāle pavattā rūpārūpadhammā ettheva niruddhā’’ti. Ayaṃ sutte jāgarite ca sampajānakārī nāma. Kiriyamayacittānañhi appavattanaṃ soppaṃ nāma, pavattanaṃ jāgaritaṃ nāma.
凡是弯腰或俯伏期间,正当讲授或观修修行处,然后睡眠醒来后起立者,称为“卧时诸色及非色法全然止息于此处”,这就是卧时以及醒时的正念觉知。行为所生的心不可断绝,称为“睡眠时的心不生灭”,觉醒时的心称为“觉知”,这就是觉知的表现。
Yo pana bhāsamāno – ‘‘ayaṃ saddo nāma oṭṭhe ca paṭicca, dante ca jivhañca tāluñca paṭicca, cittassa ca tadanurūpaṃ payogaṃ paṭicca jāyatī’’ti sato sampajānova bhāsati. Ciraṃ vā pana kālaṃ sajjhāyaṃ vā katvā, dhammaṃ vā kathetvā, kammaṭṭhānaṃ vā pavattetvā, pañhaṃ vā vissajjetvā, aparabhāge tuṇhībhūto iti paṭisañcikkhati – ‘‘bhāsitakāle uppannā rūpārūpadhammā ettheva niruddhā’’ti. Ayaṃ bhāsite sampajānakārī nāma.
所谓言说者,意指当时所说的话声依赖口腔、牙齿、舌头和上颚的协助而生起,又依照心意相应而构成的言语作用。在说话时,依止正念而能够清楚明白地发语。若长时期或短暂时段内,修习论法或从事修行法门,解答疑问,则在其后察觉所言涉及的色法及非色法现象,此刻已被平息无增,此为正念而具清楚辨别的言说者。此即所谓清明觉知的言说。
Yo tuṇhībhūto ciraṃ dhammaṃ vā kammaṭṭhānaṃ vā manasikatvā aparabhāge iti paṭisañcikkhati – ‘‘tuṇhībhūtakāle pavattā rūpārūpadhammā ettheva niruddhā’’ti. Upādārūpappavattiyañhi sati bhāsati nāma, asati tuṇhī bhavati nāmāti. Ayaṃ tuṇhībhāve sampajānakārī nāmāti.
若虽曾平息,仍在长时段内持续专心于法或修行法门,而于其后察觉从平息状态起所发生的色与非色诸法现象乃已平息,便称为平息状态的言说。若有起于执着形相之觉知,则谓之言说;若无觉知即陷于平息之中,谓之平息。此即称为清明觉知所成的平息状态。
Tayidaṃ mahāsivattherena vuttaṃ asammohadhuraṃ mahāsatipaṭṭhānasutte adhippetaṃ. Imasmiṃ pana sāmaññaphale sabbampi catubbidhaṃ sampajaññaṃ labbhati. Tasmā vuttanayeneva cettha catunnaṃ sampajaññānaṃ vasena sampajānakāritā veditabbā. Sampajānakārīti ca sabbapadesu satisampayuttasseva sampajaññassa vasena attho veditabbo. Satisampajaññena samannāgatoti etassa hi padassa ayaṃ vitthāro. Vibhaṅgappakaraṇe pana – ‘‘sato sampajāno abhikkamati, sato sampajāno paṭikkamatī’’ti evaṃ etāni padāni vibhattāneva. Evaṃ, kho mahārājāti evaṃ satisampayuttassa sampajaññassa vasena abhikkamādīni pavattento satisampajaññena samannāgato nāma hotīti attho.
此义由尊者大悉达多所说,载于无迷断惑的大般念处经中。于此禅果中,一切清明觉知皆具足四种多面觉知之相。由此经文得知,凭借四种清明觉知的涵摄,即为清明觉者之特质。所谓清明觉者,即于各处皆依止而具足随念觉知之境界。此随念觉知即为这是该语义中之详解。律藏的解释书中亦云:「正念觉知则前进,正念觉知则后退」,此等词义即是明示。由是,大意为大士出王宫入道,即以含有此四种随念觉知的随念为基础,遂获为清明觉者之义。
Santosakathā知足论
§215
215.Idha, mahārāja, bhikkhu santuṭṭho hotīti ettha santuṭṭhoti itarītarapaccayasantosena samannāgato. So panesa santoso dvādasavidho hoti, seyyathidaṃ – cīvare yathālābhasantoso, yathābalasantoso, yathāsāruppasantosoti tividho. Evaṃ piṇḍapātādīsu. Tassāyaṃ pabhedavaṇṇanā –
215.尊敬的大王,此处所云比库之满足,即涵盖种种满足之因缘。彼满足者共有十二种,即衣服之随得满足、力量之随得满足、勤勉之随得满足等三种满足。以此类推,乞食等亦如是。此中各类满足之详细分类如下:
Idha bhikkhu cīvaraṃ labhati, sundaraṃ vā asundaraṃ vā. So teneva yāpeti, aññaṃ na pattheti, labhantopi na gaṇhati. Ayamassa cīvare yathālābhasantoso. Atha pana pakatidubbalo vā hoti, ābādhajarābhibhūto vā, garucīvaraṃ pārupanto kilamati. So sabhāgena bhikkhunā saddhiṃ taṃ parivattetvā lahukena yāpentopi santuṭṭhova hoti. Ayamassa cīvare yathābalasantoso. Aparo paṇītapaccayalābhī hoti. So pattacīvarādīnaṃ aññataraṃ mahagghapattacīvaraṃ bahūni vā pana pattacīvarāni labhitvā idaṃ therānaṃ cirapabbajitānaṃ, idaṃ bahussutānaṃ anurūpaṃ, idaṃ gilānānaṃ, idaṃ appalābhīnaṃ hotūti datvā tesaṃ purāṇacīvaraṃ vā gahetvā saṅkārakūṭādito vā nantakāni uccinitvā tehi saṅghāṭiṃ katvā dhārentopi santuṭṭhova hoti. Ayamassa cīvare yathāsāruppasantoso.
此处比库获得衣服,不论美丑,皆随自己适用而穿着,不染求他者,即便得到亦不取用。此为衣服方面的随得满足。若比库力量衰弱或遭病痛、老病等所困,衣服变重而不适,彼仍与同僚比库更换调度,或虽改穿但心安满足。此为衣服方面的力量随得满足。再者,另有比库藉由良好因缘所得衣服,如破旧旧衣、成坯残布等均切合老比库长时出家的需求,或适合疾病期间、极少所得者,彼取用后穿着,心亦满足。此为衣服方面的勤勉随得满足。
Idha pana bhikkhu piṇḍapātaṃ labhati lūkhaṃ vā paṇītaṃ vā, so teneva yāpeti, aññaṃ na pattheti, labhantopi na gaṇhati. Ayamassa piṇḍapāte yathālābhasantoso. Yo pana attano pakativiruddhaṃ vā byādhiviruddhaṃ vā piṇḍapātaṃ labhati, yenassa paribhuttena aphāsu hoti. So sabhāgassa bhikkhuno taṃ datvā tassa hatthato sappāyabhojanaṃ bhuñjitvā samaṇadhammaṃ karontopi santuṭṭhova hoti. Ayamassa piṇḍapāte yathābalasantoso. Aparo bahuṃ paṇītaṃ piṇḍapātaṃ labhati. So taṃ cīvaraṃ viya theracirapabbajitabahussutaappalābhīgilānānaṃ datvā tesaṃ vā sesakaṃ piṇḍāya vā caritvā missakāhāraṃ bhuñjantopi santuṭṭhova hoti. Ayamassa piṇḍapāte yathāsāruppasantoso.
此处比库获得食饭,不论粗劣或精妙,随自己适用穿食,不求他饭,虽得亦不取。所谓食饭方面的随得满足。若有比库得到之食饭,与其身体状态相违,或患病时难以消化,彼分与同伴接受供养,亲手摄取适合的食物而行僧法,心皆满足。此为食饭方面的力量随得满足。又有比库获得大量精妙食饭,彼将其视如衣服般供养给长时出家多闻老比库,或剩余分布施乞食,或取用残饭食而饮食适量,心亦满足。此为食饭方面的勤勉随得满足。
Idha pana bhikkhu senāsanaṃ labhati, manāpaṃ vā amanāpaṃ vā, so tena neva somanassaṃ, na domanassaṃ uppādeti; antamaso tiṇasanthārakenapi yathāladdheneva tussati. Ayamassa senāsane yathālābhasantoso. Yo pana attano pakativiruddhaṃ vā byādhiviruddhaṃ vā senāsanaṃ labhati, yatthassa vasato aphāsu hoti, so taṃ sabhāgassa bhikkhuno datvā tassa santake sappāyasenāsane vasantopi santuṭṭhova hoti. Ayamassa senāsane yathābalasantoso.
在此,比库获得床铺时,无论是合意或不合意,他凭此既不生欢喜,也不生忧惧;至于所获草垫,如同所应得的那样便感满足。此处之床铺,他安稳满足于所得之境。倘若有人获得与自身所盼望不同,或与疾病不符之床铺,在住宅处暂时无法如愿者,他将此床铺赠与同僧,使其安心安乐,即便他自己住在贤善之床铺,也处于和悦满足境界。此处之床铺,他以自己所能安稳满足。
Aparo mahāpuñño leṇamaṇḍapakūṭāgārādīni bahūni paṇītasenāsanāni labhati. So tāni cīvaraṃ viya theracirapabbajitabahussutaappalābhīgilānānaṃ datvā yattha katthaci vasantopi santuṭṭhova hoti. Ayamassa senāsane yathāsāruppasantoso. Yopi – ‘‘uttamasenāsanaṃ nāma pamādaṭṭhānaṃ, tattha nisinnassa thinamiddhaṃ okkamati, niddābhibhūtassa puna paṭibujjhato kāmavitakkā pātubhavantī’’ti paṭisañcikkhitvā tādisaṃ senāsanaṃ pattampi na sampaṭicchati. So taṃ paṭikkhipitvā abbhokāsarukkhamūlādīsu vasantopi santuṭṭhova hoti. Ayampissa senāsane yathāsāruppasantoso.
又有大德获得许多美好屋舍、石室、楼阁等安处。他将这些视如布施给长期出家多闻的长老们,供这些心怀不贪不嗔的人居住之所,因而他们即便临时宿处,也安然满足。此处之床铺,他如实顺服而满足。有些人审察曰:“所谓极优床铺,是懈怠之所;坐于其中则生昏沉,沉睡之人觉醒后复生欲念”。审视此类床铺,无一合心意者。他舍弃此床,处于穴居、树根等,仍安稳满足。此处床铺,他如实适意而满足。
Idha pana bhikkhu bhesajjaṃ labhati, lūkhaṃ vā paṇītaṃ vā, so yaṃ labhati, teneva tussati, aññaṃ na pattheti, labhantopi na gaṇhati. Ayamassa gilānapaccaye yathālābhasantoso. Yo pana telena atthiko phāṇitaṃ labhati. So taṃ sabhāgassa bhikkhuno datvā tassa hatthato telaṃ gahetvā aññadeva vā pariyesitvā bhesajjaṃ karontopi santuṭṭhova hoti. Ayamassa gilānapaccaye yathābalasantoso.
在此,比库获得药物时,无论粗劣或良好,他于所得之药满足,不取他药;即使得药,也不执着。此处病患缘故,他如实满意所得。有位比库得治病油脂良药,便将药赠与同僧,并手执油脂,或访求他物而施药,彼亦因此而安稳满足。此处病故缘,他以自身能力心满意足。
Aparo mahāpuñño bahuṃ telamadhuphāṇitādipaṇītabhesajjaṃ labhati. So taṃ cīvaraṃ viya theracirapabbajitabahussutaappalābhīgilānānaṃ datvā tesaṃ ābhatena yena kenaci yāpentopi santuṭṭhova hoti. Yo pana ekasmiṃ bhājane muttaharīṭakaṃ ṭhapetvā ekasmiṃ catumadhuraṃ – ‘‘gaṇhāhi, bhante, yadicchasī’’ti vuccamāno sacassa tesu aññatarenapi rogo vūpasammati, atha muttaharīṭakaṃ nāma buddhādīhi vaṇṇitanti catumadhuraṃ paṭikkhipitvā muttaharīṭakeneva bhesajjaṃ karonto paramasantuṭṭhova hoti. Ayamassa gilānapaccaye yathāsāruppasantoso.
又有大德获得许多诸如良油、蜜糖等佳药。他视此如布施,予久住出家多闻若无贪恚者,因而他们若有所需,也心安而满足。有一人食中置自由香料,另一侧放甘露蜜糖,即谓:「尊者,可取用。」如此说时,真实病患即得缓解。由此舍弃甘露蜜糖,仅用自由香料为药,因而极为满意。此处病故缘,他如实适心满足。
Iminā pana dvādasavidhena itarītarapaccayasantosena samannāgatassa bhikkhuno aṭṭha parikkhārā vaṭṭanti. Tīṇi cīvarāni, patto, dantakaṭṭhacchedanavāsi, ekā sūci, kāyabandhanaṃ parissāvananti. Vuttampi cetaṃ –
靠此十二种不同条件而得到满足的比库,具足八种装备。三衣、床垫、牙刀和理发刀、针及系身绳等。经中亦有明说:
‘‘Ticīvarañca patto ca, vāsi sūci ca bandhanaṃ;
『三衣与床垫、理发刀、针及结绳,
Parissāvanena aṭṭhete, yuttayogassa bhikkhuno’’ti.
借助清洁洗涤,保持端正,有教理相应的比库。
Te sabbe kāyaparihārikāpi honti kucchiparihārikāpi. Kathaṃ? Ticīvaraṃ tāva nivāsetvā ca pārupitvā ca vicaraṇakāle kāyaṃ pariharati, posetīti kāyaparihārikaṃ hoti. Cīvarakaṇṇena udakaṃ parissāvetvā pivanakāle khāditabbaphalāphalagahaṇakāle ca kucchiṃ pariharati; posetīti kucchiparihārikaṃ hoti.
他们都是身体清净者,也是器具清净者。如何理解呢?穿着三衣时,清洁、整理并移动身体,照料身体,名为身体清净者。用衣角积蓄清水,饮水、咀嚼食物时呵护饮具器具,名为器具清净者。
Pattopi tena udakaṃ uddharitvā nhānakāle kuṭiparibhaṇḍakaraṇakāle ca kāyaparihāriko hoti. Āhāraṃ gahetvā bhuñjanakāle kucchiparihāriko.
用衣服托起清水,沐浴时、整理木屋器具时算作身体清净者。进食时,咀嚼食物则算为器具清净者。
Vāsipi tāya dantakaṭṭhacchedanakāle mañcapīṭhānaṃ aṅgapādacīvarakuṭidaṇḍakasajjanakāle ca kāyaparihārikā hoti. Ucchuchedananāḷikerāditacchanakāle kucchiparihārikā.
穿衣时,刷牙剔齿,整理床铺坐具及手脚衣物、木杖时算为身体清净者。修剪指甲截除椰子壳等杂物时算为器具清净者。
Sūcipi cīvarasibbanakāle kāyaparihārikā hoti. Pūvaṃ vā phalaṃ vā vijjhitvā khādanakāle kucchiparihārikā.
缝补衣服时算为身体清净者。在吃饭前识别取舍食果或食物时算为器具清净者。
Kāyabandhanaṃ bandhitvā vicaraṇakāle kāyaparihārikaṃ. Ucchuādīni bandhitvā gahaṇakāle kucchiparihārikaṃ.
绑扎身体绷带,行走活动时算为身体清净者。绑缚矛杖等器具,取用收纳时算为器具清净者。
Parissāvanaṃ tena udakaṃ parissāvetvā nhānakāle, senāsanaparibhaṇḍakaraṇakāle ca kāyaparihārikaṃ. Pānīyaṃ parissāvanakāle, teneva tilataṇḍulaputhukādīni gahetvā khādanakāle ca kucchiparihāriyaṃ. Ayaṃ tāva aṭṭhaparikkhārikassa parikkhāramattā. Navaparikkhārikassa pana seyyaṃ pavisantassa tatraṭṭhakaṃ paccattharaṇaṃ vā kuñcikā vā vaṭṭati. Dasaparikkhārikassa nisīdanaṃ vā cammakhaṇḍaṃ vā vaṭṭati. Ekādasaparikkhārikassa pana kattarayaṭṭhi vā telanāḷikā vā vaṭṭati. Dvādasaparikkhārikassa chattaṃ vā upāhanaṃ vā vaṭṭati. Etesu ca aṭṭhaparikkhārikova santuṭṭho, itare asantuṭṭhā mahicchā mahābhārāti na vattabbā. Etepi hi appicchāva santuṭṭhāva subharāva sallahukavuttinova. Bhagavā pana na yimaṃ suttaṃ tesaṃ vasena kathesi, aṭṭhaparikkhārikassa vasena kathesi. So hi khuddakavāsiñca sūciñca parissāvane pakkhipitvā pattassa anto ṭhapetvā pattaṃ aṃsakūṭe laggetvā ticīvaraṃ kāyapaṭibaddhaṃ katvā yenicchakaṃ sukhaṃ pakkamati. Paṭinivattetvā gahetabbaṃ nāmassa na hoti. Iti imassa bhikkhuno sallahukavuttitaṃ dassento bhagavā – ‘‘santuṭṭho hoti kāyaparihārikena cīvarenā’’tiādimāha. Tattha kāyaparihārikenāti kāyapariharaṇamattakena. Kucchiparihārikenāti kucchipariharaṇamattakena. Samādāyeva pakkamatīti aṭṭhaparikkhāramattakaṃ sabbaṃ gahetvāva kāyapaṭibaddhaṃ katvāva gacchati. ‘‘Mama vihāro pariveṇaṃ upaṭṭhāko’’ti āsaṅgo vā bandho vā na hoti. So jiyā mutto saro viya, yūthā apakkanto madahatthī viya ca icchiticchitaṃ senāsanaṃ vanasaṇḍaṃ rukkhamūlaṃ vanapabbhāraṃ paribhuñjanto ekova tiṭṭhati, ekova nisīdati. Sabbiriyāpathesu ekova adutiyo.
用水洗净身体后,于沐浴时与坐卧处所物品整理时,运用身体的清净法。饮水清洁时,拿取芝麻、碎米之类物,进食时也以舌头洁净之。此仅属于八项修行的清洁程度。至于九项修行者,则在床榻坐卧时使用草垫、背靠或者靠枕。十项修行者则用蒲团或者垫席。十一项修行者则使用刀尺或脂管。十二项修行者则用伞或披肩。在这些中,只有八项修行者对此感到满足,其他者虽不满足但无贪大之念。此等虽非甚欲望,然满足且清净如轻松的事物。世尊并非就此全部法而训诫众人,只对八项修行者而说。此人在简陋草席上用针清理针眼,安置蔺草席内边,结成三衣束缚于身,随己所乐,处处安适。离去时须收妥,不可借他人,无他名称。对此,世尊由此轻松的表现教诲比库,谓:“应以这身洁净、衣服洁净而满足。”所谓身洁净者,仅限洁身衣缚罢了。舌尖洁净者,仅限用舌尖清洁罢了。专注离身、衣之束缚,乃八项修行之程度,全部用具身缚完备后,方才行住。行时无言:“此处是我的僧舍、随从或束缚。”此人逍遥自在如游鱼于水,如群象出林,随心所欲,或立或坐,或坐卧于树根、林边,只一处常住行持。于各种精进道中,唯此为第二佳道。
‘‘Cātuddiso appaṭigho ca hoti,
“四方不为阻碍,
Santussamāno itarītarena;
彼乐於满足,心无分别;
Parissayānaṃ sahitā achambhī,
含清净洁,安然无惧,
Eko care khaggavisāṇakappo’’ti. (su. ni. 42);
独自行持,如利刃之持刀者。”(小部律·42)
Evaṃ vaṇṇitaṃ khaggavisāṇakappataṃ āpajjati.
如是描述,由是获得利刃般的精进持心。
Idāni tamatthaṃ upamāya sādhento – ‘‘seyyathāpī’’tiādimāha. Tattha pakkhī sakuṇoti pakkhayutto sakuṇo. Ḍetīti uppatati. Ayaṃ panettha saṅkhepattho – sakuṇā nāma ‘‘asukasmiṃ padese rukkho paripakkaphalo’’ti ñatvā nānādisāhi āgantvā nakhapattatuṇḍādīhi tassa phalāni vijjhantā vidhunantā khādanti. ‘Idaṃ ajjatanāya, idaṃ svātanāya bhavissatī’ti tesaṃ na hoti. Phale pana khīṇe neva rukkhassa ārakkhaṃ ṭhapenti, na tattha pattaṃ vā nakhaṃ vā tuṇḍaṃ vā ṭhapenti. Atha kho tasmiṃ rukkhe anapekkho hutvā, yo yaṃ disābhāgaṃ icchati, so tena sapattabhārova uppatitvā gacchati. Evameva ayaṃ bhikkhu nissaṅgo nirapekkho yena kāmaṃ pakkamati. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘samādāyeva pakkamatī’’ti.
现在依归此义来比方解释时,以『比如说』这类语句说。其中文中的“鸟”是指有翅膀的鸟;“下蛋”是指蛋的发生。此处所说主要意指“鸟”名为“在苦处成熟果实的树”,知道这点后,它从不同地方来到,凭借爪、羽毛和喙等啄食这些果实,掰开后取食。这里言‘这是暂时的,这只是暂时的’并不成立(即非果实常住)。而果实一旦消失,树并不会因此得到保护,也不会在此处留下叶子、爪子或羽毛。而那时,树枝则无所依赖,鸟想往哪个方向飞翔,就像负重般地振翅前行。比库也同样无依无着、无所分别地离开,像是顺着因缘自然发生而行。由此知晓,说“正于相依而行”是正确的。
Nīvaraṇappahānakathā舍断诸盖论
§216
216.Soiminā cātiādinā kiṃ dasseti? Araññavāsassa paccayasampattiṃ dasseti. Yassa hi ime cattāro paccayā natthi, tassa araññavāso na ijjhati. Tiracchānagatehi vā vanacarakehi vā saddhiṃ vattabbataṃ āpajjati. Araññe adhivatthā devatā – ‘‘kiṃ evarūpassa pāpabhikkhuno araññavāsenā’’ti bheravasaddaṃ sāventi, hatthehi sīsaṃ paharitvā palāyanākāraṃ karonti. ‘‘Asuko bhikkhu araññaṃ pavisitvā idañcidañca pāpakammaṃ akāsī’’ti ayaso pattharati. Yassa panete cattāro paccayā atthi, tassa araññavāso ijjhati. So hi attano sīlaṃ paccavekkhanto kiñci kāḷakaṃ vā tilakaṃ vā apassanto pītiṃ uppādetvā taṃ khayavayato sammasanto ariyabhūmiṃ okkamati. Araññe adhivatthā devatā attamanā vaṇṇaṃ bhaṇanti. Itissa udake pakkhittatelabindu viya yaso vitthāriko hoti.
216. 此处“与……同在”等语句意欲表述何义?是说明行住森林者的依缘成熟。因为如果不具备这四种依缘,森林中的住持就不会产生愿意居住的心。若与恶道生灵或野兽共处,就会发生冲突。森林中自然守护神就会发出威严的警告:“为何恶比库以这样的方式居住于森林?”并发出恐怖吼叫,甚至挥拳击打头部,故意做出逃避之状。说:“因恶比库进入森林作出些许恶行,故而遭受铁石折磨。“而只要具备上述四个缘起,便会愿意安住森林。因为其自察自身戒行,不见任何污点,产生喜悦,因而决心断尽贪染,进入圣境。在森林中守护神心中欣喜,皆称赞赞美,犹如水中浮起的蕨叶点点铺展,名声广被流传。
Tattha vivittanti suññaṃ, appasaddaṃ, appanigghosanti attho. Etadeva hi sandhāya vibhaṅge – ‘‘vivittanti santike cepi senāsanaṃ hoti, tañca anākiṇṇaṃ gahaṭṭhehi pabbajitehi. Tena taṃ vivitta’’nti vuttaṃ. Seti ceva āsati ca etthāti senāsanaṃ mañcapīṭhādīnametaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Tenāha – ‘‘senāsananti mañcopi senāsanaṃ , pīṭhampi, bhisipi, bimbohanampi, vihāropi, aḍḍhayogopi, pāsādopi, hammiyampi, guhāpi, aṭṭopi, māḷopi leṇampi, veḷugumbopi, rukkhamūlampi, maṇḍapopi, senāsanaṃ, yattha vā pana bhikkhū paṭikkamanti, sabbametaṃ senāsana’’nti (vibha. 527).
其中“幽静、清净、无扰”是其义。对于此类依分中对此分别解释时说:“即使在僻静处,也当有僧众居所,而此居所常被修学比库所保护。因此称为僻静。”言“僧所”即为床铺座席等的总称。故说:“居所乃床铺、座席、垫毡、铺盖、靠背、宫殿、坐榻、洞窟、窝棚、树根、亭榭、营地;凡比库修行之处,皆为居所。”(训诂527)
Api ca – ‘‘vihāro aḍḍhayogo pāsādo hammiyaṃ guhā’’ti idaṃ vihārasenāsanaṃ nāma. ‘‘Mañco pīṭhaṃ bhisi bimbohana’’nti idaṃ mañcapīṭhasenāsanaṃ nāma. ‘‘Cimilikā cammakhaṇḍo tiṇasanthāro paṇṇasanthāro’’ti idaṃ santhatasenāsanaṃ nāma. ‘‘Yattha vā pana bhikkhū paṭikkamantī’’ti idaṃ okāsasenāsanaṃ nāmāti. Evaṃ catubbidhaṃ senāsanaṃ hoti, taṃ sabbaṃ senāsanaggahaṇena saṅgahitameva.
又言:“休息处、靠背、宫殿、坐榻、窝棚洞窟。”这即为住所名。床铺、座席、垫毡是被称为床铺座席住所。又言:“干草、稻秸、草堆、树叶堆”称为聚集住所。说“凡比库退住之处”,称为敞开住所。因此住所分为四种,此皆由总称住所所统摄。
Idha panassa sakuṇasadisassa cātuddisassa bhikkhuno anucchavikasenāsanaṃ dassento araññaṃ rukkhamūlantiādimāha. Tattha araññanti nikkhamitvā bahi indakhīlā sabbametaṃ araññanti. Idaṃ bhikkhunīnaṃ vasena āgataṃ. ‘‘Āraññakaṃ nāma senāsanaṃ pañcadhanusatikaṃ pacchima’’nti (pārā. 654) idaṃ pana imassa bhikkhuno anurūpaṃ. Tassa lakkhaṇaṃ visuddhimagge dhutaṅganiddese vuttaṃ. Rukkhamūlanti yaṃ kiñci sandacchāyaṃ vivittarukkhamūlaṃ. Pabbatanti selaṃ. Tattha hi udakasoṇḍīsu udakakiccaṃ katvā sītāya rukkhacchāyāya nisinnassa nānādisāsu khāyamānāsu sītena vātena bījiyamānassa cittaṃ ekaggaṃ hoti. Kandaranti kaṃ vuccati udakaṃ, tena dāritaṃ, udakena bhinnaṃ pabbatapadesaṃ. Yaṃ nadītumbantipi, nadīkuñjantipi vadanti. Tattha hi rajatapaṭṭasadisā vālikā hoti, matthake maṇivitānaṃ viya vanagahaṇaṃ, maṇikhandhasadisaṃ udakaṃ sandati. Evarūpaṃ kandaraṃ oruyha pānīyaṃ pivitvā gattāni sītāni katvā vālikaṃ ussāpetvā paṃsukūlacīvaraṃ paññapetvā nisinnassa samaṇadhammaṃ karoto cittaṃ ekaggaṃ hoti. Giriguhanti dvinnaṃ pabbatānaṃ antare, ekasmiṃyeva vā umaggasadisaṃ mahāvivaraṃ susānalakkhaṇaṃ visuddhimagge vuttaṃ. Vanapatthanti gāmantaṃ atikkamitvā manussānaṃ anupacāraṭṭhānaṃ, yattha na kasanti na vapanti, tenevāha – ‘‘vanapatthanti dūrānametaṃ senāsanānaṃ adhivacana’’ntiādi. Abbhokāsanti acchannaṃ. Ākaṅkhamāno panettha cīvarakuṭiṃ katvā vasati. Palālapuñjanti palālarāsi. Mahāpalālapuñjato hi palālaṃ nikkaḍḍhitvā pabbhāraleṇasadise ālaye karonti, gacchagumbhādīnampi upari palālaṃ pakkhipitvā heṭṭhā nisinnā samaṇadhammaṃ karonti. Taṃ sandhāyetaṃ vuttaṃ.
这里为了说明四方如鸟般自由飞翔的比库的那里隐居处,称为森林、树根等。森林者,指出外无拘无束、四处漫无定所之地,这是比库们衣住之所。说:“森林即称为住所,五百由旬之外。”(巴拉672)这正适合此比库使用。其标志有《清净道》中云:“树根者即为诸树荫蔽下散落的树根。”山者即石。于水泉边洗浴,坐于凉爽树阴,啜饮各种食物,使心专注。称为幽谷。谷者是水流凹陷处。河谷、河湾即此。此地多银色藤蔓,如同堆满珠玉的芳草密林,似珠块散落的水泉滋润着干涸之地。以此幽谷饮水,洗净身体,焚烧藤蔓,穿尘净衣,坐定修行,心便专注。《清净道》中称为“山洞”,即两个山间或一座山顶的大深洞。住处名为乡村边远,远离人群,行人难至,称为森林隐居处。旷野即无遮掩之所。心起意欲时,于此建屋衣舍,居住修行。聚集枯草、草堆;大草堆拔除后在轻柔洞穴中搭建住所。比库们将枯草丢向空地,坐于低处修行,专注正法。两山之间有大洞,通风明朗,此乃《清净道》中所说。称为山林处,即进入城乡界外,人迹罕至之处,称之为森林居所。旷野即无遮蔽之地。心要心念起,此处搭建衣舍安住。堆积枯草和秸谷堆。大枯草堆被清理后在山洞附近建起住所。比库们弃置草叶于路外,坐于低处修定修行。此地适合修行,心专注。因故有此教诲。
Pacchābhattanti bhattassa pacchato. Piṇḍapātapaṭikkantoti piṇḍapātapariyesanato paṭikkanto. Pallaṅkanti samantato ūrubaddhāsanaṃ. Ābhujitvāti bandhitvā. Ujuṃ kāyaṃ paṇidhāyāti uparimaṃ sarīraṃ ujuṃ ṭhapetvā aṭṭhārasa piṭṭhikaṇṭakaṭṭhike koṭiyā koṭiṃ paṭipādetvā. Evañhi nisinnassa cammamaṃsanhārūni na paṇamanti. Athassa yā tesaṃ paṇamanapaccayā khaṇe khaṇe vedanā uppajjeyyuṃ, tā nuppajjanti. Tāsu anuppajjamānāsu cittaṃ ekaggaṃ hoti, kammaṭṭhānaṃ na paripatati, vuḍḍhiṃ phātiṃ vepullaṃ upagacchati. Parimukhaṃ satiṃ upaṭṭhapetvāti kammaṭṭhānābhimukhaṃ satiṃ ṭhapayitvā. Mukhasamīpe vā katvāti attho. Teneva vibhaṅge vuttaṃ – ‘‘ayaṃ sati upaṭṭhitā hoti sūpaṭṭhitā nāsikagge vā mukhanimitte vā, tena vuccati parimukhaṃ satiṃ upaṭṭhapetvā’’ti (vibha. 537). Athavā parīti pariggahaṭṭho. Mukhanti niyyānaṭṭho. Satīti upaṭṭhānaṭṭho. Tena vuccati – ‘‘parimukhaṃ sati’’nti. Evaṃ paṭisambhidāyaṃ vuttanayenapettha attho daṭṭhabbo. Tatrāyaṃ saṅkhepo – ‘‘pariggahitaniyyānasatiṃ katvā’’ti.
“后随饭”是指饭后行动。托钵回走是指托钵乞食后回行。床铺是指四周系有绑带的座席。“绑束”是指束缚限制。“端正身形”是指以端正姿势安坐,上身挺直,历经十八节骨椎,用数以亿计的细胞构成身体。如此端坐时,皮肉骨骼的分解停止。若因不成立此端坐而引起痛苦,那些痛苦产生吗?未产生时心专注,无法生起所修习法门,反而增长、扩展、巨大。因为此时正念在面前守护,意指安住身边的专注。故《训诂经》中说:“此正念得以安住时,身前鼻边口面均端在正中,这即谓面前正念。”又或说收束住。口意指出入管道,念是指守护由此处意念。故称为“面前正念”。综上理解,此处简要意涵为:“专心守护收束之出入念。”
§217
217.Abhijjhaṃ loketi ettha lujjanapalujjanaṭṭhena pañcupādānakkhandhā loko, tasmā pañcasu upādānakkhandhesu rāgaṃ pahāya kāmacchandaṃ vikkhambhetvāti ayametthattho. Vigatābhijjhenāti vikkhambhanavasena pahīnattā vigatābhijjhena, na cakkhuviññāṇasadisenāti attho. Abhijjhāya cittaṃ parisodhetīti abhijjhāto cittaṃ parimoceti. Yathā taṃ sā muñcati ceva, muñcitvā ca na puna gaṇhati, evaṃ karotīti attho. Byāpādapadosaṃ pahāyātiādīsupi eseva nayo. Byāpajjati iminā cittaṃ pūtikummāsādayo viya purimapakatiṃ vijahatīti byāpādo. Vikārāpattiyā padussati, paraṃ vā padūseti vināsetīti padoso. Ubhayametaṃ kodhassevādhivacanaṃ . Thinaṃ cittagelaññaṃ. Middhaṃ cetasikagelaññaṃ, thinañca middhañca thinamiddhaṃ. Ālokasaññīti rattimpi divādiṭṭhālokasañjānanasamatthāya vigatanīvaraṇāya parisuddhāya saññāya samannāgato. Sato sampajānoti satiyā ca ñāṇena ca samannāgato. Idaṃ ubhayaṃ ālokasaññāya upakārattā vuttaṃ. Uddhaccañca kukkuccañca uddhaccakukkuccaṃ. Tiṇṇavicikicchoti vicikicchaṃ taritvā atikkamitvā ṭhito. ‘‘Kathamidaṃ kathamida’’nti evaṃ nappavattatīti akathaṃkathī. Kusalesu dhammesūti anavajjesu dhammesu. ‘‘Ime nu kho kusalā kathamime kusalā’’ti evaṃ na vicikicchati. Na kaṅkhatīti attho. Ayamettha saṅkhepo. Imesu pana nīvaraṇesu vacanatthalakkhaṇādibhedato yaṃ vattabbaṃ siyā, taṃ sabbaṃ visuddhimagge vuttaṃ.
贪欲世界者,此处以贪恚爱欲之所著着,五种取蕴为世界,故于五种取蕴舍弃贪爱,断除欲邪,此即其义。所谓无贪欲者,是指借由断除烦恼而灭绝,非如眼识所摄受之义。谓心由贪欲得净,即心得解脱。譬如放下物品后继续放下而不再取回,如此为行。所谓断除嗔恚等污秽者,也是此理。嗔怒即心若臭秽之气似,若扰乱前方如臭秽,是故名嗔恚。污秽为污染,能坏灭诸善或使其堕落,此为恶业。嗔恚与怒为同义。昏沉为心之迟钝沉闷。瞋恚与昏沉共称烦恼之二。昼夜之光明觉知,指觉知营为无染净净的,谓对色等现象之清净觉照。此具正念与智慧,能有所分辨。此光明觉知为二者之辅助。掉举与悔恨即心理之躁动与自责。超越疑虑,指已断除犹豫犹疑,处于坚立正见之境界。以疑问言“此何为此何为”,即无解者。所谓善法者,指无过秽之法。谓“这些乃善法乎?此不生疑惑”,即无疑心也。此即简略意旨。于此诸烦恼依表达义相区别,皆已详述于清净之道中。
§218
218. Yā panāyaṃ seyyathāpi mahārājāti upamā vuttā. Tattha iṇaṃ ādāyāti vaḍḍhiyā dhanaṃ gahetvā. Byantiṃ kareyyāti vigatantaṃ kareyya , yathā tesaṃ kākaṇikamattopi pariyanto nāma nāvasissati, evaṃ kareyya; sabbaso paṭiniyyāteyyāti attho. Tato nidānanti āṇaṇyanidānaṃ. So hi ‘‘aṇaṇomhī’’ti āvajjanto balavapāmojjaṃ labhati, somanassaṃ adhigacchati, tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘labhetha pāmojjaṃ, adhigaccheyya somanassa’’nti.
如大王般喻,此中取鸟网喻故。谓取鸟网以增财宝。谓当除去网,若彼网若有破漏,虽小片断亦不足留存,应当废除,完全废除。此即“尽除尽废”之义。所谓缘由者,则为缘起之理。谓因“我为获网”而得力量与欢喜,得胜喜乐者,如是所说:“当得欢喜,应当获得欢喜”。
§219
219. Visabhāgavedanuppattiyā kakaceneva catuiriyāpathaṃ chindanto ābādhatīti ābādho, svāssa atthīti ābādhiko. Taṃ samuṭṭhānena dukkhena dukkhito. Adhimattagilānoti bāḷhagilāno. Nacchādeyyāti adhimattabyādhiparetatāya na rucceyya. Balamattāti balameva, balañcassa kāye na bhaveyyāti attho. Tatonidānanti ārogyanidānaṃ. Tassa hi – ‘‘arogomhī’’ti āvajjayato tadubhayaṃ hoti. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘labhetha pāmojjaṃ, adhigaccheyya somanassa’’nti.
分割疼痛之生起,如同鸟断四肢之痛苦,称为障碍,意谓自身的危险。此痛苦生起即因痛苦。谓病状厉害者为重病者。谓“不可遮蔽”,意为因病状疼痛,不应再施加使其难堪之物。谓力强即力本身,不应于身体生力亏。此即缘起之因称为健康之缘。谓因“我愿健康”而得力,此二兼有。亦如上所述:“当得欢喜,应当获得欢喜”。
§220
220.Na cassa kiñci bhogānaṃ vayoti kākaṇikamattampi bhogānaṃ vayo na bhaveyya. Tatonidānanti bandhanāmokkhanidānaṃ. Sesaṃ vuttanayeneva sabbapadesu yojetabbaṃ.
不生任何财物衰败之果,即使极微之财物亦不产生败落。此即作解脱束缚之因。以上说明之理,处处皆当适用。
§221-222
221-222.Anattādhīnoti na attani adhīno, attano ruciyā kiñci kātuṃ na labhati. Parādhīnoti paresu adhīno parasseva ruciyā vattati. Na yena kāmaṃ gamoti yena disābhāgenassa gantukāmatā hoti, icchā uppajjati gamanāya, tena gantuṃ na labhati. Dāsabyāti dāsabhāvā. Bhujissoti attano santako. Tatonidānanti bhujissanidānaṃ. Kantāraddhānamagganti kantāraṃ addhānamaggaṃ, nirudakaṃ dīghamagganti attho. Tatonidānanti khemantabhūminidānaṃ.
无我之奴役者,谓我心未得役使,不能由己之趣好获取所求。异我之奴役者,则为他人之趣好所役。谓不是因欲去向特定处所,乃行欲生起,欲行而不能至彼。所谓为奴,即奴隶之状。自主者即身体之主。缘起之因谓为牢狱之路。移住荒野之道,意即荒野之行路,是为到达安全之处之道。此即缘起称为安稳之处之因。
§223
223.Ime pañca nīvaraṇe appahīneti ettha bhagavā appahīnakāmacchandanīvaraṇaṃ iṇasadisaṃ, sesāni rogādisadisāni katvā dasseti. Tatrāyaṃ sadisatā. Yo hi paresaṃ iṇaṃ gahetvā vināseti, so tehi iṇaṃ dehīti vuccamānopi pharusaṃ vuccamānopi bajjhamānopi vadhīyamānopi kiñci paṭibāhituṃ na sakkoti, sabbaṃ titikkhati. Titikkhākāraṇaṃ hissa taṃ iṇaṃ hoti. Evameva yo yamhi kāmacchandena rajjati, taṇhāsahagatena taṃ vatthuṃ gaṇhati, so tena pharusaṃ vuccamānopi bajjhamānopi vadhīyamānopi sabbaṃ titikkhati, titikkhākāraṇaṃ hissa so kāmacchando hoti, gharasāmikehi vadhīyamānānaṃ itthīnaṃ viyāti, evaṃ iṇaṃ viya kāmacchando daṭṭhabbo.
此五种障碍一旦断除,世尊于此说欲之障碍如驱逐瘴气,其他种种病及污秽亦随之消除。此中有清净之名。若有人夺他人欲爱,毁灭其欲,如此之人虽称为刽子手、罪过所斥,或被毒打,或被杀害,亦不能损害其已断除之心念,断除之因即此贪欲。犹如被房东驱逐之妾,外人第他人之财物,不能贪染夺取,如是已断除欲贪者,虽当受刮斥、殴打、杀害,亦不能损害其心之净洁,故此乃贪欲之象。
Yathā pana pittarogāturo madhusakkarādīsupi dinnesu pittarogāturatāya tesaṃ rasaṃ na vindati, ‘‘tittakaṃ tittaka’’nti uggiratiyeva. Evameva byāpannacitto hitakāmehi ācariyupajjhāyehi appamattakampi ovadiyamāno ovādaṃ na gaṇhati. ‘‘Ati viya me tumhe upaddavethā’’tiādīni vatvā vibbhamati. Pittarogāturatāya so puriso madhusakkarādīnaṃ viya kodhāturatāya jhānasukhādibhedaṃ sāsanarasaṃ na vindatīti. Evaṃ rogo viya byāpādo daṭṭhabbo.
正如因肝病发作而患病之人,即便给予蜂蜜糖等甘美之物,因肝疾病痛之故,不能从中得到甘美滋味,只觉得苦涩不堪。此人内心受病侵扰,虽受师长教诲,不论轻重戒告,亦不接受,常自言:“你们过于干涉我”,表现出如蟋蟀般鸣叫的愤怒。此人因肝病所苦,正如因愤怒之疾痛,不能从禅那安乐之类教法甘味中得到滋味。由此可见,烦恼之病,亦当视如实见。
Yathā pana nakkhattadivase bandhanāgāre baddho puriso nakkhattassa neva ādiṃ na majjhaṃ na pariyosānaṃ passati. So dutiyadivase mutto aho hiyyo nakkhattaṃ manāpaṃ, aho naccaṃ, aho gītantiādīni sutvāpi paṭivacanaṃ na deti. Kiṃ kāraṇā? Nakkhattassa ananubhūtattā. Evameva thinamiddhābhibhūto bhikkhu vicittanayepi dhammassavane pavattamāne neva tassa ādiṃ na majjhaṃ na pariyosānaṃ jānāti. Sopi uṭṭhite dhammassavane aho dhammassavanaṃ, aho kāraṇaṃ, aho upamāti dhammassavanassa vaṇṇaṃ bhaṇamānānaṃ sutvāpi paṭivacanaṃ na deti. Kiṃ kāraṇā? Thinamiddhavasena dhammakathāya ananubhūtattā. Evaṃ bandhanāgāraṃ viya thinamiddhaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ.
又如被捆绑夜宿监牢之人,在星辰刻限之前,未见到始末,次日获释后,虽听闻晨星、舞蹈、歌声等欢愉之事,仍不回应何以如此?因为他对星辰根本无所体验。此亦如被昏沉蒙蔽的比库,心意散乱,方闻法时对一切始、中、终皆不能明了。即使起身听法,也不能给予任何回答。因其昏沉之重,无法体验法的趣味。如同监牢囚禁,昏沉亦应如是观察。
Yathā pana nakkhattaṃ kīḷantopi dāso – ‘‘idaṃ nāma accāyikaṃ karaṇīyaṃ atthi, sīghaṃ tattha gacchāhi. No ce gacchasi, hatthapādaṃ vā te chindāmi kaṇṇanāsaṃ vā’’ti vutto sīghaṃ gacchatiyeva . Nakkhattassa ādimajjhapariyosānaṃ anubhavituṃ na labhati, kasmā? Parādhīnatāya, evameva vinaye apakataññunā vivekatthāya araññaṃ paviṭṭhenāpi kismiñcideva antamaso kappiyamaṃsepi akappiyamaṃsasaññāya uppannāya vivekaṃ pahāya sīlavisodhanatthaṃ vinayadharassa santikaṃ gantabbaṃ hoti, vivekasukhaṃ anubhavituṃ na labhati, kasmā? Uddhaccakukkuccābhibhūtatāyāti. Evaṃ dāsabyaṃ viya uddhaccakukkuccaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ.
又如奴隶被告知:“这是领主的命令,应速速前往,若迟延,将断手脚、割耳鼻”,于是奴隷遂即迅速前行。因其被拘束,无法认识四周始末缘故。比库虽出林入僧院修习清净戒律以求解脱,但若被烦恼躁动所困,即使当面具足断疑欢喜,仍不能体验离欲禅悦,为何?因烦躁疑惧之蔽。此犹奴隸般的躁动烦恼当加以观察。
Yathā pana kantāraddhānamaggappaṭipanno puriso corehi manussānaṃ viluttokāsaṃ pahatokāsañca disvā daṇḍakasaddenapi sakuṇasaddenapi ‘‘corā āgatā’’ti ussaṅkitaparisaṅkitova hoti, gacchatipi tiṭṭhatipi nivattatipi, gataṭṭhānato agataṭṭhānameva bahutaraṃ hoti. So kicchena kasirena khemantabhūmiṃ pāpuṇāti vā na vā pāpuṇāti. Evameva yassa aṭṭhasu ṭhānesu vicikicchā uppannā hoti, so – ‘‘buddho nu kho, no nu kho buddho’’tiādinā nayena vicikicchanto adhimuccitvā saddhāya gaṇhituṃ na sakkoti. Asakkonto maggaṃ vā phalaṃ vā na pāpuṇātīti. Yathā kantāraddhānamagge – ‘‘corā atthi natthī’’ti punappunaṃ āsappanaparisappanaṃ apariyogāhanaṃ chambhitattaṃ cittassa uppādento khemantapattiyā antarāyaṃ karoti, evaṃ vicikicchāpi – ‘‘buddho nu kho, na buddho’’tiādinā nayena punappunaṃ āsappanaparisappanaṃ apariyogāhanaṃ chambhitattaṃ cittassa uppādayamānā ariyabhūmippattiyā antarāyaṃ karotīti kantāraddhānamaggo viya vicikicchā daṭṭhabbā.
又如有人困于荒野,在盗贼与行人纷扰的地方,看见有盗贼又有行人,犹如多处往来颠倒,时行时止,常迷乱不定。此人辛苦地勉力到达安身之地,竟未必能得安乐。如同在八处禅地生疑惑者,心迷惑而不信佛陀教理,以此心障碍故,不能入道证果。犹如置身荒野般多生疑惑,此亦当如实观察。
§224
224. Idāni – ‘‘seyyathāpi, mahārāja, āṇaṇya’’nti ettha bhagavā pahīnakāmacchandanīvaraṇaṃ āṇaṇyasadisaṃ, sesāni ārogyādisadisāni katvā dasseti. Tatrāyaṃ sadisatā, yathā hi puriso iṇaṃ ādāya kammante payojetvā samiddhataṃ patto – ‘‘idaṃ iṇaṃ nāma palibodhamūla’’nti cintetvā savaḍḍhikaṃ iṇaṃ niyyātetvā paṇṇaṃ phālāpeyya. Athassa tato paṭṭhāya neva koci dūtaṃ peseti, na paṇṇaṃ. So iṇasāmike disvāpi sace icchati, āsanā uṭṭhahati, no ce na uṭṭhahati, kasmā? Tehi saddhiṃ nillepatāya alaggatāya. Evameva bhikkhu – ‘‘ayaṃ kāmacchando nāma palibodhamūla’’nti cintetvā cha dhamme bhāvetvā kāmacchandanīvaraṇaṃ pajahati. Te pana cha dhamme mahāsatipaṭṭhāne vaṇṇayissāma. Tassevaṃ pahīnakāmacchandassa yathā iṇamuttassa purisassa iṇassāmike disvā neva bhayaṃ na chambhitattaṃ hoti. Evameva paravatthumhi neva saṅgo na baddho hoti. Dibbānipi rūpāni passato kileso na samudācarati. Tasmā bhagavā āṇaṇyamiva kāmacchandappahānaṃ āha.
今当说“譬如大王犹如蜂巢”,此处世尊以抛弃贪欲及烦恼为喻。譬如有人采集蜂巢带水煮蜜,知“此蜂巢之蜜如苦金属”。密蜂之蜜熟后无须另派使者运出蜜罐。此人见蜜,若意欲取用,则起身;若不欲,则不起立,因刚刚从蜂巢取蜜而相应伴随之故。比库亦如是思惟“此贪欲名为苦根”,修护六法,将贪欲苦恼弃绝。此贪欲断后,如蜜蜂离巢,闻之不惧、不忧。如是剥离贪欲,如实观照六法。世尊以譬喻说明断贪欲之法。
Yathā pana so pittarogāturo puriso bhesajjakiriyāya taṃ rogaṃ vūpasametvā tato paṭṭhāya madhusakkarādīnaṃ rasaṃ vindati. Evameva bhikkhu ‘‘ayaṃ byāpādo nāma mahā anatthakaro’’ti cha dhamme bhāvetvā byāpādanīvaraṇaṃ pajahati. Sabbanīvaraṇesu cha dhamme mahāsatipaṭṭhāneyeva vaṇṇayissāma. Na kevalañca teyeva, yepi thinamiddhādīnaṃ pahānāya bhāvetabbā, tepi sabbe tattheva vaṇṇayissāma. So evaṃ pahīnabyāpādo yathā pittarogavimutto puriso madhusakkarādīnaṃ rasaṃ sampiyāyamāno paṭisevati, evameva ācārapaṇṇattiādīni sikkhāpadāni sirasā sampaṭicchitvā sampiyāyamāno sikkhati. Tasmā bhagavā ārogyamiva byāpādappahānaṃ āha.
又如因肝疾困扰之人,依药疗病后,渐得安息,方得服用蜜糖等甘美。比库亦如是修习六法,断恶毒烦恼,如医治大病者,断除烦恼害。诸烦恼皆应由大觉正智观察,断除,此非唯断昏沉等烦恼者也,此诸皆当在处前详述。复如断肝疾者饮甘美所病甘美渐生,业习戒行悉皆检查精严后,能和顺学,此乃世尊以健康解烦恼之喻,示现忿恚烦恼断除之义。
Yathā so nakkhattadivase bandhanāgāraṃ pavesito puriso aparasmiṃ nakkhattadivase – ‘‘pubbepi ahaṃ pamādadosena baddho, tena nakkhattaṃ nānubhaviṃ. Idāni appamatto bhavissāmī’’ti yathāssa paccatthikā okāsaṃ na labhanti, evaṃ appamatto hutvā nakkhattaṃ anubhavitvā – ‘aho nakkhattaṃ, aho nakkhatta’nti udānaṃ udānesi, evameva bhikkhu – ‘‘idaṃ thinamiddhaṃ nāma mahāanatthakara’’nti cha dhamme bhāvetvā thinamiddhanīvaraṇaṃ pajahati, so evaṃ pahīnathinamiddho yathā bandhanā mutto puriso sattāhampi nakkhattassa ādimajjhapariyosānaṃ anubhavati, evameva dhammanakkhattassa ādimajjhapariyosānaṃ anubhavanto saha paṭisambhidāhi arahattaṃ pāpuṇāti. Tasmā bhagavā bandhanā mokkhamiva thinamiddhappahānaṃ āha.
譬如有人身陷牢笼囹圄,遭遇夜晚幽幽星月之时,念及以往因疏忽妄念而受缚,未曾觉察星辰之美;今当警觉,以醒悟之心观照星辰。若此时不曾遇得转机解脱,则复陷于无明沉睡之境。然而,若能正觉觉知星辰变化,不断以欢喜赞叹此光明发声号叫,如此比库,在观修《困乏昏沉》法门时亦复正念觉知,断除困乏昏沉之碍。彼即如同获释于牢笼之人,七日七夜悉受星辰起灭的实相体验。比库观照诸法起灭之相,同此般正慧所成,证得阿拉汉果。是故世尊譬喻《昏沉断除》犹如监狱得释。
Yathā pana dāso kiñcideva mittaṃ upanissāya sāmikānaṃ dhanaṃ datvā attānaṃ bhujissaṃ katvā tato paṭṭhāya yaṃ icchati, taṃ karoti. Evameva bhikkhu – ‘‘idaṃ uddhaccakukkuccaṃ nāma mahā anatthakara’’nti cha dhamme bhāvetvā uddhaccakukkuccaṃ pajahati. So evaṃ pahīnauddhaccakukkucco yathā bhujisso puriso yaṃ icchati, taṃ karoti, na taṃ koci balakkārena tato nivatteti , evameva yathā sukhaṃ nekkhammapaṭipadaṃ paṭipajjati, na taṃ uddhaccakukkuccaṃ balakkārena tato nivatteti. Tasmā bhagavā bhujissaṃ viya uddhaccakukkuccappahānaṃ āha.
又譬如奴婢依托亲友,饶获主家财富,乃自为长袖善舞之身,得酬劳而作所欲为。比库观察《掉举追悔》(焦躁忧虑)此大恶导根,反观内心,即能断除掉举追悔。彼如解脱主人枷锁的奴婢,依其所欲自然运用身心,不受强迫而退转。亦如安然修行出家生活,此烦恼不能强迫驱散。由此,世尊比喻释掉举追悔犹如奴婢获自由之乐。
Yathā balavā puriso hatthasāraṃ gahetvā sajjāvudho saparivāro kantāraṃ paṭipajjeyya, taṃ corā dūratova disvā palāyeyyuṃ. So sotthinā taṃ kantāraṃ nittharitvā khemantaṃ patto haṭṭhatuṭṭho assa. Evameva bhikkhu ‘‘ayaṃ vicikicchā nāma mahā anatthakārikā’’ti cha dhamme bhāvetvā vicikicchaṃ pajahati . So evaṃ pahīnavicikiccho yathā balavā puriso sajjāvudho saparivāro nibbhayo core tiṇaṃ viya agaṇetvā sotthinā nikkhamitvā khemantabhūmiṃ pāpuṇāti, evameva bhikkhu duccaritakantāraṃ nittharitvā paramaṃ khemantabhūmiṃ amataṃ mahānibbānaṃ pāpuṇāti. Tasmā bhagavā khemantabhūmiṃ viya vicikicchāpahānaṃ āha.
如有壮健男子,披坚执锐,携众随从,行进山谷野林。若遇盗贼远见其威猛,即刻逃散。此人可安然穿越峻岭,稳得安适住所,并安然无恙。比库观修《疑惑断除》法,了知疑惑为大逆害,当自断除。断除疑惑者,若如高强壮士,无惧盗贼之惧,安然行进林野,远离恶道。由此,世尊譬喻《疑惑断除》如壮士神通渡过险谷,抵达安稳彼岸。
§225
225.Pāmojjaṃ jāyatīti tuṭṭhākāro jāyati. Pamuditassa pīti jāyatīti tuṭṭhassa sakalasarīraṃ khobhayamānā pīti jāyati. Pītimanassa kāyo passambhatīti pītisampayuttacittassa puggalassa nāmakāyo passambhati, vigatadaratho hoti. Sukhaṃ vedetīti kāyikampi cetasikampi sukhaṃ vedayati. Cittaṃ samādhiyatīti iminā nekkhammasukhena sukhitassa upacāravasenapi appanāvasenapi cittaṃ samādhiyati.
225.喜悦生起时,即生满足之相。喜悦得时,身心俱感欢喜,心念宁静,无诸妄恼。感得快乐,身体与心灵同享此乐。正因此离欲之乐,修行者内心安住,调息入定。
Paṭhamajjhānakathā初禅论
§226
226.So vivicceva kāmehi…pe… paṭhamaṃ jhānaṃ upasampajja viharatītiādi pana upacārasamādhinā samāhite citte uparivisesadassanatthaṃ appanāsamādhinā samāhite citte tassa samādhino pabhedadassanatthaṃ vuttanti veditabbaṃ. Imameva kāyanti imaṃ karajakāyaṃ. Abhisandetīti temeti sneheti, sabbattha pavattapītisukhaṃ karoti. Parisandetīti samantato sandeti. Paripūretīti vāyunā bhastaṃ viya pūreti. Parippharatīti samantato phusati. Sabbāvato kāyassāti assa bhikkhuno sabbakoṭṭhāsavato kāyassa kiñci upādinnakasantatipavattiṭṭhāne chavimaṃsalohitānugataṃ aṇumattampi ṭhānaṃ paṭhamajjhānasukhena aphuṭaṃ nāma na hoti.
226.譬如出离欲乐,专注集中的第一禅初入,即依正行调伏之心,息心寂照,乃至入定之心状。所谓调伏,引导心安住,观察心定之分别,明了层次。此心此身即此智慧身。若念念亲近,爱恋相续,遍洒喜乐,安抚诸苦。滋润身心,充满气息,如风吹拂般浸润无遗。触及身体四方,如微微拂过,悉归依第一禅安乐住处。乃是比库染污集流身心,于第一禅乐中无有一丝烦恼拘束。
§227
227.Dakkhoti cheko paṭibalo nhānīyacuṇṇāni kātuñceva payojetuñca sannetuñca. Kaṃsathāleti yena kenaci lohena katabhājane. Mattikabhājanaṃ pana thiraṃ na hoti. Sannentassa bhijjati. Tasmā taṃ na dasseti. Paripphosakaṃparipphosakanti siñcitvā siñcitvā. Sanneyyāti vāmahatthena kaṃsathālaṃ gahetvā dakkhiṇahatthena pamāṇayuttaṃ udakaṃ siñcitvā siñcitvā parimaddanto piṇḍaṃ kareyya. Snehānugatāti udakasinehena anugatā. Snehaparetāti udakasinehena pariggahitā. Santarabāhirāti saddhiṃ antopadesena ceva bahipadesena ca sabbatthakameva udakasinehena phuṭāti attho. Na ca paggharaṇīti na ca bindu bindu udakaṃ paggharati, sakkā hoti hatthenapi dvīhipi tīhipi aṅgulīhi gahetuṃ ovaṭṭikāyapi kātunti attho.
227.熟练者能辨别金银丹砂、砾石与红化土。金属器皿虽坚硬,却不稳定;泥土反而坚固不动。红土易碎损,故不相用。浸湿涂饰者,则纹理细密。浸水浸湿之意,乃用左手持铜钵,右手量水,湿润后揉捏壳子。所谓顺水之意,是指水浸润情感,滋润众物。内外合缔,乃合而为一,以水润泽及运作周全。此处无多余取舍之义,亦无滴滴水分分的分割,轻轻拨弄即可轻易持握,不必费力。
Dutiyajjhānakathā第二禅论
§228-229
228-229. Dutiyajjhānasukhūpamāyaṃ ubbhidodakoti ubbhinnaudako, na heṭṭhā ubbhijjitvā uggacchanakaudako. Antoyeva pana ubbhijjanakaudakoti attho. Āyamukhanti āgamanamaggo. Devoti megho. Kālena kālanti kāle kāle, anvaddhamāsaṃ vā anudasāhaṃ vāti attho. Dhāranti vuṭṭhiṃ. Na anuppaveccheyyāti na ca paveseyya, na vasseyyāti attho. Sītā vāridhārā ubbhijjitvāti sītaṃ dhāraṃ uggantvā rahadaṃ pūrayamānaṃ ubbhijjitvā. Heṭṭhā uggacchanaudakañhi uggantvā uggantvā bhijjantaṃ udakaṃ khobheti, catūhi disāhi pavisanaudakaṃ purāṇapaṇṇatiṇakaṭṭhadaṇḍakādīhi udakaṃ khobheti, vuṭṭhiudakaṃ dhārānipātapubbuḷakehi udakaṃ khobheti. Sannisinnameva pana hutvā iddhinimmitamiva uppajjamānaṃ udakaṃ imaṃ padesaṃ pharati, imaṃ padesaṃ na pharatīti natthi, tena aphuṭokāso nāma na hotīti. Tattha rahado viya karajakāyo. Udakaṃ viya dutiyajjhānasukhaṃ. Sesaṃ purimanayeneva veditabbaṃ.
第228至229节。关于第二禅的快乐像是溢出的水,称为溢出水,而不是低处泛起的上涌水。然其本意却是上溢水。此在此教法中表示入与出之道。天者指云。时间者表示时节,有时期间断,有时连续不断。蓄积表示保持体积。不可使其溢出,也不可使其进入或停留,此即意。冷水流溢,即指盛载冷水,向上溢出而满溢隐蔽。若将上溢水向下反复溢出,水则浑浊。如四方浸入之水,由古叶、瓦、竹枝等物浸入,水亦变浑浊。唯有水静止不动,如神力所致而产生的水流,方可溢出此地而不溢出彼地,不产生溢出空隙。比这里众多者,如池潭似水。水即比第二禅的快乐。剩余者应如前所述理解。
Tatiyajjhānakathā第三禅论
§230-231
230-231. Tatiyajjhānasukhūpamāyaṃ uppalāni ettha santīti uppalinī. Sesapadadvayepi eseva nayo. Ettha ca setarattanīlesu yaṃ kiñci uppalaṃ uppalameva. Ūnakasatapattaṃ puṇḍarīkaṃ, satapattaṃ padumaṃ. Pattaniyamaṃ vā vināpi setaṃ padumaṃ, rattaṃ puṇḍarīkanti ayamettha vinicchayo. Udakānuggatānīti udakato na uggatāni. Anto nimuggaposīnīti udakatalassa anto nimuggāniyeva hutvā posīni, vaḍḍhīnīti attho. Sesaṃ purimanayeneva veditabbaṃ.
第230至231节。关于第三禅的快乐,莲花在此称为莲女。余下的两句同上。此处于白色、红色、蓝色的莲花,任何一种莲花均称为莲花。如芦苇叶上的莲花,红莲花朵。叶片是否规则,无论是否连带白色的红莲,在此均作决定。所谓“附着于水”,是指不浮于水面之上。所谓“淹没入水”,指水之底部沉入水中,与水相连生长。此即其意。剩余者应如前所述理解。
Catutthajjhānakathā第四禅论
§232-233
232-233. Catutthajjhānasukhūpamāyaṃ parisuddhena cetasā pariyodātenāti ettha nirupakkilesaṭṭhena parisuddhaṃ, pabhassaraṭṭhena pariyodātanti veditabbaṃ. Odātena vatthenāti idaṃ utupharaṇatthaṃ vuttaṃ. Kiliṭṭhavatthena hi utupharaṇaṃ na hoti, taṅkhaṇadhotaparisuddhena utupharaṇaṃ balavaṃ hoti. Imissāya hi upamāya vatthaṃ viya karajakāyo, utupharaṇaṃ viya catutthajjhānasukhaṃ. Tasmā yathā sunhātassa purisassa parisuddhaṃ vatthaṃ sasīsaṃ pārupitvā nisinnassa sarīrato utu sabbameva vatthaṃ pharati. Na koci vatthassa aphuṭokāso hoti. Evaṃ catutthajjhānasukhena bhikkhuno karajakāyassa na koci okāso aphuṭo hotīti. Evamettha attho daṭṭhabbo. Imesaṃ pana catunnaṃ jhānānaṃ anupadavaṇṇanā ca bhāvanānayo ca visuddhimagge vuttoti idha na vitthārito.
第232至233节。关于第四禅的快乐,此处说以净洁无染的心清净,且明亮而清楚,应当理解为最清净的、不受杂染的境界,明亮而通透,能审视万物。所谓“清净”,即无染污。所谓“明亮”,是心光明而澄澈。所谓“审视”,即观察、观察之意。污秽的衣物显然不能表现出明亮光洁,唯有染色整齐干净的衣物才能显示光彩。上述的比喻是将第四禅的快乐比作净洁而有光泽的衣物。因此如同夏日正当时,男子穿净布衣坐卧,其身体周围一切均显现出纯净无瑕。没有衣物会造成空隙不完整。故第四禅的快乐对比禅定身体,无任何空隙未被完整覆盖。如此意思应当理解。最后说明这四禅的非增修及修行引导的内容,尽管在此未详述。
Ettāvatā cesa rūpajjhānalābhīyeva, na arūpajjhānalābhīti na veditabbo. Na hi aṭṭhasu samāpattīsu cuddasahākārehi ciṇṇavasībhāvaṃ vinā upari abhiññādhigamo hoti. Pāḷiyaṃ pana rūpajjhānāniyeva āgatāni. Arūpajjhānāni āharitvā kathetabbāni.
至此,只应了解这四禅之得,与非色禅的得不同。非色禅不得见。因在八次定中,十三种伴随,其中除见处以外,不可能有通达上位知识。巴利文中只有色禅得来称为色禅。非色禅得来则须由他人带来方能谈及。
Vipassanāñāṇakathā观智论
§234
234.So evaṃ samāhite citte…pe… āneñjappatteti so cuddasahākārehi aṭṭhasu samāpattīsu ciṇṇavasībhāvo bhikkhūti dasseti . Sesamettha visuddhimagge vuttanayena veditabbaṃ. Ñāṇadassanāya cittaṃ abhinīharatīti ettha ñāṇadassananti maggañāṇampi, vuccati phalañāṇampi, sabbaññutaññāṇampi, paccavekkhaṇañāṇampi, vipassanāñāṇampi. ‘‘Kiṃ nu kho, āvuso, ñāṇadassanavisuddhatthaṃ bhagavati brahmacariyaṃ vussatī’’ti (mahāni. 1.257) ettha hi maggañāṇaṃ ñāṇadassananti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Ayamañño uttarimanussadhammo alamariyañāṇadassanaviseso adhigato phāsuvihāro’’ti (ma. ni. 1.328) ettha phalañāṇaṃ. ‘‘Bhagavatopi kho ñāṇadassanaṃ udapādi sattāhakālaṅkato āḷāro kālāmo’’ti (mahāva. 10) ettha sabbaññutaññāṇaṃ. ‘‘Ñāṇañca pana me dassanaṃ udapādi akuppā me vimutti, ayamantimā jātī’’ti (mahāva. 16) ettha paccavekkhaṇañāṇaṃ idha pana ñāṇadassanāya cittanti idaṃ vipassanāñāṇaṃ ñāṇadassananti vuttanti.
第234节。如此安住的心……诸后文……“心与十三种伴随中的八种定相和谐一致”,就是说在十三伴随中,八次定状态的心是稳定持久的,称为比库。此处根据清净之道的讲述应当知晓。所谓“知见显现心引导”,即所谓“知见”,包含道之智、果之智、遍知智、检视智、观智等。“那么阿嫂啊,世尊以何种纯净之知见生活于圣道?”(《大师典》1.257)这里道之智称为知见。“另有高人常言,非人间圣道,而是无伪真知见之特异觉知伴随修行”(《大师尼》1.328)这里指果之智。“世尊亦显现知见,常伴随于有情,除去烦恼之灯,如荧光明亮”(《大师大》10)这里指遍知智。“知识对我显现,我的解脱宁静不动,此为最终出生”(《大师大》16)这里指检视智。此处的“心之知见显现”指观智而知见之。
Abhinīharatīti vipassanāñāṇassa nibbattanatthāya tanninnaṃ tappoṇaṃ tappabbhāraṃ karoti. Rūpīti ādīnamattho vuttoyeva. Odanakummāsūpacayoti odanena ceva kummāsena ca upacito vaḍḍhito. Aniccucchādanaparimaddanabhedanaviddhaṃsanadhammoti hutvā abhāvaṭṭhena aniccadhammo. Duggandhavighātatthāya tanuvilepanena ucchādanadhammo. Aṅgapaccaṅgābādhavinodanatthāya khuddakasambāhanena parimaddanadhammo. Daharakāle vā ūrūsu sayāpetvā gabbhāvāsena dussaṇṭhitānaṃ tesaṃ tesaṃ aṅgānaṃ saṇṭhānasampādanatthaṃ añchanapīḷanādivasena parimaddanadhammo. Evaṃ pariharitopi bhedanaviddhaṃsanadhammo bhijjati ceva vikirati ca, evaṃ sabhāvoti attho. Tattha rūpī cātumahābhūtikotiādīsu chahi padehi samudayo kathito. Aniccapadena saddhiṃ pacchimehi dvīhi atthaṅgamo. Ettha sitaṃ ettha paṭibaddhanti ettha cātumahābhūtike kāye nissitañca paṭibaddhañca.
所谓“引导”,是说观智使心宁静断灭烦恼,为此承担心之负荷。色乃其最初义。所谓水与湿气之积聚,乃水与湿气结合而增长。所谓无常尘埃遮盖、剥落及糜烂之现象,是由其无常性所致。由于恶臭污染,身体涂抹以细薄涂层以防止糜烂。肢体疼痛使得局部涂抹脂膜起到保护和修复作用。幼时,婴儿卧于臂弯,母胎期间,因胎内肌肉受到压力,形成肌肉紧张和挤压涂层。如此种种防护及破损剥落现象,称为“本性”,是自然现象。这里论述色之生起,涉及四大元素等六个部分的起源。无常一词,即指与后文所说相应的两个方面结合。此处说其冷凉、依止于四大元素之身以及其结合现象。
§235
235.Subhoti sundaro. Jātimāti parisuddhākarasamuṭṭhito. Suparikammakatoti suṭṭhu kataparikammo apanītapāsāṇasakkharo. Acchoti tanucchavi. Vippasannoti suṭṭhu pasanno. Sabbākārasampannoti dhovanavedhanādīhi sabbehi ākārehi sampanno. Nīlantiādīhi vaṇṇasampattiṃ dasseti. Tādisañhi āvutaṃ pākaṭaṃ hoti. Evameva khoti ettha evaṃ upamāsaṃsandanaṃ veditabbaṃ. Maṇi viya hi karajakāyo. Āvutasuttaṃ viya vipassanāñāṇaṃ. Cakkhumā puriso viya vipassanālābhī bhikkhu, hatthe karitvā paccavekkhato ayaṃ kho maṇīti maṇino āvibhūtakālo viya vipassanāñāṇaṃ, abhinīharitvā nisinnassa bhikkhuno cātumahābhūtikakāyassa āvibhūtakālo, tatridaṃ suttaṃ āvutanti suttassāvibhūtakālo viya vipassanāñāṇaṃ, abhinīharitvā nisinnassa bhikkhuno tadārammaṇānaṃ phassapañcamakānaṃ vā sabbacittacetasikānaṃ vā vipassanāñāṇasseva vā āvibhūtakāloti.
235. 「苏波提」者,意为清净作业所生。谓此地清净行持之成就者。又言「善作业者」,是谓善行其所行之业,如未被束缚之铁石坚固。又言「细微者」,谓其细致微妙。又言「明净者」,谓心智明朗宁静。又言「具足一切相者」,谓以洗涤净化等诸法,具足一切外貌相状。又言「显色者」,诸如蓝色等色,显露其色彩之充足。如此,如覆盖物饱满清晰可见。此类比喻于此,宜当理解。譬如宝石之宝贵体质;如被覆盖之法义通达智慧。比库如眼明达人,手执宝石回视,视为宝石被揭示的时间,如此即为慧见之现前。坐禅修行比库于因缘所生四大身之后,视为揭示时间。此时所闻所见诸法,即为法义揭示之时间。即为慧见成就之显现时。如此说明。
Idañca vipassanāñāṇaṃ maggañāṇānantaraṃ. Evaṃ santepi yasmā abhiññāvāre āraddhe etassa antarāvāro natthi tasmā idheva dassitaṃ. Yasmā ca aniccādivasena akatasammasanassa dibbāya sotadhātuyā bheravaṃ saddaṃ suṇato, pubbenivāsānussatiyā bherave khandhe anussarato, dibbena cakkhunā bheravampi rūpaṃ passato bhayasantāso uppajjati, na aniccādivasena katasammasanassa tasmā abhiññaṃ pattassa bhayavinodanahetusampādanatthampi idaṃ idheva dassitaṃ. Api ca yasmā vipassanāsukhaṃ nāmetaṃ maggaphalasukhasampādakaṃ pāṭiyekkaṃ sandiṭṭhikaṃ sāmaññaphalaṃ tasmāpi āditova idaṃ idha dassitanti veditabbaṃ.
此便是慧见智辨心得,于圣道智之后接续之。既已于三明证中具足,故无障碍,故此处即为实相显现。又,由断无常贪渴等构成之不悉业,通过天眼耳根,闻声显现恐惧。忆前世业,身受苦痛,天眼所见诸恐怖形色,产生恐惧安心。非无常法集合之唯识本体所生,无异闻恐惧之缘,故显此法相。并且,由于慧见之乐,非为行果乐亦非外来常有等,唯独真实善果得乐,因此显扬其示现,当知此说。
Manomayiddhiñāṇakathā意所成神变智论
§236-237
236-237.Manomayanti manena nibbattitaṃ. Sabbaṅgapaccaṅginti sabbehi aṅgehi ca paccaṅgehi ca samannāgataṃ. Ahīnindriyanti saṇṭhānavasena avikalindriyaṃ. Iddhimatā nimmitarūpañhi sace iddhimā odāto tampi odātaṃ. Sace aviddhakaṇṇo tampi aviddhakaṇṇanti evaṃ sabbākārehi tena sadisameva hoti. Muñjamhā īsikantiādi upamāttayampi hi sadisabhāvadassanatthameva vuttaṃ. Muñjasadisā eva hi tassa anto īsikā hoti. Kosisadisoyeva asi, vaṭṭāya kosiyā vaṭṭaṃ asimeva pakkhipanti, patthaṭāya patthaṭaṃ . Karaṇḍāti idampi ahikañcukassa nāmaṃ, na vilīvakaraṇḍakassa. Ahikañcuko hi ahinā sadisova hoti. Tattha kiñcāpi ‘‘puriso ahiṃ karaṇḍā uddhareyyā’’ti hatthena uddharamāno viya dassito, atha kho cittenevassa uddharaṇaṃ veditabbaṃ. Ayañhi ahi nāma sajātiyaṃ ṭhito, kaṭṭhantaraṃ vā rukkhantaraṃ vā nissāya, tacato sarīraṃ nikkaḍḍhanappayogasaṅkhātena thāmena, sarīraṃ khādayamānaṃ viya purāṇatacaṃ jigucchantoti imehi catūhi kāraṇehi sayameva kañcukaṃ pajahati, na sakkā tato aññena uddharituṃ, tasmā cittena uddharaṇaṃ sandhāya idaṃ vuttanti veditabbaṃ. Iti muñjādisadisaṃ imassa bhikkhuno sarīraṃ, īsikādisadisaṃ nimmitarūpanti. Idamettha opammasaṃsandanaṃ. Nimmānavidhānaṃ panettha parato ca iddhividhādipañcaabhiññākathā sabbākārena visuddhimagge vitthāritāti tattha vuttanayeneva veditabbā. Upamāmattameva hi idha adhikaṃ.
236-237.「由意所成」者,谓一切处所部皆由诸肢节组成。所谓非眼根者,乃指无障碍之根。若有神通幻相,则具神通力;若无,则无。由诸相外观判断,所现皆相类同。譬如荆棘之类,边缘如针尖等亦是相似,皆为比附示例。荆棘之类,由于边缘如针,故名针刺。由荆棘类演说,须知荆棘尾端即针也。如箭头披弦等亦类比喻。此处树枝外形如木及树种,通过触觉感知身体,若受触之觉苦厌恶,则由此四种原因主动除去荆棘,非他力所为,故此理应以心意拔除为主。此处所说即荆棘类及针刺等形相,此乃比附示例。其他诸神通及五神通等亦详述于他处。仅此为例证,且多于此也。
Iddhividhañāṇādikathā神变智等论
§238-239
238-239. Tattha chekakumbhakārādayo viya iddhividhañāṇalābhī bhikkhu daṭṭhabbo. Suparikammakatamattikādayo viya iddhividhañāṇaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Icchiticchitabhājanavikatiādikaraṇaṃ viya tassa bhikkhuno vikubbanaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ.
238-239.于此,诸如制陶匠等应见识得神通力之比库。亦当观察具备善作业之神通力。若辩说任意欲念等产生此比库之迷乱错乱,亦应观察察看此状。
§240-241
240-241. Dibbasotadhātuupamāyaṃ yasmā kantāraddhānamaggo sāsaṅko hoti sappaṭibhayo. Tattha ussaṅkitaparisaṅkitena ‘ayaṃ bherisaddo’, ‘ayaṃ mudiṅgasaddo’ti na sakkā vavatthapetuṃ, tasmā kantāraggahaṇaṃ akatvā khemamaggaṃ dassento addhānamaggappaṭipannoti āha. Appaṭibhayañhi khemamaggaṃ sīse sāṭakaṃ katvā saṇikaṃ paṭipanno vuttappakāre sadde sukhaṃ vavatthapeti. Tassa savanena tesaṃ tesaṃ saddānaṃ āvibhūtakālo viya yogino dūrasantikabhedānaṃ dibbānañceva mānussakānañca saddānaṃ āvibhūtakālo veditabbo.
240-241.就比喻天耳根而言,于林间正当中,行至应当恐惧之处,听闻可怖声响。由于忧郁烦恼,犹如「此为恶魔声」、「此为猛兽声」,无法辩解破除,因此未能制除担忧,好比无碍通达涅槃之道,故不能取胜。若断灭恐惧,安住圣道,闻此声即如甘露悦耳,悦入心田。闻声之时,瑜伽士等如同远近不同距离的天人及人间声音现前,更发生感受,由此当知是听觉现前之时。
§242-243
242-243. Cetopariyañāṇūpamāyaṃ daharoti taruṇo. Yuvāti yobbannena samannāgato. Maṇḍanakajātikoti yuvāpi samāno na ālasiyo na kiliṭṭhavatthasarīro, atha kho maṇḍanapakatiko, divasassa dve tayo vāre nhāyitvā suddhavatthaparidahanaalaṅkārakaraṇasīloti attho. Sakaṇikanti kāḷatilakavaṅgamukhadūsipīḷakādīnaṃ aññatarena sadosaṃ. Tattha yathā tassa mukhanimittaṃ paccavekkhato mukhe doso pākaṭo hoti, evaṃ cetopariyañāṇāya cittaṃ abhinīharitvā nisinnassa bhikkhuno paresaṃ soḷasavidhaṃ cittaṃ pākaṭaṃ hotīti veditabbaṃ.
242-243.以心识观察分析,如幼儿为少年。称为青春,又谓青年,具备壮年体质。所谓「忙碌矜持」,谓其身体不懈怠,也无污秽烦恼。又谓洁净画像者,谓每日沐浴,三日涂抹香料,身体清洁美化之义。所谓黑痣等者,为面部某一特征,见之惹起厌患。以心识观察分析比库,内视于心,见他人诸心十六种分别皆显。
§244-245
244-245. Pubbenivāsañāṇūpamāyaṃ taṃ divasaṃ katakiriyā pākaṭā hotīti taṃ divasaṃ gatagāmattayameva gahitaṃ. Tattha gāmattayagatapuriso viya pubbenivāsañāṇalābhī daṭṭhabbo, tayo gāmā viya tayo bhavā daṭṭhabbā, tassa purisassa tīsu gāmesu taṃ divasaṃ katakiriyāya āvibhāvo viya pubbenivāsāya cittaṃ abhinīharitvā nisinnassa bhikkhuno tīsu bhavesu katakiriyāya pākaṭabhāvo daṭṭhabbo.
244-245. 以对前生所住之处的记忆相似为喻,某日作业的显现即为当日所亲历。此处当知,如同一人在三个村落间行住者,亦应观察其所得之前生所住之识,如同三村三个存在亦应显现。此人于三村中,当日所行的业果如同之前所住诸相,心意被调动并住于三种存在中,故此行之果显现。
§246-247
246-247. Dibbacakkhūpamāyaṃ vīthiṃ sañcaranteti aparāparaṃ sañcarante. Vīthiṃ carantetipi pāṭho. Ayamevattho. Tattha nagaramajjhe siṅghāṭakamhi pāsādo viya imassa bhikkhuno karajakāyo daṭṭhabbo, pāsāde ṭhito cakkhumā puriso viya ayameva dibbacakkhuṃ patvā ṭhito bhikkhu, gehaṃ pavisantā viya paṭisandhivasena mātukucchiyaṃ pavisantā, gehā nikkhamantā viya mātukucchito nikkhamantā, rathikāya vīthiṃ sañcarantā viya aparāparaṃ sañcaraṇakasattā, purato abbhokāsaṭṭhāne majjhe siṅghāṭake nisinnā viya tīsu bhavesu tattha tattha nibbattasattā, pāsādatale ṭhitapurisassa tesaṃ manussānaṃ āvibhūtakālo viya dibbacakkhuñāṇāya cittaṃ abhinīharitvā nisinnassa bhikkhuno tīsu bhavesu nibbattasattānaṃ āvibhūtakālo daṭṭhabbo. Idañca desanāsukhatthameva vuttaṃ. Āruppe pana dibbacakkhussa gocaro natthīti.
246-247. 如同天眼之人于小街巷中穿行,前后相续地来往穿行。此为《薄伽梵行颂》中之原意。此中应见此比库如同城中狮子座上的楼阁,其身为此比库业果事体。比库立于楼阁,如同具天眼之人俯视,自宅进入若入母户般安详,自宅出入如同出母户般自由,如乘车于街巷中不断地穿行、交错。楼阁中似有人坐于其间,诸存在在其处次第生起。楼阁下之人在此间时刻,如化身人众,伴随着天眼之知遂心而坐之比库,于三生间生起者之变化时相亦显现。此说乃为说法之乐用。无相境界无天眼所及。
Āsavakkhayañāṇakathā漏尽智论
§248
248.So evaṃ samāhite citteti idha vipassanāpādakaṃ catutthajjhānacittaṃ veditabbaṃ. Āsavānaṃ khayañāṇāyāti āsavānaṃ khayañāṇanibbattanatthāya. Ettha ca āsavānaṃ khayo nāma maggopi phalampi nibbānampi bhaṅgopi vuccati. ‘‘Khaye ñāṇaṃ, anuppāde ñāṇa’’nti ettha hi maggo āsavānaṃ khayoti vutto. ‘‘Āsavānaṃ khayā samaṇo hotī’’ti (ma. ni. 1.438) ettha phalaṃ.
248. 『住于此定中的心即为察知观行第四禅之心。』在此因斩断烦恼之知识,谓烦恼灭尽之知识。又此处烦恼灭即意指道果涅槃及破坏等。所谓“灭知,非生知”云,此处所说道即谓烦恼灭。经中言,『有漏灭时成道』。又言:“沙门得于烦恼灭”(中部·1.438),此处指果义。
‘‘Paravajjānupassissa, niccaṃ ujjhānasaññino;
『对于他人所犯之过失,常持觉醒观照者,』
Āsavā tassa vaḍḍhanti, ārā so āsavakkhayā’’ti. (dha. pa. 253);
『烦恼因此增长,离于此者则烦恼灭』。(法句·253)
Ettha nibbānaṃ. ‘‘Āsavānaṃ khayo vayo bhedo aniccatā antaradhāna’’nti ettha bhaṅgo. Idha pana nibbānaṃ adhippetaṃ. Arahattamaggopi vaṭṭatiyeva.
此中涅槃义即为“烦恼灭、老死断、无常消失、失现消散”。此处分涅槃为至尊,亦谓阿拉汉道为圆满。
Cittaṃabhinīharatīti vipassanā cittaṃ tanninnaṃ tappoṇaṃ tappabbhāraṃ karoti. So idaṃ dukkhantiādīsu ‘‘ettakaṃ dukkhaṃ, na ito bhiyyo’’ti sabbampi dukkhasaccaṃ sarasalakkhaṇapaṭivedhena yathābhūtaṃ pajānātīti attho. Tassa ca dukkhassa nibbattikaṃ taṇhaṃ ‘‘ayaṃ dukkhasamudayo’’ti. Tadubhayampi yaṃ ṭhānaṃ patvā nirujjhati, taṃ tesaṃ appavattiṃ nibbānaṃ ‘‘ayaṃ dukkhanirodho’’ti; tassa ca sampāpakaṃ ariyamaggaṃ ‘‘ayaṃ dukkhanirodhagāminī paṭipadā’’ti sarasalakkhaṇapaṭivedhena yathābhūtaṃ pajānātīti attho.
『念』者,正智观所摄。正智观使念识恪守其处,不令逸散,承担念识之重负。此理即示诸苦等曰:“此苦足矣,不复更增”,藉以彻悟诸苦真相,即苦圣谛之义。此苦之缘起即渴爱,此为苦集谛。游离苦渴之处,使之断灭,名苦灭谛。通达苦灭诸法之正道,称苦灭道,此乃苦灭聖道。由正智通达此理,则真义现前矣。
Evaṃ sarūpato saccāni dassetvā puna kilesavasena pariyāyato dassento ‘‘ime āsavā’’tiādimāha. Tassa evaṃ jānato evaṃ passatoti tassa bhikkhuno evaṃ jānantassa evaṃ passantassa, saha vipassanāya koṭippattaṃ maggaṃ kathesi. Kāmāsavāti kāmāsavato. Vimuccatīti iminā maggakkhaṇaṃ dasseti. Vimuttasminti iminā phalakkhaṇaṃ. Vimuttamiti ñāṇaṃ hotīti iminā paccavekkhaṇañāṇaṃ. Khīṇā jātītiādīhi tassa bhūmiṃ. Tena hi ñāṇena khīṇāsavo paccavekkhanto khīṇā jātītiādīni pajānāti.
如是现见真理之后,复次显现烦恼之本曰“此等乃无明所生之流毒”,即所谓五大煞根。由深知此理,具足观察力,彼比库应当依止正智,细说所证圣道之八支。所谓欲流即欲贪之流。见流断除,说明彼时正道。断流之义即灭相。断即断之智,此为反观之智。断生死轮回境界,由此智慧观照,诸所断生,即前生已灭,非未来生,非当前生。倘生起,生于行无明所覆盖、四种集缔、五蕴分别中,然因道断,故生理久远绝断,谓之断灭。由明此理,知烦恼断尽,则此种业及生灭随缘无延续。
Katamā panassa jāti khīṇā? Kathañca naṃ pajānātīti? Na tāvassa atītā jāti khīṇā, pubbeva khīṇattā. Na anāgatā, anāgate vāyāmābhāvato. Na paccuppannā, vijjamānattā. Yā pana maggassa abhāvitattā uppajjeyya ekacatupañcavokārabhavesu ekacatupañcakkhandhappabhedā jāti, sā maggassa bhāvitattā āyatiṃ anuppādadhammataṃ āpajjanena khīṇā. Taṃ so maggabhāvanāya pahīnakilese paccavekkhitvā ‘‘kilesābhāve vijjamānampi kammaṃ āyatiṃ appaṭisandhikaṃva hotī’’ti jānanto pajānāti.
何种生死?何以知晓?所谓生非昔日之生,乃已灭者。非未来生,因未来未生;非现时生,因现时正在。若生起,则必以无明之暗障、四大集产、五蕴分别心为基础,彼乃无明障之生。经道之培养,斩断烦恼,现观知故,心明烦恼灭后,即使业力未灭,亦无接续生成,故能识此断生现象。
Vusitanti vutthaṃ parivutthaṃ. Brahmacariyanti maggabrahmacariyaṃ. Puthujjanakalyāṇakena hi saddhiṃ satta sekkhā brahmacariyavāsaṃ vasanti nāma, khīṇāsavo vutthavāso, tasmā so attano brahmacariyavāsaṃ paccavekkhanto vusitaṃ brahmacariyanti pajānāti. Kataṃkaraṇīyanti catūsu saccesu catūhi maggehi pariññāpahānasacchikiriyābhāvanāvasena soḷasavidhaṃ kiccaṃ niṭṭhāpitaṃ. Tena tena maggena pahātabbakilesā pahīnā, dukkhamūlaṃ samucchinnanti attho. Puthujjanakalyāṇakādayo hi taṃ kiccaṃ karonti, khīṇāsavo katakaraṇīyo. Tasmā so attano karaṇīyaṃ paccavekkhanto kataṃ karaṇīyanti pajānāti. Nāparaṃ itthattāyāti idāni puna itthabhāvāya evaṃ soḷasakiccabhāvāya kilesakkhayabhāvāya vā kattabbaṃ maggabhāvanākiccaṃ me natthīti pajānāti. Atha vā itthattāyāti itthabhāvato imasmā evaṃ pakārā. Idāni vattamānakhandhasantānā aparaṃ khandhasantānaṃ mayhaṃ natthi. Ime pana pañcakkhandhā pariññātā tiṭṭhanti chinnamūlakā rukkhā viya, te carimakacittanirodhena anupādāno viya jātavedo nibbāyissanti apaṇṇattikabhāvañca gamissantīti pajānāti.
所谓习者,即八正道之行。修行即道行。凡夫、善人相共共处同修七次习行,彼无明断尽故,谓生活断灭。观察自身道行,知悉习法所受先善行,十六种任务已毕。由此诸道,烦恼得断,苦根尽灭。凡夫及善人皆为令此功德而行,故了知自身所作任务。由此知作任务已毕,后当断烦恼,毋复生世。复有人以现实差异、任务完成与否、烦恼灭之状,断法修习已成,尚无他疑。如今毕竟五蕴已断尽,如拔根之树,现于现行止灭,故定向涅槃,除染而安隐。
§249
249.Pabbatasaṅkhepeti pabbatamatthake. Anāviloti nikkaddamo. Sippiyo ca sambukā ca sippisambukaṃ. Sakkharā ca kathalāni ca sakkharakathalaṃ. Macchānaṃ gumbā ghaṭāti macchagumbaṃ. Tiṭṭhantampi carantampīti ettha sakkharakathalaṃ tiṭṭhatiyeva, itarāni carantipi tiṭṭhantipi. Yathā pana antarantarā ṭhitāsupi nisinnāsupi vijjamānāsupi ‘‘etā gāvo carantī’’ti carantiyo upādāya itarāpi carantīti vuccanti. Evaṃ tiṭṭhantameva sakkharakathalaṃ upādāya itarampi dvayaṃ tiṭṭhantanti vuttaṃ. Itarañca dvayaṃ carantaṃ upādāya sakkharakathalampi carantanti vuttaṃ. Tattha cakkhumato purisassa tīre ṭhatvā passato sippikasambukādīnaṃ vibhūtakālo viya āsavānaṃ khayāya cittaṃ abhinīharitvā nisinnassa bhikkhuno catunnaṃ saccānaṃ vibhūtakālo daṭṭhabboti.
249.“山峦汇集”者,以山为主题。无碍者谓不障碍。长寿者与短寿者,长短并存。甘甜者与苦涩者,甜苦并在。鱼巢与缸器,鱼巢为水族之所。据守不动者与游行移动者,此谓甜苦并存。譬如牛饮草地,既有行游处亦有停歇处。如此之间,立于一处而持甘苦者名“定处”,行游善处即“移动”,由此显诸处所差异。慧眼之人立于边际,观见长寿短寿诸恶根消灭之时机,如火尽灰冷,心摄念安住,在座比库当观四圣谛消灭时之境界。
Ettāvatā vipassanāñāṇaṃ, manomayañāṇaṃ, iddhividhañāṇaṃ, dibbasotañāṇaṃ, cetopariyañāṇaṃ, pubbenivāsañāṇaṃ, dibbacakkhuvasena nipphannaṃ anāgataṃsañāṇayathākammūpagañāṇadvayaṃ, dibbacakkhuñāṇaṃ, āsavakkhayañāṇanti dasa ñāṇāni niddiṭṭhāni honti. Tesaṃ ārammaṇavibhāgo jānitabbo – tattha vipassanāñāṇaṃ parittamahaggataatītānāgatapaccuppannaajjhattabahiddhāvasena sattavidhārammaṇaṃ. Manomayañāṇaṃ nimmitabbarūpāyatanamattameva ārammaṇaṃ karotīti parittapaccuppannabahiddhārammaṇaṃ. Āsavakkhayañāṇaṃ appamāṇabahiddhānavattabbārammaṇaṃ. Avasesānaṃ ārammaṇabhedo visuddhimagge vutto. Uttaritaraṃ vā paṇītataraṃ vāti yena kenaci pariyāyena ito seṭṭhataraṃ sāmaññaphalaṃ nāma natthīti bhagavā arahattanikūṭena desanaṃ niṭṭhāpesi.
此十智识层:慧观正念、心识构成、神变力、生死流转、心境无碍、过去知、宿世知、未来知观如实知、天眼、烦恼断除。此中所依根本, Vipassanā 识乃第一,涵盖无量内外现象之三世六尘。心识实为另识,非唯正见。烦恼断除识超越广大内外所缘。其余各识异相,各有界定。由次第而渐更纯净者,即所谓最高正果。世尊以此阿拉汉品级之教导,为究竟修行之标竿而成就。
Ajātasattuupāsakattapaṭivedanākathā未生怨近事男身份表白论
§250
250. Rājā tattha tattha sādhukāraṃ pavattento ādimajjhapariyosānaṃ sakkaccaṃ sutvā ‘‘ciraṃ vatamhi ime pañhe puthū samaṇabrāhmaṇe pucchanto, thuse koṭṭento viya kiñci sāraṃ nālatthaṃ, aho vata bhagavato guṇasampadā, yo me dīpasahassaṃ jālento viya mahantaṃ ālokaṃ katvā ime pañhe vissajjesi. Suciraṃ vatamhi dasabalassa guṇānubhāvaṃ ajānanto vañcito’’ti cintetvā buddhaguṇānussaraṇasambhūtāya pañcavidhāya pītiyā phuṭasarīro attano pasādaṃ āvikaronto upāsakattaṃ paṭivedesi. Taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘evaṃ vutte rājā’’tiādi āraddhaṃ.
国王在此处行善事,起初终结无不周全,听闻后心生欢喜,说:“这些年我常于菩萨婆罗门中问答,就如抓乱乎,毫无实理,唉!世尊德能丰富,犹如一千盏灯火,放大光明,令这些疑难散尽。长久以来浑然不知十方力量与功德,真是被蒙蔽了。”他思惟佛德而生五种喜悦,身体舒畅,心中清净,示现居士身份。为使见者明了,则启始言:“国王如此言论。”
Tattha abhikkantaṃ, bhanteti ayaṃ abhikkantasaddo khayasundarābhirūpaabbhanumodanesu dissati. ‘‘Abhikkantā bhante, ratti, nikkhanto paṭhamo yāmo, ciranisinno bhikkhusaṅgho’’tiādīsu (a. ni. 8.20) hi khaye dissati. ‘‘Ayaṃ me puggalo khamati, imesaṃ catunnaṃ puggalānaṃ abhikkantataro ca paṇītataro cā’’tiādīsu (a. ni. 4.100) sundare.
此“abhikkantaṃ,bhante(尊者,彻底成就)”一词,色泽欢快,形态妙好,光明耀眼,显现于赞叹灭尽美好处。经中如《增支部》八章二十节云:“诸尊者夜出行,第一更时,长夜安住比库僧团”,此时见灭尽相示现。“此人令我安心,是四人中最清净、最善者”之语见于《增支部》四章百节,妙哉。
‘‘Ko me vandati pādāni, iddhiyā yasasā jalaṃ;
『谁向我顶礼双足,凭神通威德如水流?』
Abhikkantena vaṇṇena, sabbā obhāsayaṃ disā’’ti. (vi. va. 857);
『以彻底之色身显现,诸方悉皆普现光明。』(《毗含婆萨》八五七偈)
Ādīsu abhirūpe. ‘‘Abhikkantaṃ bho, gotamā’’tiādīsu (pārā. 15) abbhanumodane. Idhāpi abbhanumodaneyeva. Yasmā ca abbhanumodane, tasmā ‘sādhu sādhu bhante’ti vuttaṃ hotīti veditabbo.
起初时姿态庄严,如《波罗提》十五节说:“尊者呀,彻底成就者。”此即赞叹而现。由是赞叹,对曰“善哉善哉尊者”,应知是赞叹音声。
Bhaye kodhe pasaṃsāyaṃ, turite kotūhalacchare;
在恐惧与忿恨中,立即生起好奇与惊奇之声;
Hāse soke pasāde ca, kare āmeḍitaṃ budhoti.
以欢喜、忧愁和平静作表现,说成是觉知之显现。
Iminā ca lakkhaṇena idha pasādavasena, pasaṃsāvasena cāyaṃ dvikkhattuṃ vuttoti veditabbo. Athavā abhikkantanti abhikantaṃ atiiṭṭhaṃ atimanāpaṃ atisundaranti vuttaṃ hoti.
依此特征,在此处可知所谓平静与赞叹,复说为二相应。当中或者所谓甚盛者,是盛大超过常态、极为喜悦、美妙绝伦之义。
Ettha ekena abhikkantasaddena desanaṃ thometi, ekena attano pasādaṃ. Ayañhettha adhippāyo, abhikkantaṃ bhante, yadidaṃ bhagavato dhammadesanā, ‘abhikkantaṃ’ yadidaṃ bhagavato dhammadesanaṃ āgamma mama pasādoti. Bhagavatoyeva vā vacanaṃ dve dve atthe sandhāya thometi. Bhagavato vacanaṃ abhikkantaṃ dosanāsanato, abhikkantaṃ guṇādhigamanato. Tathā saddhājananato, paññājananato, sātthato, sabyañjanato, uttānapadato, gambhīratthato, kaṇṇasukhato, hadayaṅgamato, anattukkaṃsanato , aparavambhanato, karuṇāsītalato, paññāvadātato, āpātharamaṇīyato, vimaddakkhamato, suyyamānasukhato, vīmaṃsiyamānahitatoti evamādīhi yojetabbaṃ.
在此以单一盛大的词语宣说法门,遂成自心生起的平静。这里所谓的支配法,尊者啊,即是世尊教法所示‘盛大’之义,世尊教法依此而生我心之平静。世尊的言词在二重层次上分别发起法喜:世尊言‘盛大’谛,断除过患故盛大,获得殊胜之功德故亦盛大;又由信解、智慧理解、本意领悟、正义泽被、普遍传播、高明阐述、内心愉快、内心深移、无我无相、不挑剔、不轻漏、充满慈悲凉意、智慧慷慨、安适喜悦、深默自乐、细察检验、完善安乐等诸义相,须将此等皆融汇。
Tato parampi catūhi upamāhi desanaṃyeva thometi. Tattha nikkujjitanti adhomukhaṭhapitaṃ heṭṭhāmukhajātaṃ vā. Ukkujjeyyāti upari mukhaṃ kareyya. Paṭicchannanti tiṇapaṇṇādichāditaṃ. Vivareyyāti ugghāṭeyya. Mūḷhassa vāti disāmūḷhassa. Maggaṃ ācikkheyyāti hatthe gahetvā ‘‘esa maggo’’ti vadeyya, andhakāreti kāḷapakkhacātuddasī aḍḍharattaghanavanasaṇḍameghapaṭalehi caturaṅge tame. Ayaṃ tāva anuttānapadattho. Ayaṃ pana sādhippāyayojanā. Yathā koci nikkujjitaṃ ukkujjeyya, evaṃ saddhammavimukhaṃ asaddhamme patitaṃ maṃ asaddhammā vuṭṭhāpentana. Yathā paṭicchannaṃ vivareyya, evaṃ kassapassa bhagavato sāsanantaradhānā pabhuti micchādiṭṭhigahanapaṭicchannaṃ sāsanaṃ vivarantena, yathā mūḷhassa maggaṃ ācikkheyya, evaṃ kummaggamicchāmaggappaṭipannassa me saggamokkhamaggaṃ āvikarontena, yathā andhakāre telapajjotaṃ dhāreyya, evaṃ mohandhakāranimuggassa me buddhādiratanarūpāni apassato tappaṭicchādakamohandhakāraviddhaṃsakadesanāpajjotadhārakena mayhaṃ bhagavatā etehi pariyāyehi pakāsitattā anekapariyāyena dhammo pakāsitoti.
之后依四种比喻进一步宣说此法。其间所说“nikkujjita”者,谓诸法下垂、低着之相或者低头之义。“ukkujjeyya”者,谓当抬高、扬起。所谓“paṭicchanna”是指被草叶等所隐蔽,“vivareyya”则是揭示、开启。所谓“mūḷha”是愚昧之义。如手指示法说“此即是道”,如黑暗夜及翅膜密布、深林、昏暗云层之极深黑暗,比喻至极至胜之理境。此乃极顶真谛。此即所谓之四谛相续。如有人低头,当他当挥舞抬扬,是则战胜法嫌恶、脱离不善,远离邪法之义。如被隐蔽应揭发之,为尊者咖萨巴佛法断绝邪见而现正法之明。如示现道相,使堕入邪道、邪见者回归净道之光明。如握持油灯于黑暗之中,驱散昏暗,此谓如我世尊历代佛陀以多方方式照明法义。
Evaṃ desanaṃ thometvā imāya desanāya ratanattaye pasannacitto pasannākāraṃ karonto esāhantiādimāha. Tattha esāhanti eso ahaṃ . Bhagavantaṃ saraṇaṃ gacchāmīti bhagavā me saraṇaṃ, parāyanaṃ, aghassa tātā, hitassa ca vidhātāti. Iminā adhippāyena bhagavantaṃ gacchāmi bhajāmi sevāmi payirupāsāmi, evaṃ vā jānāmi bujjhāmīti. Yesañhi dhātūnaṃ gatiattho, buddhipi tesaṃ attho. Tasmā gacchāmīti imassa jānāmi bujjhāmīti ayampi attho vutto. Dhammañca bhikkhusaṅghañcāti ettha pana adhigatamagge sacchikatanirodhe yathānusiṭṭhaṃ paṭipajjamāne catūsu apāyesu apatamāne dhāretīti dhammo, so atthato ariyamaggo ceva nibbānañca. Vuttañcetaṃ – ‘‘yāvatā, bhikkhave, dhammā saṅkhatā, ariyo aṭṭhaṅgiko maggo tesaṃ aggamakkhāyatī’’ti (a. ni. 4.34) vitthāro. Na kevalañca ariyamaggo ceva nibbānañca. Api ca kho ariyaphalehi saddhiṃ pariyattidhammopi . Vuttañhetaṃ chattamāṇavakavimāne –
如此宣说之后,此教法为了宝贵教典浇灌清净心志,以明朗之形态行。此处所谓「我愿皈依尊者」为皈依佛陀,是我皈依、生死解脱之依止,护持我脱离灾难及带来利益。依此原则,我皈依世尊,奉行侍奉、恭敬、恪守、敬重精进,正知觉悟。此诸法各境界之目的皆为觉知,故知诸法即成其义。于是曰我皈依,即发此义。法与僧二部共说,乃遵守正道,断除烦恼,依觉悟而修习四道中清净不退四念住之法。此即圣道及涅槃之含义。此义有如记载云:“比库!诸法有分别界时,圣八正道为其最高引导。”故不仅仅是圣道,亦是涅槃,佛果及圣果等亦同样叙述。此诸义有梵天宫护持般若因缘所决定。
‘‘Rāgavirāgamanejamasokaṃ, dhammamasaṅkhatamappaṭikūlaṃ;
“断贪、断嗔、断痴、不生忧苦,是非聚合、无瑕玷、反面正法;
Madhuramimaṃ paguṇaṃ suvibhattaṃ, dhammamimaṃ saraṇatthamupehī’’ti. (vi. va. 887);
『此法甘美、殊胜、清净』,是为皈依之义。
Ettha hi rāgavirāgoti maggo kathito. Anejamasokanti phalaṃ. Dhammamasaṅkhatanti nibbānaṃ. Appaṭikūlaṃ madhuramimaṃ paguṇaṃ suvibhattanti piṭakattayena vibhattā dhammakkhandhāti. Diṭṭhisīlasaṃghātena saṃhatoti saṅgho, so atthato aṭṭha ariyapuggalasamūho. Vuttañhetaṃ tasmiññeva vimāne –
此中所谓贪欲离欲,是指修道之路。无数忧悲者是其果报。法不可摧毁即涅槃。经藏三藏分别论说此法甘美、殊胜、清净三德,名为法蕴。通过正确见解、戒律、僧团相系结成的即为僧团,从意义来说是八种圣人之集会。这已在彼世界上界云云述说,
‘‘Yattha ca dinnamahapphalamāhu, catūsu sucīsu purīsayugesu;
『有大果报者住于四净居的圣人之家,
Aṭṭha ca puggaladhammadasā te, saṅghamimaṃ saraṇatthamupehī’’ti. (vi. va. 888);
八种圣人之德同时具足,故在此僧团皈依。』
Bhikkhūnaṃ saṅgho bhikkhusaṅgho. Ettāvatā rājā tīṇi saraṇagamanāni paṭivedesi.
比库的僧团谓比库僧团。国王已宣布三种皈依通达法。
Saraṇagamanakathā归依论
Idāni tesu saraṇagamanesu kosallatthaṃ saraṇaṃ, saraṇagamanaṃ, yo ca saraṇaṃ gacchati, saraṇagamanappabhedo, saraṇagamanaphalaṃ, saṅkileso, bhedoti, ayaṃ vidhi veditabbo. Seyyathidaṃ – saraṇatthato tāva hiṃsatīti saraṇaṃ. Saraṇagatānaṃ teneva saraṇagamanena bhayaṃ santāsaṃ dukkhaṃ duggatiparikilesaṃ hanati vināsetīti attho, ratanattayassevetaṃ adhivacanaṃ.
如今于此皈依法中,为利益明智者,皈依、皈依法及此皈依之行者,皈依的不同种类、皈依之果、染污及可分辨性,当当了知。譬如皈依法即为不害,是皈依法。皈依者通过皈依法使恐怖、忧苦及悪道染污消灭灭除,此意亦如宝之三种称谓。
Atha vā hite pavattanena ahitā ca nivattanena sattānaṃ bhayaṃ hiṃsati buddho. Bhavakantārā uttāraṇena assāsadānena ca dhammo; appakānampi kārānaṃ vipulaphalapaṭilābhakaraṇena saṅgho . Tasmā imināpi pariyāyena ratanattayaṃ saraṇaṃ. Tappasādataggarutāhi vihatakileso tapparāyaṇatākārappavatto cittuppādo saraṇagamanaṃ. Taṃ samaṅgīsatto saraṇaṃ gacchati. Vuttappakārena cittuppādena etāni me tīṇi ratanāni saraṇaṃ, etāni parāyaṇanti evaṃ upetīti attho. Evaṃ tāva saraṇaṃ, saraṇagamanaṃ, yo ca saraṇaṃ gacchati, idaṃ tayaṃ veditabbaṃ.
或者,世尊因利益而展开教化,或因不利益而止息,令众生生起恐惧。法则以超越生死轮回之渡过,为助缘福报施予;即使所做之微小善行,亦能广大利益,令僧团获丰厚功德利益。故此,在此教法中,三宝即佛、法、僧为皈依之所。修持戒定慧,使烦恼得以断除,精进于修习持戒,心生善法抵达皈依。这三宝即为众生皈依之道,如是则为皈依义。修此皈依,向此皈依而行者,其意即如是。由此,皈依、归依、皈依往来者,应当如是知晓。
Saraṇagamanappabhede pana duvidhaṃ saraṇagamanaṃ – lokuttaraṃ lokiyañca. Tattha lokuttaraṃ diṭṭhasaccānaṃ maggakkhaṇe saraṇagamanupakkilesasamucchedena ārammaṇato nibbānārammaṇaṃ hutvā kiccato sakalepi ratanattaye ijjhati. Lokiyaṃ puthujjanānaṃ saraṇagamanupakkilesavikkhambhanena ārammaṇato buddhādiguṇārammaṇaṃ hutvā ijjhati. Taṃ atthato buddhādīsu vatthūsu saddhāpaṭilābho saddhāmūlikā ca sammādiṭṭhi dasasu puññakiriyavatthūsu diṭṭhijukammanti vuccati. Tayidaṃ catudhā vattati – attasanniyyātanena, tapparāyaṇatāya, sissabhāvūpagamanena, paṇipātenāti.
皈依的方法,则有两种:一为出世间皈依,一为世间皈依。出世间皈依者,依见圣谛果位之道路,断除与皈依相关染污之缘起,生起涅槃缘,故此目的清净殊胜,身心依止,愿以三宝为归属。世间皈依者,即是俗人因斥除皈依相应染污,依止佛及诸善法德,愿归依三宝。简言之,信心是皈依根基,正见为种子,住持十种善行为所依,上述四种即是出世间皈依之表现,包含自我约束、精进希求、弟子身份之转变及礼敬举止。
Tattha attasanniyyātanaṃ nāma – ‘‘ajjādiṃ katvā ahaṃ attānaṃ buddhassa niyyātemi, dhammassa, saṅghassā’’ti evaṃ buddhādīnaṃ attapariccajanaṃ. Tapparāyaṇatā nāma ‘‘ajjādiṃ katvā ‘ahaṃ buddhaparāyaṇo, dhammaparāyaṇo, saṅghaparāyaṇo’ti. Maṃ dhārethā’’ti evaṃ tapparāyaṇabhāvo. Sissabhāvūpagamanaṃ nāma – ‘‘ajjādiṃ katvā – ‘ahaṃ buddhassa antevāsiko, dhammassa, saṅghassa antevāsiko’ti maṃ dhārethā’’ti evaṃ sissabhāvūpagamo. Paṇipāto nāma – ‘‘ajjādiṃ katvā ahaṃ abhivādanapaccuṭṭhānaañjalikammasāmīcikammaṃ buddhādīnaṃyeva tiṇṇaṃ vatthūnaṃ karomī’ti maṃ dhārethā’’ti evaṃ buddhādīsu paramanipaccākāro. Imesañhi catunnaṃ ākārānaṃ aññatarampi karontena gahitaṃyeva hoti saraṇaṃ.
所谓自我约束,意思是“今始发愿,我将自行交付于佛、法、僧”。这是出于对佛等三宝自发的归属感而生。精进希求则是“今始发愿,我当专心归依佛为最高,归依法为最高,归依僧为最高,请护持我。”这是精进皈依之心。弟子身份转变的皈依,谓“今始发愿,我愿为佛、法、僧的终伴故人。”此为弟子心态之皈依。礼敬仪轨皈依者,谓“今始发愿,我当礼佛、法、僧三宝,行合宜之礼敬。”此为礼敬皈依仪轨。若行其中某一,均可成就皈依。
Api ca bhagavato attānaṃ pariccajāmi, dhammassa, saṅghassa, attānaṃ pariccajāmi, jīvitaṃ pariccajāmi, pariccattoyeva me attā, pariccattaṃyeva jīvitaṃ, jīvitapariyantikaṃ buddhaṃ saraṇaṃ gacchāmi, buddho me saraṇaṃ leṇaṃ tāṇanti ; evampi attasanniyyātanaṃ veditabbaṃ. ‘‘Satthārañca vatāhaṃ passeyyaṃ, bhagavantameva passeyyaṃ, sugatañca vatāhaṃ passeyyaṃ, bhagavantameva passeyyaṃ, sammāsambuddhañca vatāhaṃ passeyyaṃ, bhagavantameva passeyya’’nti (saṃ. ni. 2.154). Evampi mahākassapassa saraṇagamanaṃ viya sissabhāvūpagamanaṃ veditabbaṃ.
此外,我当护持并舍弃自我,护持佛、法、僧,护持自身生命,舍弃心身所得之我及生命,谨以涅槃为终极归宿,皈依佛,如同依赖安稳之城堡。由此可知自我约束者,即心念“我当视世尊、如来、正觉者为依归”,此心即皈依根本。佛陀大弟子大咖萨巴即具此归依弟子之心态。
‘‘So ahaṃ vicarissāmi, gāmā gāmaṃ purā puraṃ;
“我将行脚,遍访乡村村庄;
Namassamāno sambuddhaṃ, dhammassa ca sudhammata’’nti. (su. ni. 194);
敬礼觉者及其纯正法。”如是经典所述。
Evampi āḷavakādīnaṃ saraṇagamanaṃ viya tapparāyaṇatā veditabbā. Atha kho brahmāyu brāhmaṇo uṭṭhāyāsanā ekaṃsaṃ uttarāsaṅgaṃ karitvā bhagavato pādesu sirasā nipatitvā bhagavato pādāni mukhena ca paricumbati, pāṇīhi ca parisambāhati, nāmañca sāveti – ‘‘brahmāyu ahaṃ, bho gotama brāhmaṇo, brahmāyu ahaṃ, bho gotama brāhmaṇo’’ti (ma. ni. 2.394) evampi paṇipāto daṭṭhabbo.
应当知晓,像阿拉维等人皈依的行为,必须有毅力与恒心。那时婆罗门布拉玛由起身,略向前倾身,将上衣整齐披挂,俯首觑于世尊足下,口唇近世尊双足而亲吻,双手围抱世尊的足,口中称念:『我是婆罗门布拉玛由,尊敬的果德玛婆罗门,我是婆罗门布拉玛由,尊敬的果德玛婆罗门』。如此的手足合礼,应当观察。
So panesa ñātibhayācariyadakkhiṇeyyavasena catubbidho hoti. Tattha dakkhiṇeyyapaṇipātena saraṇagamanaṃ hoti, na itarehi. Seṭṭhavaseneva hi saraṇaṃ gaṇhāti, seṭṭhavasena ca bhijjati. Tasmā yo sākiyo vā koliyo vā – ‘‘buddho amhākaṃ ñātako’’ti vandati, aggahitameva hoti saraṇaṃ. Yo vā – ‘‘samaṇo gotamo rājapūjito mahānubhāvo avandīyamāno anatthampi kareyyā’’ti bhayena vandati, aggahitameva hoti saraṇaṃ. Yo vā bodhisattakāle bhagavato santike kiñci uggahitaṃ saramāno buddhakāle vā –
关于他的亲属敬师之礼,有四种施礼方式。其中以亲属敬师的手足合礼是皈依的表现,其他形式则非皈依。正如用最尊贵的方式接受皈依,最尊贵的方式即为皈依。因此,无论是萨基族还是迦梨族人若称说『佛是我们的亲属』并致敬礼,便是最高正统皈依。又有人因恐惧而敬礼说:『游方果德玛尊者受王敬奉,身为伟大功德者,但敬礼之』,此亦是真皈依。又如菩萨时节,曾在世尊前面做过什么举止,或佛出家后——
‘‘Catudhā vibhaje bhoge, paṇḍito gharamāvasaṃ;
『四法分食福德,智者归家栖身;
Ekena bhogaṃ bhuñjeyya, dvīhi kammaṃ payojaye;
一法独享福,二法推动业;
Catutthañca nidhāpeyya, āpadāsu bhavissatī’’ti. (dī. ni. 3.265);
第四善护藏,难时获安隐』,(经中言)。
Evarūpaṃ anusāsaniṃ uggahetvā – ‘‘ācariyo me’’ti vandati, aggahitameva hoti saraṇaṃ. Yo pana – ‘‘ayaṃ loke aggadakkhiṇeyyo’’ti vandati, teneva gahitaṃ hoti saraṇaṃ.
受此教诲,恭敬地称道『我的老师』,此即最高皈依。若有人称『此人在世间为最尊敬的施礼者』,其皈依亦必为真实无疑。
Evaṃ gahitasaraṇassa ca upāsakassa vā upāsikāya vā aññatitthiyesu pabbajitampi ñātiṃ – ‘‘ñātako me aya’’nti vandato saraṇagamanaṃ na bhijjati, pageva apabbajitaṃ. Tathā rājānaṃ bhayavasena vandato. So hi raṭṭhapūjitattā avandīyamāno anatthampi kareyyāti. Tathā yaṃ kiñci sippaṃ sikkhāpakaṃ titthiyampi – ‘‘ācariyo me aya’’nti vandatopi na bhijjati, evaṃ saraṇagamanappabhedo veditabbo.
如是,对于依止已确定的近事男或近事女,即便在他方教派中出家,亲属虽谓“此为我亲属”,却不能因此受到依止的保护,仅仅因出家而得依止。又如因对国王的畏惧而致礼,因国家敬奉而不应礼拜之故,实际上是无益且不应为的。又如对任何手艺、教授及外道,也不应谓“此为我的老师”而礼敬,否则就失去了依止的区分,应当了知此不同。
Ettha ca lokuttarassa saraṇagamanassa cattāri sāmaññaphalāni vipākaphalaṃ, sabbadukkhakkhayo ānisaṃsaphalaṃ. Vuttañhetaṃ –
此中,出世间的依止果,有四种普通的果实及成熟果实,是一切苦灭尽的因缘果报。已有经中宣说:
‘‘Yo ca buddhañca dhammañca, saṅghañca saraṇaṃ gato;
“有向佛、法、僧依止者,
Cattāri ariyasaccāni, sammappaññāya passati.
得以智慧正确观察四圣谛,
Dukkhaṃ dukkhasamuppādaṃ, dukkhassa ca atikkamaṃ;
洞察苦苦因及超越苦之法,
Ariyaṃ aṭṭhaṅgikaṃ maggaṃ, dukkhūpasamagāminaṃ.
体证圣八正道,灭除一切苦难。”
Etaṃ kho saraṇaṃ khemaṃ, etaṃ saraṇamuttamaṃ;
这正是皈依的安全保障,这正是皈依的至上所在;
Etaṃ saraṇamāgamma, sabbadukkhā pamuccatī’’ti. (dha. pa. 192);
正是因为皈依,而众苦得以解脱。
Api ca niccādito anupagamanādivasena petassa ānisaṃsaphalaṃ veditabbaṃ. Vuttañhetaṃ – ‘‘aṭṭhānametaṃ anavakāso, yaṃ diṭṭhisampanno puggalo kañci saṅkhāraṃ niccato upagaccheyya…pe… kañci saṅkhāraṃ sukhato…pe… kañci dhammaṃ attato upagaccheyya…pe… mātaraṃ jīvitā voropeyya…pe… pitaraṃ…pe… arahantaṃ…pe… paduṭṭhacitto tathāgatassa lohitaṃ uppādeyya…pe…. saṅghaṃ bhindeyya…pe… aññaṃ satthāraṃ uddiseyya, netaṃ ṭhānaṃ vijjatī’’ti (a. ni. 1.290). Lokiyassa pana saraṇagamanassa bhavasampadāpi bhogasampadāpi phalameva. Vuttañhetaṃ –
还应当体认,常恒依止无间断的缘故,乃是饿鬼所应获的因果果报。曾说:『此地不容逾越,是为有见识之人若恒常接近某种行法(业),便——若恒常接近某种痛苦之行法……若恒常接近某种快乐之行法……若恒常自己接近某种法……若恒常夺取母亲的生命……若恒常夺取父亲的生命……若恒常生起对阿拉汉者的恶念……若恒常令如来的尸体血流……若恒常破坏僧团……若恒常向他师挑拨离间,此处皆无可容。』世间者,着世为皈依者,其生死轮回及安乐享受皆属其果报。曾说:
‘‘Ye keci buddhaṃ saraṇaṃ gatāse, na te gamissanti apāyabhūmiṃ;
『凡一切依止佛的,必不堕落恶趣;
Pahāya mānusaṃ dehaṃ, devakāyaṃ paripūressantī’’ti. (saṃ. ni. 1.37);
舍弃人身,得享天身满满。』
Aparampi vuttaṃ – ‘‘atha kho sakko devānamindo asītiyā devatāsahassehi saddhiṃ yenāyasmā mahāmoggallāno tenupasaṅkami…pe… ekamantaṃ ṭhitaṃ kho sakkaṃ devānamindaṃ āyasmā mahāmoggallāno etadavoca – ‘‘sādhu kho, devānaminda, buddhaṃ saraṇagamanaṃ hoti. Buddhaṃ saraṇagamanahetu kho, devānaminda, evamidhekacce sattā kāyassa bhedā paraṃ maraṇā sugatiṃ saggaṃ lokaṃ upapajjanti…pe… te aññe deve dasahi ṭhānehi adhigaṇhanti – dibbena āyunā, dibbena vaṇṇena, dibbena sukhena, dibbena yasena, dibbena ādhipateyyena, dibbehi rūpehi saddehi gandhehi rasehi phoṭṭhabbehī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 4.341). Esa nayo dhamme ca saṅghe ca. Api ca velāmasuttādīnaṃ vasenāpi saraṇagamanassa phalaviseso veditabbo. Evaṃ saraṇagamanassa phalaṃ veditabbaṃ.
又曾说:『当时萨咖天帝与三十八万天众同行,向长老大摩嘎剌那至诚礼敬,彼时执事摩嘎剌那对萨咖天帝说:『善哉天帝,皈依佛者确实存在。本来皈依佛者之因,则是——有些众生因断身命而得善趣,往生天界。他们获诸天之寿命、色相、快乐、威仪、统治权,以及天界种种色声香味触法。』这是皈依法、戒、僧的保障。
Tattha ca lokiyasaraṇagamanaṃ tīsu vatthūsu aññāṇasaṃsayamicchāñāṇādīhi saṃkilissati, na mahājutikaṃ hoti, na mahāvipphāraṃ. Lokuttarassa natthi saṃkileso. Lokiyassa ca saraṇagamanassa duvidho bhedo – sāvajjo ca anavajjo ca. Tattha sāvajjo aññasatthārādīsu attasanniyyātanādīhi hoti, so ca aniṭṭhaphalo hoti. Anavajjo kālakiriyāya hoti, so avipākattā aphalo. Lokuttarassa pana nevatthi bhedo. Bhavantarepi hi ariyasāvako aññaṃ satthāraṃ na uddisatīti. Evaṃ saraṇagamanassa saṃkileso ca bhedo ca veditabboti.
在此,世俗的皈依行为,在三种根本方面会被认知错误、怀疑以及执着等烦恼所玷污,这并非严重的污秽,也非大转变。超越世间的皈依则不生玷污。世俗的皈依有两种区别:即有玷污者与无玷污者。有玷污者是由于对他力依赖等身心归属的误执,是无益且无果的。无玷污者则是时间行为上的净行,未成熟也无功德。至于超越世间者,则无此二别。即使是圣弟子也不以他人为师。由此,应了知皈依的玷污与区别。
Upāsakaṃ maṃ bhante bhagavā dhāretūti maṃ bhagavā ‘‘upāsako aya’’nti evaṃ dhāretu, jānātūti attho. Upāsakavidhikosallatthaṃ panettha – ko upāsako? Kasmā upāsakoti vuccati ? Kimassa sīlaṃ? Ko ājīvo? Kā vipatti? Kā sampattīti? Idaṃ pakiṇṇakaṃ veditabbaṃ.
世尊教导说:「当心中持有对近事男的信念,就称我为‘此为近事男’。」这里言当持此意,了知其义。为了智慧于近事男律法,此处须了解何为近事男?为何称之为近事男?其戒律为何?生计为何?过失为何?功德为何?这些都应了知。
Tattha ko upāsakoti yo koci saraṇagato gahaṭṭho. Vuttañhetaṃ – ‘‘yato kho, mahānāma, buddhaṃ saraṇaṃ gato hoti, dhammaṃ saraṇaṃ gato hoti, saṅghaṃ saraṇaṃ gato hoti. Ettāvatā kho, mahānāma, upāsako hotī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.1033).
所谓是近事男者,即凡皈依三宝的在家护法。经中云:「大名,若有皈依佛、皈依法、皈依僧者,至此,为大名的近事男。」(增支部5.1033)
Kasmā upāsakoti ratanattayaṃ upāsanato. So hi buddhaṃ upāsatīti upāsako, tathā dhammaṃ saṃghaṃ.
为何称为近事男,乃因敬礼三宝如宝石。敬礼佛为近事男,依法、僧伽亦然。
Kimassasīlanti pañca veramaṇiyo. Yathāha – ‘‘yato kho, mahānāma, upāsako pāṇātipātā paṭivirato hoti, adinnādānā… kāmesumicchācārā… musāvādā… surāmerayamajjapamādaṭṭhānā paṭivirato hoti, ettāvatā kho, mahānāma, upāsako sīlavā hotī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.1033).
其戒律是五戒。经中曰:「大名,若近事男持守不杀生、不偷盗……不邪欲、不妄语……不饮酒及诸迷醉品,至此,则为守戒近事男。」(增支部5.1033)
Koājīvoti pañca micchāvaṇijjā pahāya dhammena samena jīvitakappanaṃ. Vuttañhetaṃ – ‘‘pañcimā, bhikkhave, vaṇijjā upāsakena akaraṇīyā. Katamā pañca? Satthavaṇijjā, sattavaṇijjā, maṃsavaṇijjā, majjavaṇijjā, visavaṇijjā. Imā kho, bhikkhave, pañca vaṇijjā upāsakena akaraṇīyā’’ti (a. ni. 5.177).
其生计为弃五恶生意,以正当法执生活。经中说:「五种生意,诸比库勿为近事男所行。何等五?贩卖奴隶、贩卖生命、贩卖肉类、贩卖醉酒、贩卖毒药。此五恶生意不可为近事男所作。」(增一尼柯经5.177)
Kā vipattīti yā tasseva sīlassa ca ājīvassa ca vipatti, ayamassa vipatti. Api ca yāya esa caṇḍālo ceva hoti, malañca patikuṭṭho ca, sāpissa vipattīti veditabbā. Te ca atthato assaddhiyādayo pañca dhammā honti. Yathāha – ‘‘pañcahi, bhikkhave, dhammehi samannāgato upāsako upāsakacaṇḍālo ca hoti, upāsakamalañca, upāsakapatikuṭṭho ca. Katamehi pañcahi? Assaddho hoti, dussīlo hoti, kotūhalamaṅgaliko hoti, maṅgalaṃ pacceti, no kammaṃ, ito ca bahiddhā dakkhiṇeyyaṃ pariyesati, tattha ca pubbakāraṃ karotī’’ti (a. ni. 5.175).
何谓逆境者?所谓即是该比库行为持戒与生计所遭遇之逆境,便是此逆境。又应知令其逆境者,如出家人中有暴戾无赖者、恶行甚恶者,谓之逆境。根本而言,彼诸逆境来源于五种无益法。如经中所言:『诸比库,当具此五法者内,出家人中即有逆恶之徒,亦为如是逆恶者、污秽者、卑贱者。此五为何?即是不信戒法者,行为恶劣者,好生疑虑害吉祥者,虽生吉祥心,但不造善业,且于内外不寻求受施,反行先作恶业也。』(阿含经·增壹阿含5.175)
Kā sampattīti yā cassa sīlasampadā ceva ājīvasampadā ca, sā sampatti; ye cassa ratanabhāvādikarā saddhādayo pañca dhammā. Yathāha – ‘‘pañcahi, bhikkhave, dhammehi samannāgato upāsako upāsakaratanañca hoti, upāsakapadumañca, upāsakapuṇḍarīkañca. Katamehi pañcahi? Saddho hoti, sīlavā hoti, na kotūhalamaṅgaliko hoti, kammaṃ pacceti, no maṅgalaṃ, na ito bahiddhā dakkhiṇeyyaṃ gavesati, idha ca pubbakāraṃ karotī’’ti (a. ni. 5.175).
何谓顺境者?即是该比库行为持戒与生计俱备之顺境,称为顺境。其比库中具五种善法,犹如宝藏一般。经中云:『诸比库,当具此五法者内,出家人即得宝藏者,亦为宝莲花与宝白莲者。此五为何?即是信戒清净者,不生疑虑害吉祥者,因行善业生吉祥者,不于内外求乞受施,且行先作善业也。』(阿含经·增壹阿含5.175)
Ajjataggeti etthāyaṃ aggasaddo ādikoṭikoṭṭhāsaseṭṭhesu dissati. ‘‘Ajjatagge, samma dovārika, āvarāmi dvāraṃ nigaṇṭhānaṃ nigaṇṭhīna’’ntiādīsu (ma. ni. 2.70) hi ādimhi dissati. ‘‘Teneva aṅgulaggena taṃ aṅgulaggaṃ parāmaseyya . Ucchaggaṃ veḷagga’’ntiādīsu (kathā. 281) koṭiyaṃ. ‘‘Ambilaggaṃ vā madhuraggaṃ vā tittakaggaṃ vā vihāraggena vā pariveṇaggena vā bhājetu’’ntiādīsu (cūḷava. 317) koṭṭhāse. ‘‘Yāvatā, bhikkhave, sattā apadā vā…pe… tathāgato tesaṃ aggamakkhāyatī’’tiādīsu (a. ni. 4.34) seṭṭhe. Idha panāyaṃ ādimhi daṭṭhabbo. Tasmā ajjataggeti ajjataṃ ādiṃ katvāti evametthattho veditabbo. Ajjatanti ajjabhāvaṃ. Ajjadaggeti vā pāṭho, dakāro padasandhikaro. Ajja agganti attho.
“Ajjatagge”一词于诸经、论、律中皆显现。初出见于《大小部义疏》第二卷第七十页,如文云:“在昨日之门,舍卫城诸霹雳挡门,断绝禁闭”,乃此处初现。又《经集论·281》云:“五指之网应以五指相缠,若顶端结为网”,亦有涉及。更有《小部义疏·317》云:“或以赤绳、蜜绳、刺绳或以僧房净地作界”,即结界。又《增壹阿含·四卷三十四》文:“诸众生如有灾难……如来为其说初之净名”,亦存于此。此诸典籍,俱为初现处,故名“昨日初头”,意谓昨日之始。“昨日”指当前时刻,“头”指端首或接口。故“ajjatagge”意谓“昨日初端”。又“ajjatagge”或作“ajjadaggeti”,此为合成词,连接音节之变形。又“ajja agganti”为其义解。
Pāṇupetanti pāṇehi upetaṃ. Yāva me jīvitaṃ pavattati, tāva upetaṃ anaññasatthukaṃ tīhi saraṇagamanehi saraṇaṃ gataṃ upāsakaṃ kappiyakārakaṃ maṃ bhagavā dhāretu jānātu. Ahañhi sacepi me tikhiṇena asinā sīsaṃ chindeyya, neva buddhaṃ ‘‘na buddho’’ti vā, dhammaṃ ‘‘na dhammo’’ti vā, saṅghaṃ ‘‘na saṅgho’’ti vā vadeyyanti.
“Pāṇupetanti”意谓“以手持物”。言及对我而言,凡吾生存之时,皆受持护卫,意指无他法可替代。以三皈依之道,归依佛、法、僧。善护持者皆为弟子。佛愿意持守我,即使有人怒厉以剑迅速斩我头颅,彼人绝不可称佛为非佛、不称法为非法、不称僧为非僧。
Evaṃ attasanniyyātanena saraṇaṃ gantvā attanā kataṃ aparādhaṃ pakāsento accayo maṃ, bhantetiādimāha. Tattha accayoti aparādho. Maṃ accagamāti maṃ atikkamma abhibhavitvā pavatto. Dhammikaṃ dhammarājānanti ettha dhammaṃ caratīti dhammiko. Dhammeneva rājā jāto, na pitughātanādinā adhammenāti dhammarājā. Jīvitā voropesinti jīvitā viyojesiṃ. Paṭiggaṇhātūti khamatu. Āyatiṃ saṃvarāyāti anāgate saṃvaratthāya. Puna evarūpassa aparādhassa dosassa khalitassa akaraṇatthāya.
如此,依靠自我所归依之处所,显露自我所造之过失。彼谓“不在此处”,意即过失已显。谓“侵越我”,意谓越过界限、迫害我者。言“法界王者”,此处谓行持法行者。法境生王,不因父母杀害等不法行为得王位。生命被割断,应当宽恕。故言“承诺宽恕”。“未来所守护”,意指为未来修持戒律以护持。而做此种过失之不追责,乃因对其恶过已生厌恶之心也。
§251
251.Tagghāti ekaṃse nipāto. Yathā dhammaṃ paṭikarosīti yathā dhammo ṭhito tatheva karosi, khamāpesīti vuttaṃ hoti. Taṃ te mayaṃ paṭiggaṇhāmāti taṃ tava aparādhaṃ mayaṃ khamāma. Vuḍḍhihesā, mahārāja ariyassa vinayeti esā, mahārāja, ariyassa vinaye buddhassa bhagavato sāsane vuḍḍhi nāma. Katamā? Yāyaṃ accayaṃ accayato disvā yathādhammaṃ paṭikaritvā āyatiṃ saṃvarāpajjanā, desanaṃ pana puggalādhiṭṭhānaṃ karonto – ‘‘yo accayaṃ accayato disvā yathādhammaṃ paṭikaroti, āyatiṃ saṃvaraṃ āpajjatī’’ti āha.
“Tagghāti”为单数名词,意为对立冲突,如反对法之行为。且有“如法把持”、得“宽恕”之意。此在于劝慰宽恕。此处指:“我等接受此过失,故我等宽恕尔之过失。”谓“年长大王,法之教诲即于佛教法中生长增益”。此为何?因为此“过失已生厌恶,依《如法而行》的标准,未来以恪守戒律为目,结合于对师法之信心,乃能生守护未来之心。”如是说。
§252
252.Evaṃ vutteti evaṃ bhagavatā vutte. Handa ca dāni mayaṃ bhanteti ettha handāti vacasāyatthe nipāto. So hi gamanavacasāyaṃ katvā evamāha. Bahukiccāti balavakiccā. Bahukaraṇīyāti tasseva vevacanaṃ. Yassadāni tvanti yassa idāni tvaṃ mahārāja gamanassa kālaṃ maññasi jānāsi, tassa kālaṃ tvameva jānāsīti vuttaṃ hoti. Padakkhiṇaṃ katvā pakkāmīti tikkhattuṃ padakkhiṇaṃ katvā dasanakhasamodhānasamujjalaṃ añjaliṃ sirasi patiṭṭhapetvā yāva dassanavisayaṃ bhagavato abhimukhova paṭikkamitvā dassanavijahanaṭṭhānabhūmiyaṃ pañcapatiṭṭhitena vanditvā pakkāmi.
252.如是述说者,即如世尊所说。且听,如今我等将说“离”字,此“离”字为动词“说”之附着语尾。彼当于出行语中作此说明,言曰:多勤劳者谓之“多”勤劳之事。多行者谓同义。‘今此时’及‘那时’是指你啊大王,所认为出行之时,所知之时,此时彼时你自知之,此意则已说定。绕行一周之后起身离去,迅速绕行一周,洁净齿间,合掌安置于头上,至见世尊之境界,面向世尊之后退,行至五个供养处地,恭敬顶礼而去。
§253
253.Khatāyaṃ, bhikkhave, rājāti khato ayaṃ, bhikkhave, rājā. Upahatāyanti upahato ayaṃ. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – ayaṃ, bhikkhave, rājā khato upahato bhinnapatiṭṭho jāto, tathānena attanāva attā khato, yathā attano patiṭṭhā na jātāti. Virajanti rāgarajādivirahitaṃ. Rāgamalādīnaṃyeva vigatattā vītamalaṃ. Dhammacakkhunti dhammesu vā cakkhuṃ, dhammamayaṃ vā cakkhuṃ, aññesu ṭhānesu tiṇṇaṃ maggānametaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Idha pana sotāpattimaggasseva. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – sace iminā pitā ghātito nābhavissa, idāni idhevāsane nisinno sotāpattimaggaṃ patto abhavissa, pāpamittasaṃsaggena panassa antarāyo jāto. Evaṃ santepi yasmā ayaṃ tathāgataṃ upasaṅkamitvā ratanattayaṃ saraṇaṃ gato, tasmā mama sāsanamahantatāya yathā nāma koci purisassa vadhaṃ katvā pupphamuṭṭhimattena daṇḍena mucceyya, evameva lohakumbhiyaṃ nibbattitvā tiṃsavassasahassāni adho patanto heṭṭhimatalaṃ patvā tiṃsavassasahassāni uddhaṃ gacchanto punapi uparimatalaṃ pāpuṇitvā muccissatīti idampi kira bhagavatā vuttameva, pāḷiyaṃ pana na ārūḷhaṃ.
253.比库!这里所说“君王”,就是这位国王。所谓断裂,就是被断裂者。此语指说:这位比库!国王已遭断裂,被拆散,破坏根基,其自身如是断裂,犹如其根基不存。此人已远离玷染欲贪等种种,内心净洁无垢。说此人实为法眼,即在法中有所见,有法之眼,能了知三种道路:此中是在“流向初果”的道。于是说:若否此人父亲未被杀害,则此人如今现处尘世位,已得流果;若与恶友同住,则遭阻碍。然而,因堕入世尊宝舍,所以除灭杀父之罪;因此得广大神通,如同未曾有人以单薄罚杖杀害他一般。同样地,此人历经三万年,如铁缸下沉般坠入最低处,三万年后往上升至最高处方能解脱;此理正是世尊所言,非巴利文中所记载。
Idaṃ pana suttaṃ sutvā raññā koci ānisaṃso laddhoti? Mahāānisaṃso laddho. Ayañhi pitu māritakālato paṭṭhāya neva rattiṃ na divā niddaṃ labhati, satthāraṃ pana upasaṅkamitvā imāya madhurāya ojavantiyā dhammadesanāya sutakālato paṭṭhāya niddaṃ labhi. Tiṇṇaṃ ratanānaṃ mahāsakkāraṃ akāsi. Pothujjanikāya saddhāya samannāgato nāma iminā raññā sadiso nāhosi. Anāgate pana vijitāvī nāma paccekabuddho hutvā parinibbāyissatīti . Idamavoca bhagavā. Attamanā te bhikkhū bhagavato bhāsitaṃ abhinandunti.
读闻此经,国王自知所得大利益。曰:这人在击杀父亲之时亲历惨痛,不觉昼夜失眠;惟有亲近导师,闻殊妙法语,乃得安眠。此人表现出三宝最高敬意。若大众信心具足,则此国王堪比之。未来,有一位名为胜林者,成就辟支佛,入般涅槃。世尊发言如是。比库们心悦诚服,欢喜赞叹世尊所说教义。
Iti sumaṅgalavilāsiniyā dīghanikāyaṭṭhakathāyaṃ · 如是于《善吉祥光》长部注疏中
Sāmaññaphalasuttavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā. · 《沙门果经》注释完毕。